1651SM & 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 & R1.5.1

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.100.562
K Ed.07
3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 442

DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 14.260 kBytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
numerate
numbered
da from
a to
1/436
436/436
TARGHETTE - LABELS
frontespizio
front
955.100.562 K Ed.07
manuale
manual
436
Vedere lista da pagina:

ALLEGATI DI UNIT (MSZZQ)
See list from page:
UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ)
433
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:
438
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:
219
No documenti MSZZQ
No documents MSZZQ
33
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
The documents MSZZQ cited in section UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST are stored in PDAS.
Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
Source file: ALICE 6.10
PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
07
RELEASED
955.100.562 TQZZA
3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA

4
1/ 4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
Dislocazione
VIMERCATE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
ALCATEL OPTICS GROUP
Autori
C.FAVERO
1651SM2.5.1&1661SMC1.5.1
VERSION C2 ON
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
:
Dominio
:
Divisione
:
Rubrica
:
Tipo
Codici di Distribuzione
TND
LINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS SDH
SYNCHRONOUS HIGH ORDER MUX/LINE
1651SM 2.5.1&1661SMC 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK
Interno :
Esterno
:
Approvazioni
Nome
App.
G.CAPRIOLI
E.CORRADINI
Nome
App.
INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI
ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10
sistemazione toc e figlist
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

07
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
622 Mbit/s AddDrop Multiplexer

2.5 Gbit/s Compact AddDrop Multiplexer
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
07
RELEASED
955.100.562 TQZZA

4
2/ 4

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.100.562 K Ed.07
VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.100.562 K Ed.07
VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on
622 Mbit/s AddDrop Multiplexer 2.5 Gbit/s Compact AddDrop Multiplexer
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on
622 Mbit/s AddDrop Multiplexer 2.5 Gbit/s Compact AddDrop Multiplexer
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Version C2 on
955.100.562 K Ed.07
ED
07
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
RELEASED
955.100.562 TQZZA

4
3/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
ED
07
RELEASED
955.100.562 TQZZA
4/ 4
Technical Handbook
Alcatel
1651SM & 1661SM-C
1651SM Rel.2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version C2 on
955.100.562 K Ed.07
955.100.562 K Ed.07
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1651SM 2.5.1 & 1661SMC 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.5 Notes on Ed.04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.6 Notes on Ed.05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.7 Notes on Ed.06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.8 Notes on Ed.07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
13
14
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
23
23
24
25
26
28
28
29
30
4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
07
001016
SC00100201
06
000316
SC00031602
01
971006
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE
E.CORRADINI
G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE
E.CORRADINI
G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE
E.CORRADINI
C.FAVERO ITAVE
F. MAZZARELLA ITAVE
S. SCANABISSI ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
1651SM2.5.1&1661SMC1.5.1
VERSION C2 ON
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
1 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
31
31
32
32
33
34
34
5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 Use of the CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3 CDROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4 CDROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Introduction to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
55
57
59
60
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Equipment front view (New Mechanical Practice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Equipment part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Units Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Access Module front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
66
67
82
90
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 STM4 Aggregates subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 STM16 Aggregate subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Connection subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Tributary Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Automatic Protections Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.6 Synchronizing subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.7 Auxiliary and Overhead Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.8 Control subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.9 Power Supply Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 3x34Mbit/s TRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 3x45Mbit/s TRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 DVB Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
97
100
101
103
109
116
148
151
153
155
157
157
166
172
179
186
192
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
2 / 436

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3 General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8 Optical STM1 Tributary units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.9 Connection Card unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.10 Matrix unit: Full Matrix Unit & 16x16 Matrix Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.12 STM16 Aggregate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13 AUX/EOW Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.14 Clock Reference Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.15 Equipment Controller SMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.16 Power Supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.17 DS Futurebus Termination subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.18 Alarm Interface Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.19 Qx & Synchronism Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.20 Qx 10 BT & Synchronism Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.21 Power and Housekeeping Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.22 Power and Housekeeping Access Module/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.23 Auxiliary Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.24 Tributary Access Module subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
205
218
219
226
234
243
248
253
260
262
263
266
269
272
273
274
274
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

4.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.1.1 Electrical and optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.2 Unit Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.2.1 STM4 Aggregate units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.2.2 STM16 Aggregate units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.2.3 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L16.2 JE3 Aggregate , a 15 dBm
Booster and a Preamplifier unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.2.4 Optical Tributary units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.2.5 140/STM1 Switch Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.6 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.7 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.8 DVB TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.9 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.10 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.11 Clock Reference Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.2.12 AUX/EOW units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.3 Power Supply Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.4 Alarm Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.5 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.6 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.6.1 Climatic for operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.6.2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.6.3 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Unpacking and Warehousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Warehousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Mounting the Union Duct for the fiberguide duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
311
312
312
313
313
314
314
317
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
3 / 436
318
320
328
329
339
344
347
351
352
355
358
358
359
TURNON, TEST AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6 INITIAL TURNON, TESTS AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Instruments and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Local Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Check on Protection Ground Connections and Optical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 Power supply checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3 Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4 Aggregate Tx optical power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5 Multidemultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries . . . . . . . . .
6.5.6 Multidemultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the DVB Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.7 Check on the receiver sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.8 Check on the efficiency of the optical protection (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.9 Test on Tx optical power transmitted by the Optical 155Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.10 Multidemultiplexing and AIS tests on the optical 155Mbit/s tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.11 Check on the 64 Kbit/s auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.12 Check on the V11 auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.13 STM4 Aggregate APS Protection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.14 Tributary EPS Protection Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.15 CRUs EPS Protection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.16 Full Matrix EPS protection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.17 Check on External free running synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.18 Remote Alarms check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Check on the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 Multidemultiplexing check on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2 Transit (passthrough) check on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3 TU pathprotection check on a ring connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4 Check on the EOW channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 Engineering Order Wire channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 Download of the equipment software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.3 Craft terminalmanaged equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
365
366
367
368
369
369
370
370
372
374
376
378
380
382
384
386
388
390
392
396
398
400
402
404
404
406
408
408
410
411
412
412
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
415
415
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
4 / 436

5.2.3 Mechanical Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Electrical and Optical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 Protection ground connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Electrical Tributary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 Qx & Synch. Interface Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4 Alarm Interface Access Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.5 Auxiliary Data Channel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6 DVB Tributaries Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7 STM4, STM1 Optical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.8 STM16 Optical Connections and passthrough connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.9 IECB connection to/from DROP SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.10 Interface F connections for local P.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.11 Power and Housekeeping Access Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

7.2 Maintenance Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Instruments And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.3 Particular rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
416
416
417
417
418
419
419
419
419
419
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
425
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
5 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIGURES
Figure 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3. Labels for units with heatsink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5. Labels for units with no speces on the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6. Subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7. Modules labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. Label identifying label on catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Label specifying serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. ETSI mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. SDH network structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. ALCATEL Synchronous System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. Terminal multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. Dual terminal multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. Add/Drop Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. Pointtopoint links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. Linear dropinsert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. HUB STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. WDM applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 20. Ring structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 21. Unidirectional broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. Front view of the 1651 SM/1661 SMC (New Practice Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. Access points : 2/1.5 MBit/s and Tran Smux Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. 34, 45 MBit/s, Switchable and DVB Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. Access points :Optical Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26. Access points: Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27. Access points: STM4 Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28. Access points: STM16 HM1 Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 29. Access points: CRU, AUXEOW, DS Future bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 30. Access Points: Power Supply and Equipment Controller SMEC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 31. Access Module front cover plate Auxiliary, Battery, Alarm Access Modules . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32. Access Module front cover plate Qx Interface & Sync. Access Module. . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 33. Access Module front cover plate Qx 10BT Interface & Sync. Access Module. . . . . . .
Figure 34. Access Module front cover plate 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35. Access Module front cover plate 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access
Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36. Access Module front cover plate 3x34/45 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. . . . . . . . .
Figure 37. Access Module front cover plate 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. . . . . . . . .
Figure 38. General Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 39. Block diagram of the Tributary and Aggregate units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 40. Connection with STM4Aggregate (1651 SM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 41. Connection with Connection Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 42. Crossconnection with Full Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43. Crossconnection with STM16 Aggregate (1661 SMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44. 1+1 EPS connection for 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical trib. 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 45. 1+1 EPS connections for 3x34 Mb/s trib. 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 46. 1+N EPS connections for 2/1.5 Mb/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 47. 1+N EPS connections, 140 Mbit/s or electrical STM1 trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 48. 1+N EPS connections, 34 Mb/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 49. 1+N EPS connections, 34/2 Trans.Mux & 5x2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
42
56
57
58
59
59
59
60
60
60
61
62
62
66
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
98
99
104
105
106
108
120
120
121
122
124
125
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
6 / 436

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 50. Tributary EPS operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 51. Full Matrix EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 52. Single Ended MS Trial Protection (SLAPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 53. Typical ring network with SNCP (PPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 55. Drop and Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 56. Drop and Continue 1st failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 57. Drop and Continue 2nd failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 58. 2F MS SPRING Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 59. Effect of a BRIDGE EAST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 60. Effect of a BRIDGE WEST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 61. Effect of SWITCH EAST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 62. Effect of SWITCH WEST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 63. Line break recovering operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 64. 2F MSSPRING example of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 65. Squelching on isolated Node connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 66. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 67. D/C IC Connection used for the SNCP/MS SPRING Interworking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 68. Synchronizing subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 69. Auxiliaries / Overheads block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 70. Controller subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 71. 1651SM/1661 SMC General Management Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 72. Connection Mode for TMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 73. VC12 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 74. TU12 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 75. Block diagram: 21x2 Mbit/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 76. 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 77. VC3 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 78. TU3 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 79. Block diagram : 3 x 34 Mbit/s Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 80. 34/2 Trans Mux and 5 x 2 Mbit/s tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 81. Schema funzionale 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 82. Block diagram : DVB TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 83. VC4 Structure and POH byte contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 84. STM1 structure and SOH byte contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 85. Block diagram: 140/STM1 Switch tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 86. Block diagram: Optical Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 87. Block diagram: Optical Trib. S/L1.1 600 FC/SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 88. AU4 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 89. Block diagram: Full Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 90. SOH structure of STM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 91. STM4 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 92. Block diagram: STM4 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 93. SOH structure of STM16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 94. STM16 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 95. Block diagram : STM16 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 96. Block diagram: SL/SM AUX/EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 97. Block diagram: Clock Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 98. Block diagram : Equipment Controller SMEC 2A8R + 16F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 99. Block Diagram: Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 101. Block diagram: Alarm Interface Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 102. Block diagram: Qx & Synch. Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 103. Block diagram: Qx 10BT & Synch. Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
127
129
131
133
135
136
137
137
138
140
140
141
141
142
144
145
146
147
150
152
154
156
156
163
164
165
171
177
177
178
185
191
197
202
203
204
210
217
222
225
231
232
233
240
241
242
247
252
259
261
262
265
268
271
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
7 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
272
273
275
276
277
278
301
302
305
315
316
317
319
322
328
329
331
332
334
336
338
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
353
354
356
357
358
359
360
361
373
375
377
379
383
385
387
389
391
393
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
8 / 436

Figure 104. Power Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 105. Power Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 106. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module block diagram (one of the 21 switch functions performed)
Figure 107. TRMUX +5x2 Mbit/s block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 108. 34 Mbit/s Access Module Switch block diagram (one of three switch function
performed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 109. 140 Mbit/s Access Module Switch block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 110. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 111. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 112. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 113. Subrack insertion into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 114. Subrack insertion into Optinex rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 115. Mounting the union duct for the fiberguide duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 116. Mechanical structure of the subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 117. Connection points for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 118. Protection ground connections for N3 LC racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 119. Tributary units and Access Module subunits relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 120. 1.5 Mbit/s (100 Ohm) Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 121. 2 Mbit/s (75 ohms) Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 122. 2 Mbit/s (120 Ohm) Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 123. 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary connections 120 Ohm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 124. 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tributary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 125. 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 126. Management of Qx & Sync Access Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 127. Management of Access Module Connectors Qx 10 BT & Synch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 128. Q2 Interface connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 129. Synchronism Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 130. 10 BT connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 131. Management of Alarm Interface access module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 132. Remote Alarms Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 133. RAB Rack Lamps Interface connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 134. Management of Auxiliary Data Channel Access module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 135. EOW extension connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 136. V11 auxiliary channels connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 137. 64 KBit/s auxiliary channels connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 138. DVB Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 139. STM4 Optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 140. ETSI Optical Connector dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 141. STM16 Optical Connection and passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 142. HM1 STM16 passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 143. IECBS BUS Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 144. Management of Battery & Houskeeping Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 145. Housekeeping Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 146. Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 147. Tx optical power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 148. Test on multidemultiplexing and AIS for electrical tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 149. Test on multidemultiplexing and AIS for DVB tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 150. Receiver sensitivity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 151. Check on the optical power transmitted by the Optical Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 152. Test on multidemultiplexing and AIS for optical tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 154. V11 auxiliary channels check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 155. Test on Aggregate Protection (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 156. Test on 21 x 2 Mbit/s trib. N+1 EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 157. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. N+1 EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 158. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. 1+1 EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 159. Test on CRU EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 160. Test on Full Matrix EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 162. Test on remote alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 163. Multidemultiplexing tests on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 164. Transits check on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 165. TU crossover check on a ringconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 166. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
395
397
399
401
403
405
407
409
420
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Handbook Configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Main Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9. Part List : Connection Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 10. Part List: Accessories of the 1651 SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11. Part List : Explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12. Connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 14. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15. Parameters specified for STM4 Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 16. Parameters specified for STM16 Optical Interfaces (Single Channel). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 17. Parameters specified for STM16 Optical Interfaces (Multi Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 18. Parameters specified for STM1 Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 19. Transportation climatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 20. Numbering, functions and paragraphs referred to the Connection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 21. Parts making up the installation set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 22. Suggested cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 23. Instruments and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 24. Remote Alarms activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 25. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 26. Hardware presetting documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
14
14
16
29
34
43
68
75
77
79
103
111
112
284
286
287
290
307
323
324
327
368
402
425
428
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
9 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
10 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HANDBOOK GUIDE
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
11 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
12 / 436

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General information
WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
ED
PRODUCT
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
1651SM & 1661SM-C
3AL 34643 AAAA
521.200.100
VERSION
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
C2 on
3AL 34623AEAB
521.574.200
PRODUCT
RELEASE
1651SM
2.5.1
1661SM-C
1.5.1
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
13 / 436
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page.13 consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware
ANV Part No.
FACTORY
Part No.
[1]
1651SM Rel.2.5.1
& 1661SMC Rel.1.5.1
Technical Handbook
3AL 36668 AAAA
955.100.562 K
[2]
1641 SMD Rel. 1.0

Technical Handbook
3AL 34434 AAAA
HANDBOOK
REF
THIS
HDBK
955.100.182 F
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control

ANV Part No.
FACTORY
Part No.
3AL 36566 AAAA
957.120.732 A
HANDBOOK
REF
1651SM Rel.2.5
& 1661SMC Rel.1.5 .1
&
1651SM Rel.2.5.1
& 1661SMC Rel.1.5.1
Operators Handbook
[3]
THIS
HDBK
Table 3. Documentation on CDROM

See para.6.5 on page 51
REF
CDROM TITLE
1651SM Rel.2.5.1 CDROMDOC EN
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
3AL 37765 AAAA
417.100.005
[4]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [3]
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
14 / 436

1.3 Product-release handbooks

1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the Code of Practice for Instruction
Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE:
It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type

of labels that might be affixed to the equipment.
DESCRIPTION:
It contains all the equipments general and detailed system

features including its application in the telecommunication
network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or
optical).
INSTALLATION:
It contains all the information (mechanical, electrical and/or

optical) needed to install the equipment
TURNON, TESTS AND

OPERATION:
It contains information covering presettings and turnon

procedures as well as guiding measurements related to checks
(to ensure correct operation) and operational changes (*)
MAINTENANCE:
It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures and restore to normal operation through the
withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)
APPENDICES:
Section included (but not necessarily utilized) to describe

possible alternative unit.
HARDWARE SETTING
DOCUMENTATION:
It encloses the documents related to unit hardware setting

operations, if envisaged.
ANNEXES:
Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing

additional documentation or general information on other topics
not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(*)
ED
If the equipment is software integrated and manmachine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, Work
Station or other external processing/displaying system) the turnon, operation and maintenance
carried out with such system is described in the Operators Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 14 )
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
15 / 436
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

Legenda
n = new part
m = modified part
Table 4. Handbook Configuration check
EDITION
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
DESCRIPTIONS
1. GENERAL
2. CONFIGURATION
3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
INSTALLATION
5. INSTALLATION
TURNON, TEST AND OPERATION
6. TURNON, TEST AND OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
7. MAINTENANCE
APPENDICES
Nothing envisaged
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
Unit documentation list
08
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
ANNEXES
Nothing envisaged
Note:
the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

and ANNEXES) is not subjected to configuration check.
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on October 06 ,1997 is the first validated and officially released issue.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Ed.02 created on August 27, 1998 is the second validated and officially released issue and it has been
introduced to add new items, Units and Accessories.
The Unit Documentation List Section has modified to apply the latest internal Standard.
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed01 to Ed.02
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
16 / 436

1.5 Handbook configuration check


Ed.03 created on September 29, 1998 is the third validated and officially released issue and it has been
introduced to add new items and Units .
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed02 to Ed.03
Ed.04 created on June 04, 1999 is the fourth validated and officially released issue and it has been
introduced to add new items and Units in order to align this manual to the C2 SW Version.
An example of interworking with Booster +17dBm has been added in the Technical Specification Chapter.
Correction of errors and editing improvements has been carried out.
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.03 to Ed.04
Ed.05 created on January 24, 2000 is the fifth validated and officially released version of handbook.
Changes are relevant to 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary unit adding and some Aggregate units elimination.
Ed.06 created on March 16, 2000 is the sixth validated and officially released version of the handbook.
Changes are relevant to change in MSZZQ documents list in section HARDWARE SETTING
DOCUMENTATION.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ed.07 created on October 16, 2000 is the seventh validated and officially released version of the
handbook.
Changes are relevant to the insertion of the optinex rack installation kit, to the technical characteristics
updating, to the instructions for safety as well the improving of the documentation information.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
17 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
18 / 436

2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:
89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:
by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992
by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993
Compliancy to EMC Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :
Issue requisites : EN 55022 Limits and methods and measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of information technology equipment , August 1994 edition.
Compliancy Class : A
Immunity requisites : EN 500821 Electromagnetic compatibilityGeneric immunity standard,

Part 1 : Residential, commercial and light industry , January 1992 edition
The equipment operates in the following environment :

Telecommunication center
WARNING
This is a class A product. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
2.2 Safety
The product is in compliance with the following Directives:
92/59/EEC Directive issued on June 29th, 1992
Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
IEC 60950 (1991) +A1 +A2 +A3 +A4
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
19 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
20 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS

3.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
ED
Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
Apply dry gauze on the burns;
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
21 / 436
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying
on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.
Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patients head and one under
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patients chin and

mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the

patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patients chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patients nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patients head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen

expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
22 / 436

3.2 Safety Rules

3.2.1 General Rules
Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the Technical Handbook, in particular chapters:
Installation
Turnon, Tests & Operation
Maintenance
Observe safety rules
When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be
aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
23 / 436
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
dangerous electrical voltages
harmful optical signals
risk of explosion
moving mechanical parts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
24 / 436

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

The symbols presented in para.3.2.3 through 3.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be
present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this
handbook refers to.
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages

3.2.3.1 Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
3.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a)
Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b)
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
3.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para.4.1.1 on page 282.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
25 / 436
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 82511993
International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
LASER class
Power emitted
Wave length
Ref. Norm
Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW

DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
exemple of power and lenght values
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
26 / 436

3.2.4.1 Labelling

3.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules

On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a)
Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b)
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c)
Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d)
All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e)
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f)
Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g)
Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h)
Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
3.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para.4.1.1 on page 282.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
27 / 436
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts

3.2.6.1 Labelling and safety instructions
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
28 / 436

3.2.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts


The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in C ):
(TTamb) (DTmax + 25 Tmra)

where:
T
Tamb
DTmax
Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.
Tmra
The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment

specification or 25C, whichever is greater.
Ambient temperature during the test.

Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Table 5. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2
Maximum overtemperature
Operatoraccessible parts
Metal
Glass,
porcelain
Plastic,
rubber
Handle knob, ect., held or touched

for short periods
35
45
60
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held
30
40
50
Outer surface of the equipment that

can be touched
45
55
70
Inner surface of the equipment that

can be touched
45
55
70
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a)
ED
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
29 / 436
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Chapter 5 on page 311.
Chapter 5 para 5.1 on page 312.
Chapter 5 para 5.2.1.2 on page 314.
Chapter 5 para 5.3.1 on page 328.
Chapter 5 para 5.3.11.2 on page 361.

Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
30 / 436

4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronical
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to chapters:
Installation,
Turnon, Tests & operation
Maintenance
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.1.1 General Norms Installation
ED
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customers Installation Norms. (or similar
documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and degrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
31 / 436
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.1.3 General Norms Maintenance
ED
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
32 / 436

4.1.2 General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation

4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic dischargers, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
COILED CORD
ED
an elasticized band worn around the wrist
a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
33 / 436
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
statement....
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This chapter indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labels
affixed to the equipment.
Figure 1. thru Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Figure 8. and Figure 9. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Table 6. Label references
Name of Label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ref. No.
1
label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.)
serial number of item specified on catalogue
label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N.)
Final Test certificate
Unit ESD mark
CE mark
ESD mark for packaged subunits
Subrack ESD mark
Factory use only code
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
34 / 436

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 6. on page 34
Figure 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
35 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
36 / 436

NB. = Affix labels to p.c.s components side on the empty spaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 3. Labels for units with heatsink.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
37 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
38 / 436

2
1
4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB = Affix labels to p.c.b.s components side on the empty spaces.

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34. The components shown
on the frontcover are merely indicative showing that there is no space left for the labels
Figure 5. Labels for units with no speces on the front cover
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
39 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34.
Figure 6. Subrack labels
07
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
40 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34.
Figure 7. Modules labels
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
41 / 436


FACTORY P/N + CS
ANV + ICS P/N
Bar code of the ANV + ICS P/Ns

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
Figure 8. Label identifying label on catalogue
Serial No.
Bar code of the serial No.

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. Label specifying serial No.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
42 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Table 7. List of Abbreviations
MEANING
ABBREVIATION
ABN
Abnormal
ACO
Alarm cutoff (alarm storing)
AD
Assembly drawing
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplexer
AIS
Alarm indication Signal
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
APD
Avalanche Photodiode
ASI
Asynchronuos Serial Interface
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ATTD
Attended (alarm storing)
AU
EUA and UP sum alarm
AUI
Attachement Unit Interface
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
AUOH
AU Pointer
AU4
Administrative unit level 4
BATT
Battery
BER
Bit Error Rate
BIP
Bit Interleaved Parity
Storing command
CAND
All power supply units units are faulty
CAREM
Unit extraction alarm
CKA/B
Clock from CRU A/B
CKL
Clock for LIECB
CKMSTOFF
Clock failure
CKN
Network clock for NIECB
CK16ALL
16 MHz clock failure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
43 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING
CK38ALL
38 MHz clock failure
CMI
Code Mark Inversion
COAX
Coaxial
CPI
Incoming parallel contacts
CPO
Outgping parallel contacts
CPU
Central Processing Unit (refereed to Controller equipment unit

or Microprocessor)
CRU
Clock Reference Unit
CTYPE
Unit Identification signals
C12/C3/C4
1st, 3rd and 4th level container
Data
DAC
Digital/Analog Converter
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DCE
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DE
Received date
DEN
Incoming negative data
DEP
Incoming positive data
DPLL
Digital Phase Locked Loop
DT
Transmitted data
DTE
Data Terminating Equipment
DTMF
Dual tone multifrequency
DUN
Outgoing negative data
DUP
Outgoing positive data (Digital Video Broadcasting)
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting
East
EACT
Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM/E2PROM
Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
44 / 436

ABBREVIATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
EM
Part List
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic interface
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
EPS
Equipment Protection Switching
ESCT
Enhanced Shelf Controller Telettra
ESD
Electrostatic discharges
ETSI
European Telecomunication Standards Istitute
EUA
Equipment Controller extraction unit alarm
EXBER
Excessive Bit Error Rate
EXT
EXternal alarms
Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FEPROM
Flash Eprom
FERF
Far End Receive Failure
GA
Gate Array
HDB3
High Density Bipolar Code
HIGHREFL
High Optical reflections
HP
High Power
HPA
Higher Order Path Adaptation
HPOM
Higher order Path Overhead Monitoring
HUG
Higher order Unequipped Generator
HW
Hardware
ID
Identification signals
IEC
International Electrotechnical Committee
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
IN
Input
IND
Indicative alarm
INT
Internal Local Alarms
ISW/OSW
Switching commands
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
45 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING
ITUT (*)
International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication

Sector
JE
Joint Engineering
LAN
Local Area Network
LD DEG
Laser Degrade
LD FAIL
Laser Transmitter local failure
LDSSHUT
Command for ALS
LIECB
Local Intra Equipment Control Bus
LOF
Loss of alignment
LOS
Loss of signal
LPA
Lower order path adaption
LPC
Lower order path connection
LPM
Loopback line side (remote)
LPOM
Lower order Path Overhead Monitoring
LPT
Lower order path termination or Loopback equipment side

(local)
Tagblock or Alarm storing
MNE
Master Network Element
MFSALL
Loss of multiframe synchronism
MGMT
Management
MITL
Loss of Tx pulses from Laser
MLM
Multi Longitudinal mode
MSAIS
AIS of the Multiplexer section
MSFERF
FERF of multiplexer section
MSP
Multiplexer section protection
MSA
Multiplexer section adaptation
MST
Multiplexer section termination
MS SPRING
Multiplexer section Shared Protection Ring
MSW
Switching command
NIECB
Network Intra Equipment Control Bus
NRZ
No return to zero
ED

ABBREVIATION
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
46 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
NURG
Not urgent alarm
OHBUS
Dedicated housekeeping stream
OKKO
Switching request signals
ORALIM
ORing of station power supply alarm
OS
Operative system
OSNR
Optical Signal to Noise Ratio
OUT
Output
P/S
Parallel/Serial converter
PC
Personal Computer
PFAIL
Power supply failure
PG (SA)
Pointer Generator of Section Adaptation
PI
Physical interface
PI (SA)
Pointer interpreter of section adaptation
POH
Path Overhead
PPS
Path Protection Switching
PWALM
Power supply alarm
PWANDOR
ANDOR/2 failure
Q2/QB2
TMN Interface with B2 protocol. Interface towards plesiochronous equipment
Q3/QB3
TMN Interface with B3 protocol. Interface towards TMN
RURG
Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RAM
Random Access Memory
RCK
Received clock
REF
Reference
REL
Release
RMS
Root Mean Square
RNURG
Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red

LED
RST
Regeneration Section Termination
S/SE
Electrical schematic
S/P
Serial/Parallel Converter
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
47 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING
SA
Section Adaptation
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SETG
Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation function
SLM
Single Longitudinal Mode
SM
Single Mode/Synchronous Mux
SMEC
Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection, Substitutes PPS
SOH
Section Overhead
SSMB
Synchronous Status Message Byte
STM1/STM4/STM16
Synchronous Transport Module, levels 1,4,16
SW
Software
SYNC A/B
Synchronism from CRU A/B
TANC
Remote alarm due to failure of all power supply units
TD
Layout drawing
TMN
Telecomunication Management Netwoek
TORC
Remote alarm due to a faulty/missing power supply unit
TRIB
Tributary
TUG2/3
Tributary unit group, level 2,3
TUOH
TU pointer
TUP/UP
Equipment Controller remote alarm
TU12/TU3
Tributary unit
URG
Urgent
VCXO
Voltage controlled oscillator
VC12/VC3/vc4
Virtual Container, levels 1.3.4
VSERV
Auxiliary voltage
West
WKCH
Working channel

ABBREVIATION
NOTE
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND CCITT)
in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITUR and ITUT, respectively.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
48 / 436

6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A product evolves through successive product-releases which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain product-release availability date.
So, a productrelease defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a product-release has further development steps, named versions, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new version of a product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para. 6.4 on page 50.
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.
Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to AlcatelTelecom Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the Technical Handbook) and software (usually the
Operators Handbook) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
On the other hand, the Operators Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
49 / 436
6.4 Handbook Updating
Each handbook is identified by:
the name of the product-release (and version when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
the handbook name,
the handbook P/N,
the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 4. on page 16;
in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and
drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not
modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine
interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the
explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
6.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release

A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
50 / 436

The handbooks associated to the productrelease are listed in para.1.3 on page 14.
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM

In the following CDROM means Customer Documentation on CDROM

6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM
In most cases, a CDROM contains the documentation of one productrelease(version) and for a certain
language.
In some other cases, the same CDROM can contain the documentation of different
productrelease(version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
CDROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
the Installation Guides
the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
CDROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optional
features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from
Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CDROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by

InterleafWorldViewPress after the manual addition of some hyperlinks which make the navigation
through the various handbooks easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CDROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (InterleafWorldView) is
added and a master CDROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After a complete functional check, the CDROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the
Production Department, so that the CDROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
51 / 436
6.5.2 Use of the CDROM
The minimum configuration for World View (rel.2.2.2) utilization on a PC is:
Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT (3.51 and 4.00)

Processor: Intel 486
RAM: 16Mbyte
Disk space: 20Mbyte
The setup procedure is present in the booklet included in the CDROM box.
After the setup procedure, which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment, the Customer
is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included
in the viewer, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
N.B.
Copyright notification
WorldView:
Alcatel documents:
Copyright 19811996
INTERLEAF Inc.
All rights reserved.
The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained
in the CDROMs officially supplied by Alcatel.
All rights reserved.
Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CDROMs
officially supplied by Alcatel, use and communication of its contents are not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
6.5.3 CDROM identification

Each CDROM is identified:
1)
by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper
surface:
the name of the productrelease(s) (and version when the CDROM is applicable to
the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
a writing indicating the language(s),
the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N),
the CDROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2)
and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6.5.4 CDROM updating

The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para.6.5.3 point 2 ) , in
association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem as a
structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system,
the AlcatelInformationSystem automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation
department, indicating the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these
handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM.
Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
52 / 436

The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DESCRIPTIONS
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
53 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
54 / 436

1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction to the Equipment
Two distinct equipment are described in this handbook:
1651 SM: add/drop synchronous multiplexer defined as a Synchronous Transport Module,

level 4 (STM4).
1661 SMC: add/drop synchronous multiplexer defined as a Sync. Transport Module, level 16
(STM16). This equipment is defined as Compact (c)because the same mechanical structure
of the STM4 equipment can house up to a 2Mbit/s STM16 equipment with add/drop.
The 1661 SMC equipment can be considered an upgrading of the 1651 SM in that it has been
designed by simply replacing two aggregates STM4 units (equipped in the 1651 SM) with the
aggregate STM16 ones.
The equipment establishes a 622/2488 Mbit/s transmission system whose high flexibility allows to set up
various configurations, mainly Line Terminal Drop/Insert Multiplexer with various protections including
operation in ring networks.
The equipment can also operate without Tributaries as a regenerator.
Tributaries are multiplexed and mapped according to the ETSI Recs. (see Figure 10. on page 56)
Tributaries can be both plesiochronous (at 1.5, 2, 34, 45 and 140 Mbit/s) and synchronous
(155 Mbit/s STM1), in the latter case electrical and optical.
Moreover a DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) Tributary is available. This unit receives or transmits the
DVB coded TV channels at 270 Mb/s and maps this signals on 45 Mb/s unidirectional frames to be
transported on the SDH network at VC3 level.
The Unit carries three independent channels at 45 Mb/s .
Transmitting and receiving function is selectable by an hardware jumper on the board.
The equipment can accommodate different and mixed types of configured tributaries.
In this release the equipment can manage an extension shelf , named 1641 SMD Drop shelf , containing
up to 10 (9+1 protected) 21 x 2 Mbit/s tributaries. With regard to this performance the use of the SMEC
as Equipment Controller Unit is mandatory.
This DROP SHELF is not a new Network Element but it is completely supervised and configured by the
Main 1651 SM / 1661 SMC Equipment.
It is a way to extend the capacity of our NE that rises up to 252 2 Mbit/s streams.
Various types of aggregate optical interfaces are available, (see chapter 4 on page 279) in order to fit in
different applications, such as:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
links in G.652 fibres

links in G.653 fibres (dispersionshifted)
links with optical amplifiers (boosters)
links with optical preamplifiers
links with WDM equipments (in this case 16 optical interfaces, coloured at different
wavelengths in the WDM range, are available).
The Aggregate units interface the STM4/STM16 signal and when drop/insert configured can interface
the EAST and WEST sides.
The equipment has been designed to supply protection functions.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
55 / 436
Path protection switching (SNCP)

2 F MS SPRING
EPS for electrical tributaries (1+1, N +1, in compliancy with the tributary utilized).
EPS for Clock Reference unit (synchronism functions) and Full Matrix unit (routing functions)
1+1 MS Linear Trail Protection (APS) singleended switching for STM4 Aggregate units and
STM1 optical and electrical tributary units. (Not operative for the STM16Aggregate).
Power supply protection: Line Shelf 2+1 and 1+1 for the Drop Shelf .
The above functions are described in this Technical Handbook.

The equipment of future releases will also carry out bidirectional Linear APS (MS Linear Trail
protection)functions (1+1) for STM4 and STM1.
The frame allocation of the signals can be changed. The CONNECTION function for the highlevel and
lowlevel VCs is of utmost importance for network management.
The equipment provides access to a wide range of services through the dedicated bytes of the SDH
structure thus facilitating link maintenance and operation.
The equipment interfaces:
Personal Computer (Local Craft Terminal, F Interface)

Network Management System (Interface Q2, Q3)
This allows to analyze the alarm conditions, configure equipment software and execute management
operations.
The alarm status of the equipment is indicated by the front cover LEDs.
Software downloading follows product evolution.
Power supply is delivered by two DC/DC Converters and a standby.
The subracks mechanical structure is compliant with the ETSI standard.
The structure and units accommodated inside it are described in Chapter 2. CONFIGURATION
on page 65
x3
TUG2
2048
Kbit/s
TU12
VC12
C12
TU3
VC3
C3
44736
34368
Kbit/s
C4
139264
Kbit/s
x7
TUG3
x3
x4
STM4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM16
AUG
AU4
VC4
x16
Figure 10. ETSI mapping
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
56 / 436

This release features:

1.2 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network

The 1651 SM/1661 SMC equipment belong to the ALCATEL family products and are compliant with the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) defined by ITUT Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709, G.781, G.782, G.783,
G.803, G.957, G.958.
A typical SDH network structure is shown in Figure 11. on page 57.
The range of Alcatel synchronous systems is shown in Figure 12. on page 58
Some of the 1651 SM/1661 SMC units are also employed in the 1641 SM equipment (155 Mbit/s
add/drop Multiplexer) to simplify spares and network capacity.
The equipment can be utilized in interurban, regional and metropolitan networks configured for standard
plesiochronous or synchronous systems.
The product can be suitably employed on linear, ring and hub networks and on protected or unprotected
line links.
The modes of utilizing the equipment depend on the different types of networks available.
ATTENTION:
The equipment of Figure 12. on page 58 to Figure 21. on page 62 is defined as ADM
(Add Drop Multiplexer).
The Spare Line, in the terminal configured 1661 SMC is not allowed.
NNI
NNI
TR
NNI
NNI
SM
SM
SM
LINE/RADIO
SYSTEM
DCS/EA
LINE/RADIO
SYSTEM
TR
SM
TR
TR
TR
TR
SM
DCS
EA
SM
TR
NNI
SM
TR
= DIGITAL CROSSCONNECT SYSTEM

= EXTERNAL ACCESS EQUIPMENT
= SYNCHRONOUS MULTIPLEXER
= TRIBUTARIES
= NETWORK NODE INTERFACE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 11. SDH network structure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
57 / 436
ALCATEL
1655 SR
622
155
ALCATEL
1641 SM
ALCATEL
1661SMC
ALCATEL
1651 SMC
ALCATEL
1651 SM

ALCATEL
1666 SR
2488
ALCATEL
1664 SL
ALCATEL
1664 SM
ALCATEL
1654 SL
ALCATEL
1641 SMT
ALCATEL
1641SMC
ALCATEL
1641 SX
ALCATEL
1644 SX
155
140
51
45
34
2
0.064
ADD / DROP
TRANSMISSION
CROSSCONNECT
REGENERATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 12. ALCATEL Synchronous System
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
58 / 436
1.2.1 Configuration

Terminal multiplexer (see Figure 13. ).

The multiplexer is provided with an STM4 /STM16 station interface (eventually standby too)
to be connected to a Digital Electronic CrossConnect or to a higher hierarchical line system.
LINE
NE
TRIBS
SPARE
Figure 13. Terminal multiplexer
Dual multiplexer (see Figure 14. )

A subrack can house up to two multiplexing terminals (fully or partially equipped)
LINE
TRIBS
NE
SPARE
LINE
TRIBS
Figure 14. Dual terminal multiplexer
Add/Drop Multiplexer ( see Figure 15. )

The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) signals from (into) the STM4/STM16
stream.
Part of the signal passthrough between the line sides, defined West and East.
LINE
WEST
LINE
NE
SPARE
EAST
SPARE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TRIBS
Figure 15. Add/Drop Multiplexer
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
59 / 436
1.2.2 Application

In the following there are the possible applications of the equipment:

Pointtopoint link (see Figure 16. )
In this case the multiplexer can be connected to another multiplexer through the line
LINE
NE
TRIBS
NE
TRIBS
SPARE
Figure 16. Pointtopoint links
Linear Dropinsert (see Figure 17. )

The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) tributaries from (into) the STM16 stream.
This configuration, but with no tributaries and matrices, sets up a Regeneration equipment. Only
one Connection Card unit is inserted.
LINE
NE
LINE
ADM
SPARE
LINE
ADM
SPARE
TRIBS
NE
TRIBS
SPARE
TRIBS
Figure 17. Linear dropinsert
HUB STM1 (see Figure 18. )

The multiplexer permits to drop/insert 155 Mbit/s STM1 tributaries into a line stream and then
branch them off in HUB structures.
LINE
LINE
ADM
SPARE
SPARE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1 TRIBS
Figure 18. HUB STM1
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
60 / 436

WDM applications (see Figure 19. )

In this case the 1661SMC is used as a coloured STM16 tributary for the 1686 WM (WDM
multiplexer). Up to 16 different aggregate wavelengths () can be used.
COLOURED
STM16
...
TRIBS
1661
SMC
#2
l2
#2
#2
1686
WM
l16
16 x STM16
l1
1661
SMC
l2
1686
WM
#16
#16
TRIBS
TRIBS
TRIBS
#1
#2
........
........
...
TRIBS
1661
SMC
#16
#1
l1
1661
SMC
...
#1
#1
...
1661
SMC
...
...
TRIBS
COLOURED
STM16
l16
1661
SMC
#16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 19. WDM applications
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
61 / 436
Ring structure (see Figure 20. )

The dropinsert function permits to realize ring structures.
The VC can be automatically rerouted if the optical splice breaks down or one of the equipment
nodes fails
TRIB.
ADM
TRIB.
RING
ADM
ADM
TRIB.
ADM
TRIB.
Figure 20. Ring structure
Oneway broadcasting (see Figure 21. )

This function permits to extract data from the same VC over several physical tributaries.
Such data can also be made to passthrough to the stations downstream.
1xVCn
1xVCn
TRIBUTARY PORTS
Figure 21. Unidirectional broadcasting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Cross Connection function

The various CROSSCONNECTION possibilities offered by the equipment enables it to be
used as a small crossconnection node with a maximum capacity of sixteen STM1 ports.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
62 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Other functionalities of this Release:
ED
Regenerator
The equipment can operate in STM16 regeneratorlike mode when the tributaries are not
equipped; one Connection Card unit must however be inserted.
The ADM performances dont allow us to consider it a true Regenerator: Byte B2 is terminated,
evaluated and reinserted instead in the Reg. B2 is transparent. Furthermore the ADM is
synchronized by a unique clock chosen by a specific algorithm, instead in the Reg. each
regeneration section is synchronized by the clock extracted from its Receiving side.
Optical Amplifier
The 1651SM/1661SMC can be connected with an external Optical Amplifier 1610 OA and
1664 OA, to overcome longer span. The O.A. Alarm criteria are managed by the 1651/1661
Equipment using the Housekeeping criteria.
Bidirectional Transmission
For the STM 16 optical interface a bidirectional transmission on single fiber function is
implemented, using an external passive optical coupler.
Drop Shelf extension

The 1651SM/1661SMC equipped with a new SMEC Equipment Control Unit and a new DS
Future Bus Termination, is able to completely manage an external equipment named
1641SMD Drop Shelf.
This extension Equipment provides access at up to 189 2Mbit/s Tributaries, so the 1651SM
plus a Drop Shelf can give the access to 252 2Mbit/s, that means the capacity of a complete
STM4.
Remote Equipment Control

This function allows a centralized management system for small SDH networks, similar to that
offered by an 0S.
That means that it is possible to perform management functionalities , from one of the NEs of
the network, toward the other NEs (up to 31), like configuration modification and remote
control.
Dual OS
O.S. Spare is foreseen to protect the Main one and the switchover and the switchback
between these functions, can be automatic or manual at the Operators option.
Year 2000
The Equipment is compliant with the year 2000 features.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
63 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
64 / 436
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION

This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout, and composition of the equipment.
All the units and various parts making up the equipment are illustrated at para 2.1 on page 66 .
The main parts, the accessories parts and the explanatory notes are listed at para 2.2 on page 67 .
Para 2.3 on page 82 illustrates the interconnection points that can be accessed on the front wiring panel
of the subrack together with relevant legenda and meaning.
Para 2.4 on page 90 shows the access points (LEDs switches ect.) present on each unit together with
relevant legenda and meaning.
For further information see Chapter 5 on page 311.
The Personal Computer (Craft Terminal) utilized for Initial Turnon and Maintenance operations is not
listed as an item of the equipment, but it can be supplied by ALCATEL. See Operators Handbook for
PC hardware configuration.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Hw configuration listed in the following Main Part List on Table 8. on page 68, is that
managed by the current Craft Terminal SWP Release.
The current Craft Terminal Release can also manage Hw configurations other than the
current one, sold with previous Craft Terminal SWP, e.g. by means of a download
procedure bringing up to date the previous SW Release.
These last HW configuration Main Part Lists are listed in the relevant Technical
Handbooks.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
65 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
18
19
STM4 W1
STM4 E2 or
955.100.562 K
21
22
A
23
8
9
10
11
12
FULL MATRIX SPARE
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
DC DC CONVERTER
TRIBUTARY SPARE 2
FULL MATRIX MAIN
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
B
C
D
DC DC CONVERTER
S
L
O
T
DC DC CONVERTER
S
L
O
T
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
STM16 W
TRIBUTARY
NOT USED
S
L
O
T
STM4 W2 or
20
STM4 E1
TRIBUTARY
CRU MAIN
CRU SPARE
TRIBUTARY SPARE 1
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
2
STM16 E
17
AUX/EOW
DS FUTUREBUS TREMINATION
SLOT H
SLOT H
SLOT H
SLOT I
SLOT L
34, 45, 140, 155 MBIT/s ACCESS MODULE

QX & SYNCH. INTERFACE
ALARM INTERFACE

SLOT M
SLOT H
POWER & HOUSEKEEPING ACC. MOD.
SLOT H
SLOT H
SLOT H
SLOT H
SLOT G
SLOT G
SLOT G
SLOT F
2/1.5 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE
AUXILIARY CHANNEL ACCESS MODULE
2.1 Equipment front view (New Mechanical Practice)
The front view of the equipment is indicated in the following Figure 22.
S
L
O
T
E
Figure 22. Front view of the 1651 SM/1661 SMC (New Practice Shelf)
07
66 / 436

2.2 Equipment part list

In the following tables are listed, named and coded any item and unit of the equipment. Furthermore, for
any item the slot position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equipment are
indicated too.
Such tables report the following information:
Name of item
Part No. Alcatel Factory Part Nos. (e.g. 411.xxx.xxx x) and corresponding NV
(e.g. 3AL xxxxx xxxx) ones are given.
Maximum quantity.
Position of the unit inside the equipment. Use is made of the same Slot + number indication
(slot 1,2 etc.) of the Alarm Status and Remote Control application of the Craft Terminal
management.
Where the unit slot number is not assigned in the aforesaid application, it is indicated here with
slot + letter (slot A,B, etc.)
Number of explanatory notes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The explanatory notes are reported in Table 11. on page 79.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
67 / 436
NAME
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
NOTES
MECHANICAL STRUCTURES
1651SM / 1661SMC ShelfNP
593.155.033 L
(3AL 35792 AB)
KIT 19/21 DS Adapter
299.701.004V
(3AL 34328 AA)
STM4 AGGREGATE UNITS
S4.1 STM4 AGGREGATE PORT
411.100.154 H
(3AL 34729 AA)
L4.1 STM4 AGGREGATE PORT
411.100.153 G
(3AL 34291 AA)
L4.2 STM4 AGGREGATE PORT
411.100.134 V
(3AL 34069 AA)
L4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT
411.100.302 N
(3AL 34733 AA)
S4.1 AGGREGATE PORT DIN
411.100.168 P
(3AL 34293 AA)
L4.1 AGGREGATE PORT DIN
411.100.169 Q
(3AL 34294 AA)
L4.2 AGGREGATE PORT DIN
411.100.170 M
(3AL 34295 AA)
L4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT DIN
411.100.390 J
(3AL 34733 AA)
S4.1 AGGREGATE PORT SC
411.100.243 J
(3AL 34652 AA)
L4.1 AGGREGATE PORT SC
411.100.244 K
(3AL 34653 AA)
L4.2 AGGREGATE PORT SC
411.100.406 F
(3AL 34069 AB)
L4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT SC
411.100.431 X
(3AL 34733 AC)
18,19,22,23
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
68 / 436

Table 8. Main Part List
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
STM16 AGGREGATE
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
(UP GRADING 1661 SMC)
L16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE
411.100.349 U
(3AL 35810 AA)
L16.2 HM1 AGGREGATE
411.100.361 Q
(3AL 35811 AA)
S16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE
411.100.372 K
(3AL 35853 AA)
L16.2 JE1 HM1 AGGREGATE
411.100.373 L
(3AL 35854 AA)
411.100.374 M
(3AL 35855 AA)
411.100.643 K
(3AL 36561 AB)
S16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
411.100.458 J
(3AL 35853 AB)
L16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
411.100.459 K
(3AL 35810 AB)
L16.2 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
411.100.460 Q
(3AL 35811 AB)
L16.2 JE1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
411.100.461 D
(3AL 35854 AB)
411.100.462 E
(3AL 35855 AB)
411.100.520 C
(3AL 36561 AA)
S16.1 ID FC AGGREGATE
411.100.507 C
(3AL 36516 AA)
L16.1 ID FC AGGREGATE
411.100.508 M
(3AL 36517 AA)
L16.2 ID FC AGGREGATE
411.100.509 N
(3AL 36518 AA)
L16.2 JE1 ID FC AGGREGATE
411.100.510 A
(3AL 36519 AA)
S16.2 JE2 ID FC AGGREGATE
411.100.511 X
(3AL 36520 AA)
L16.2 JE3 ID AGGREGATE
411.100.512 Y
(3AL 36521 AA)
S16.1 ID AGGREGATE SC
411.100.513 Z
(3AL 36516 AB)
NOTES
4
18+19
22+23
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
69 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PART No.
L16.1 ID AGGREGATE SC
411.100.514 S
(3AL 36517 AB)
L16.2 ID AGGREGATE SC
411.100.515 T
(3AL 36518 AB)
L16.2 JE1 ID AGGREGATE SC
411.100.516 U
(3AL 36519 AB)
411.100.517 V
(3AL 36520 AB)
411.100.518 E
(3AL 36521 AB)
S16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED
411.100.969 J
(3AL 36516 BA)
L16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED
411.100.970 P
(3AL 36517 BA)
L16.2 AGG.61 ENHANCED
411.100.971 C
(3AL 36518 BA)
L16.2 JE1 AGG.61 ENHANCED
411.100.972 D
(3AL 36519 BA)
411.100.973 E
(3AL 36520 BA)
411.100.974 F
(3AL 36521 BA)
S16.1
AGG.61
411.100.975 G
(3AL 36516 BB)
L16.1
AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
411.100.976 H
(3AL 36517 BB)
L16.2
AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
411.100.977 A
(3AL 36518 BB)
ENHANCED SC
L16.2 JE1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
411.100.978 K
(3AL 36519 BB)
L16.2 JE2 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
411.100.979 L
(3AL 36520 BB)
411.100.980 A
(3AL 36521 BB)
L16 AGG. 192.3 SC 6400
411.100.710 J
(3AL 37615 AA)
L16 AGG. 192.5 SC 6400
411.100.711 F
(3AL 37615 AB)
L16 AGG. 192.7 SC 6400
411.100.712 G
(3AL 37615 AC)
Max
Qty.
SLOT
NOTES
NAME
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
70 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
PART No.
L16 AGG. 192.9 SC 6400
411.100.713 H
(3AL 37615 AD)
L16 AGG. 193.1 SC 6400
411.100.714 A
(3AL 37615 AE)
L16 AGG. 193.3 SC 6400
411.100.715 B
(3AL 37615 AF)
L16 AGG. 193.5 SC 6400
411.100.716 C
(3AL 37615 AG)
L16 AGG. 193.7 SC 6400
411.100.717 D
(3AL 37615 AH)
L16 AGG. 194.3 SC 6400
411.100.718 N
(3AL 37615 AL)
L16 AGG. 194.5 SC 6400
411.100.719 P
(3AL 37615 AM)
L16 AGG. 194.7 SC 6400
411.100.720 L
(3AL 37615 AN)
L16 AGG. 194.9 SC 6400
411.100.721 H
(3AL 37615 AP)
L16 AGG. 195.1 SC 6400
411.100.722 A
(3AL 37615 AQ)
L16 AGG. 195.3 SC 6400
411.100.723 B
(3AL 37615 AR)
L16 AGG. 195.5 SC 6400
411.100.724 C
(3AL 37615 AS)
L16 AGG. 195.7 SC 6400
411.100.725 D
(3AL 37615 AT)
STM16 AGG. 61 192.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.981 X
(3AL 37615 BA)
STM16 AGG. 61 192.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.982 Y
(3AL 37615 BB)
STM16 AGG. 61 192.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.983 Z
(3AL 37615 BC)
STM16 AGG. 61 192.9/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.984 S
(3AL 37615 BD)
STM16 AGG. 61 193.1/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.985 T
(3AL 37615 BE)
STM16 AGG. 61 193.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.986 U
(3AL 37615 BF)
STM16 AGG. 61 193.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.987 V
(3AL 37615 BG)
STM16 AGG. 61 193.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.988 E
(3AL 37615 BH)
Max
Qty.
SLOT
NOTES
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
71 / 436
PART No.
STM16 AGG. 61 194.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.989 F
(3AL 37615 BL)
STM16 AGG. 61 194.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.990 C
(3AL 37615 BM)
STM16 AGG. 61 194.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.991 Z
(3AL 37615 BN)
STM16 AGG. 61 194.9/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.992 S
(3AL 37615 BP)
STM16 AGG. 61 195.1/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.993 T
(3AL 37615 BQ)
STM16 AGG. 61 195.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.994 U
(3AL 37615 BR)
STM16 AGG. 61 195.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.995 V
(3AL 37615 BS)
STM16 AGG. 61 195.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
411.100.996 W
(3AL 37615 BT)
SOC COAXIAL JUMPER KIT
298.701.604 A
(3AL 34543 AA)
Max
Qty.
SLOT
NOTES

NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
72 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
TRIBUTARIES
140/STM1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY
411.100.129 G
(3AL 34066 AA)
10
3 x 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY
411.100.120 B
(3AL 34065 AA)
10
3 x 45 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY
411.100.162 H
(3AL 34080 AA)
10
34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5 x 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY
411.100.236 B
(3AL 34474 AA)
21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm TRIBUTARY

21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm TRIBUTARY
NOTES
411.100.330 M
(3AL 34075 AC)
411.100.331 A
(3AL 34075 AB)
21 x 2 MB/s 120 OHM RETIMING TRIB.
411.100.657 R
(3AL 35905 AC)
21 x 2 MB/s 75 OHM RETIMING TRIB.
411.100.656 Q
(3AL 35905 AB)
21 x 1.5 MB/s TRIBUTARY
411.100.871 G
(3AL 37718 AA)
26
913
2,3,4,6
S1.1 TRIBUTARY
411.100.171 A
(3AL 34277 AA)
25
912
L1.1 TRIBUTARY
411.100.174 D
(3AL 34280 A)
25
912
L1.2 TRIBUTARY
411.100.325 C
(3AL 34918 A)
25
912
S1.1 TRIBUTARY 600
411.100.185 Z
(3AL 34296 AA)
25
912
L1.1 TRIBUTARY 600
411.100.247 N
(3AL 34437 AA)
25
912
L1.2 TRIBUTARY 600
411.100.358 V
(3AL 35714 AA)
25
912
S1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 SC
411.100.245 L
(3AL 34804 AA)
25
912
L1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 SC
411.100.246 M
(3AL 34805 AA)
25
912
L1.1 TRIBUTARY SC
411.100.158 M
(3AL 34077 AA)
S1.1 TRIBUTARY SC
411.100.160 K
(3AL 34324 AA)
25
912
S1.1 TRIBUTARY DIN
411.100.172 B
(3AL 34278 AA)
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
73 / 436
L1.1 TRIBUTARY DIN
L1.2 TRIBUTARY SC
DVB TRIBUTARY
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
411.100.173 C
(3AL 34279 AA)
25
912
411.100.788 M
(3AL 34918 AC)
25
912
411.100.641 R
(3AL 37450 AA)
25
912
MATRICES UNITS
NOTES
NAME
9
10
CONNECTION CARD
474.156.305 K
(3AL 34043 AA)
FULL MATRIX
411.100.142 D
(3AL 34072 AA)
16x16 MATRIX Unit
411.100.500 R
(3AL 36451 AA)
SMEC 2 A 8R + 16F
411.100.301 M
(3AL 34732 AA)
14
DS FUTUREBUS TERMINATION
487.156.367 E
(3AL 34024 AA)
16
15
478.120.804 L
(3AL 34963 AA)
C.D,E
16
ENHANCED CRU 0.37ppm
411.100.306 J
(3AL 34787 AA)
20,21
ENHANCED CRU
411.100.363 J
(3AL 35808 AA)
11
7,8
12
13
CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
TIMING
17
2
20,21
AUXILIARIES
18
AUX/EOW / 2
411.100.483 U
(3AL 34453 AE)
17
AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2
411.100.484 V
(3AL 34453 AF)
17
TELEPHONE HANDSET
013.200.016 A
(1AF 00398 AA)
19
SOFTWARE
20
21
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
end table
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
74 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Table 9. Part List : Connection Module
NAME
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
Access Connection Module
22
487.156.432 Q
(3AL 36153 AA)
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 120 K20
487.156.433 R
(3AL 36153 AB)
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 75 1.0
487.156.435 K
(3AL 36154 AA)
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 75 T43
487.156.436 L
(3AL 36154 AB)
21x2MB/s UNPR. ACC. MODULE 75 T43
487.156.438 W
(3AL 36154 AD)
21x2MB/s UNPROT. ACC. MODULE 120
487.156.434 J
(3AL 36153 AC)
21x2MB/s UNPROT. ACC. MODULE 75
487.156.437 M
(3AL 36154 AC)
TRMUX+5X2MB/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3
487.156.550 A
(3AL 36158 AB)
TRMUX+5X2MB/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120

OHM
487.156.440 C
(3AL 36158 AA)
3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.6
487.156.444 U
(3AL 36155 AB)
3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.0
487.156.448 G
(3AL 36155 AA)
3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE T43
487.156.449 H
(3AL 36155 AC)
140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.0
487.156.445 V
(3AL 36156 AA)
140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.6
487.156.446 W
(3AL 36156 AB)
140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE T43
487.156.447 X
(3AL 36156 AC)
AUX CONNECTION ACC. MOD.
487.156.441 Z
(3AL 36159 AA)
ALARM INTERFACE ACC. MOD.
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 120
NOTES
23
24
25
487.156.443 T
(3AL 36162 AA)
26
POWER ACCESS MODULE
487.156.442 S
(3AL 36160 AA)
27
POWER ACCESS MODULE /2
487.156.563 T
(3AL 37480 AA)
28
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
75 / 436
Max
Qty.
QX & SYNCH 120 ACCESS MODULE
487.156.450 E
(3AL 36161 AA)
QX & SYNCH ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3
487.156.451 T
(3AL 36161 AB)
QX & SYNCH T43 ACC. MOD.
487.156.452 U
(3AL 36161 AC)
QX 10BT & SYNCH 120 ACCESS MODULE
487.156.560 C
(3AL 37462 AA)
QX 10BT & SYNCH ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3
487.156.561 Z
(3AL 37465 AA)
QX 10BT & SYNCH T43 ACC. MOD.
487.156.562 S
(3AL 37465 AB)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
SLOT
NOTES
29
30

PART No.
NAME
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
76 / 436

Table 10. Part List: Accessories of the 1651 SM
NAME
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
DUMMY PLATES
NOTES
31
6U 4TE DUMMY PLATE / N
299.701.560 A
(3AN 41001 AA)
6U 4TE ACCESS DUMMY PLATE
299.701.564 S
(3AN 43031 AA)
10
6U 12TE ACCESS DUMMY PLATE
299.701.565 T
(3AN 43032 AA)
299.701.562 Y
(3AN 41002 AA)
16
299.701.563 Z
(3AN 41003 AA)
RACK INSTALLATION SET

ETSI INSTALL. SET
299.701.475 Z
(3AN 34258 AA)
32
S9 INSTALL. SET
299.701.454 U
(3AN 34259 AA)
33
299.701.598 V
(3AL37983AA)
CUST. NOETSI OPTIC COVER FOR STM1
284.901.808 J
(3AN 44550 AA)
35
CUST. NOETSI OPTIC COVER FOR STM4
284.901.525 V
(3AN 44922 AA)
36
16A CIRCUIT BREAKER
001.700.121 J
(1AB 02428 0012)
37
CIRCUIT BREAKER (15 A 72 Vdc)
001.791.356 L
(1AB162710006)
OPTINEX INSTALL. KIT
34
ACCESSORIES
38
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
39
KIT 120 ohms CONNECTOR (9 PINS)
543.159.606 Z
(3AL 34257 AA)
40
KIT 120 ohms CONNECTOR (15 PINS)
299.701.407 W
(3AL 34521 AA)
23
41
1.0/2.3 (3 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR
040.144.001 N
(1AB 06122 0003)
177
42
1.0/2.3 (6 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR
040.144.002 P
(1AB 06122 0004)
177
43
1.6/5.6 (8.5 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR
040.142.080 P
(1AB 00987 0005)
51
44
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
77 / 436
PART No.
Max
Qty.
SLOT
NOTES
1.6/5.6 (5.9 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR
040.142.067 M
(1AB 00987 0004)
51
45
MALE COAX CONNECTOR BNC
040.152.048 U
(1AB 006420051)
46
FOR OPTICAL WIRING

NAME
47
SM FCPC SINGLE FIBER SPLICE (15 M)
041.897.045 S
(1AB 07983 0001)
24
SM JUMPER FC/PC (20 M)
041.897.043 Y
(1AB 07984 0001)
24
SM SPLICE WITH FC/PC CONN. (10 M)
041.897.012 R
(1AB 07894 0002)
24
245.701.833 R
(1AD 02412 0001)
SPECIAL TOOLS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HOOK/UNHOOK TOOL
ED
48
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
78 / 436

Table 11. Part List : Explanatory notes
DESCRIPTION
No.
The abbreviation NP stands for New Practice equipment. The Old Practice /New Practice
alternative qualifier is SW managed and shown on the local CT interface and allowable via QB3*
interface; see the Operator Handbook. For further information on the structure see Chapter 5
INSTALLATION on page 311.
Mechanical Adapter utilized to insert the subrack into 21 ETSI racks (S9, N3, Optinex)
Alternative unit Mixed configurations are possible Slot 19=WEST1, 20=EAST2, 23=EAST1,
24 =WEST2 Unit number depends on equipment configuration:
Unprotected Line terminal
: 1 unit
Protected Line terminal
: 2 units
Unprotected DropInsert
: 2 units
Protected DropInsert
: 4 units
Unless otherwise specified the connectors are FC/PC. Options are illustrated in Chapter 3.
FUNCTIONAL OPERATION on page 97
Alternative unit for upgrading STM16. Mixed configurations are possible.
Each STM16 Aggregate unit replace two STM4 Aggregate units (dashed indication in
Figure 22. on page 66):
Agg East
slot 19 and 20
Agg West
slot 23 and 24
Unit number depends on equipment configuration:

4
Unprotected Line terminal
: 1 unit
Unprotected Line Terminal and DropInsert
: 2 units
Unless otherwise specified the connectors are FC/PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The suffix ID, ENH and ENHANCED , identify aggregate units

that can carry out new features but only for future network
evolution. In the current Release these Units are managed like
the previous ones.
5
Coaxial cables to perform the PassThrough Aggregate to Aggregate. Mandatory only for
STM16 Aggregates.
Alternative unit Options are illustrated in Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION on page 97
Slots 6, 13 are occupied by spare units only
Slot 6 is occupied by a spare unit only
Unit mapping three Unidirectional DIGITAL VIDEO BROADCASTING signals. By Hw straps it

can be used as transmitting or receiving item.
10
Alternative Matrix unit
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
79 / 436
DESCRIPTION
11
Slot 8 is occupied by a Full Matrix spare unit. When Connection Card is utilized both unit must
be inserted.
12
Slot 8 is occupied by a Full Matrix Spare Unit .
13
Alternative of the previous unit. The Unit is predisposed to provide future new features. In This
Release it carries out the same performances of the Full Matrix Unit. Slot 8 is occupied by a 16x16
Matrix Spare Unit .
14
Mandatory Unit. Needed specifically to manage the 1641SMD DROP SHELF extension. If the
Drop Shelf is not required it is possible to use the ESCT equipment controller (411.100.163) and
MEMORY EXPANSION (487.156.610) instead of SMEC 2A 8R+16F.
15
Mandatory unit. Used to provide voltage logical reference to all Control and auxiliary BUS
16
One of the units is optionally supplied as 2+1 standby
17
Alternative unit. Slot 20 contains spare (1+1).
18
Alternative Auxiliary unit (Auxiliary channel interfaces and Order Wire interfaces) , .
19
These items guarantee the interworking with Line equipment.
20
Optional telephone handset associated to the AUX/EOW unit of slot 17.
21
Details concerning the software P/Ns are given in the Equipment Operators Handbook
22
Alternative modules, utilized for tributary connection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
23
Bidirectional 21x2/1.5 MB/s Access Modules. They allow the physical access of the 2/1.5 MB/s
signals and their 1+N protection
For details see Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION on page 97 and Chapter 5.
INSTALLATION on page 311
24
3x34 Mb/s, 3x45,140 Mb/s, STM1 electrical Access Modules.

They allow the physical access of the relevant signals and their 1+N and 1+1 protection
For options details see Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION on page 97 and Chapter 5.
INSTALLATION on page 311
25
Physical access for V11, 64 Kb/s G703 Data Channel and 4 wire external EOW
26
Housed Circuits: ANDOR, Futurebus Termination, Remote Inventory Data, IECB Bus (when Drop
Shelf Is managed). Access available: Remote Alarms and R/M interface connection (Rack
Lamps)
27
Station Battery access and Housekeeping I/O signals
28
Station battery access and Houskeeping I/O signals ; to be used for potential free applications.
(AND/OR function available by strap).
29
Housed Circuits: AUI / B2 Adapter. Access available: Q2 Interface, 2MHz

synchronization signals and LAN connection (QB3 10 base 2 interface)
30
Alternative Unit. This Subunit converts the generic AUI interface to the Twisted Pair ethernet
interface: the 10BaseT option of the IEEE 802.3 standards.
I/O Station
table continue
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
80 / 436

No.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
31
To be utilized for the unequipped slot; necessary for EMC performances.
32
Set of connectors needed to install the ETSI (N3LC) (power supply, remote alarms) and cable
to actuate rack lamps, see Chapter 5. INSTALLATION on page 311.
33
Set of connectors needed to install the S9 racks, (power supply, remote alarms) and cable to
actuate rack lamps, see Chapter 5. INSTALLATION on page 311.
34
Set of connectors needed to install the Optinex rack (power supply, remote alarms) and cable to
actuate rack lamps, see Chapter 5. INSTALLATION on page 311.
35
Overdimensioned optical protection to cover STM1 tributary optical connectors which

dimensions exceed the recommended (ETSI) ones. Optional item.
36
Overdimensioned optical protection to cover STM4 aggregate optical connectors which

dimensions exceed the recommended (ETSI) ones. Optional item.
37
Station powersupply patch points to mount at the Top Rack Unit of the S9 rack.
38
Station powersupply patch points to mount at the Top Rack Unit of the Optinex rack.
39
Detailed in Chapter 5. INSTALLATION on page 311.
40
To be utilized as an alternative to interface wiring for 2 MHz external clock balanced signal
connection
41
To be utilized with 120 ohms interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs. and 2 MHz external clock balanced
signal connections
42
To be utilized with 75 ohms unbalanced interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs., electrical connection
on 3mm dia. cable. Also used for 34 Mb/s and 140/Mb/s/STM1 electrical.
43
To be utilized with 75 ohms unbalanced interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs., electrical connection
on 6mm dia. cable. Also used for 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s/STM1 electrical.
44
To be utilized with 34/140 Mbit/s interface wiring, STM1 electrical connection on 8.5mm dia.
cable.
45
To be utilized with 34/140 Mbit/s interface wiring, STM1 electrical connection on 5.9mm dia.
cable.
46
To be utilized with DVB Trib.
47
Alternative use for optical connections
48
Tool to be used to hook/unhook the coaxial cables carrying out the passthrough function on
STM-16 aggregates.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
81 / 436
This paragraph shows the access points (LEDs switches etc.) present on each unit together with relevant
legenda and meaning.
SLOT 2,3,4
21 x 2/1.5 MBIT/S TRIB.
34 / 2 TRAN. MUX AND

5 x 2Mbit/s TRIB.
CMI
*
*2, 1.5, 34 o 45
LEGENDA
(1)
Red LED indicating local unit alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 23. Access points : 2/1.5 MBit/s and Tran Smux Tributaries
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
82 / 436

2.3 Units Front View

SLOT 2,3,4,5 ,6 & 9,10,11,12,13
SLOT 2,3,4,5 & 9,10,11,12
3 x 34Mbit/s TRIB.
3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB.
140 / STM1
SWITCH TRIB.
DVB TRIBUTARY
*
CMI
*
* DVB
* 140
or
STM1
*2 34 or 45
2
1
LEGENDA
LEGENDA
(1)
(1) Red LED local unit

alarm
(2)
Green LED In Service unit
(2) Rx electrical connector

Tributary output
(3) Tx side electrical connector
Tributary input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 24. 34, 45 MBit/s, Switchable and DVB Tributary
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
83 / 436

SLOT 2,3,4,5 & 9,10,11,12
S1.1 TRIB. FC
L 1.1 TRIB. FC
S1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC

L 1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
*155
STM1
155
*L 1,1 or S
*S 1,1 or L
laser
laser
3
ON
2
1
LEGENDA
(1)
(2)
(3)
LASER manual reset button
(4)
Tx optical connector Tributary Input
((5)
Rx optical connector Tributary Output
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 25. Access points :Optical Tributaries
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
84 / 436

SLOT 7,8
CONNECTION
CARD
FULL
MATRIX
16 x 16
MATRIX
FULL
FULL
2
1
LEGENDA
(1)
Red LED local unit alarm
(2)
Connector only for internal use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 26. Access points: Matrices
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
85 / 436

SLOT 18,19, 22,23

* 622
*
S 4,1
5
4
or L 4.1
L 4.2
L 4.1 JE
L 4.2 JE
ON
Tx
laser
Rx
2
2
LEGENDA
(1)
(2)
(3)
Rx optical connector AGG. Input
(4)
Tx optical connector AGG. Output
((5)
Manual LASER reset pushbutton
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 27. Access points: STM4 Aggregates
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
86 / 436

SLOT 18+19, 22+23
*L16.2
Rx1
Rx2
or S16.1
L 16.1
L16.2 JE1
L16.2 JE2
Rx3
Rx4
Tx1
Tx2
Tx3
Tx4
ON
Rx
Tx
LASER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LEGENDA
(1)
(2)
(3)
Rx optical connector AGG. Input
(4)
Tx optical connector AGG. Output
((5)
Manual LASER reset pushbutton
(6)
Rx/ Tx passthrough connectors ( from/to other side STM16 Aggregate)
Figure 28. Access points: STM16 HM1 Aggregates
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
87 / 436
SLOT A
CLOCK REFERENCE
SLOT 17
DS FUTUREBUS
AUX EOW
UNITS
TERMINATION
UNIT

SLOT 21,20
I/O
7
6
L
I
N
E
CKL
DL
CKN
DN
1
2
1
LEGENDA
LEGENDA
(1) Red LED indicating

local unit alarm
(1) Network
IECB Data
(2) Network
IECB Clock
(3) Local IECB
Data
(4) Local IECB
Clock
LEGENDA
(1) Red LED indicating local
unit alarm
(2) Tph. handset insertion point
(3) Reset line command key
(4) Line seizure key
(5) Yellow LED indicating
conference call
(6) Yellow LED :
glowing = line busy
flashing = selective call received
(7)
Green LED indicating free line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 29. Access points: CRU, AUXEOW, DS Future bus Termination
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
88 / 436

SLOT C,D,E
SLOT B
SMEC2
POWER SUPPLY
CPU
12
11
10
9
CRAFT
TERMINAL
8
7
URG
NURG
ATTD
ABN
IND
6
5
4
3
2
1
LEGENDA
LEGENDA
(1) GREEN LED :

ON = correct operation
(2) ON ( I ) or OFF ( O ) switch
(1) Red LED local unit alarm

(2) Green LED In service unit
(3) Yellow LED Indicative alarm
(4) Yellow LED Abnormal condition
(5) Yellow LED Alarm storing ( attended )
(6) Red LED Not urgent alarm
(7) Red LED Urgent alarm
(8) Connector for factory use
(9) Personal Computer connector (interface F)
(10) Alarm storing pushbutton
(11) Lamp test pushbutton
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(12) Unit reset pushbutton
Figure 30. Access Points: Power Supply and Equipment Controller SMEC2
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
89 / 436
SLOT F
AUX
SLOT L

2.4 Access Module front view
SLOT M
ALARM
POWER
HK
RA
5
V11
BATT1
R/M
4
64 K
BATT2
1
6
LEGENDA
(1) (2) (3) Connector for Auxiliary Cahannels
(4)
Connector for RM interface (Rack Lamps)
(5)
Connector for Remote Alarms
(6) (7)
Connector for Power Supply
(8)
Connector for Housekeeping indications
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 31. Access Module front cover plate Auxiliary, Battery, Alarm Access Modules
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
90 / 436

SLOT I
Qx & SYNC
Q INT
Q INT
5
SYNC
I1
SYNC
I2
3
OUT
2
10 B2
10 B2
LEGENDA
(1) (2)
Connectors for QB3 Ethernet connection
(3)
Connector for synch. signals, 120 Ohm connector
(4)
Connector for synch. signals, Coax. 1.0/2.3 connector
(5)
Connector for Q2LTS Interface connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 32. Access Module front cover plate Qx Interface & Sync. Access Module.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
91 / 436

SLOT I
QX 10BT & SYNCH
QX 10BT & SYNCH
120 OHM CONN.
COAX. CONN.
QINT
QINT
SYNC
I1
SYNC
I2
OUT
10BT
10BT
LEGENDA
(1) Connector for Twisted Pair LAN connection
(2) Connector for synch. signals, 120 Ohm connector
(3) Connector for synch. signals, Coax. 1.0/2.3 connector
(4) Connector for Q2LTS Interface connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 33. Access Module front cover plate Qx 10BT Interface & Sync. Access Module.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
92 / 436

SLOT G
21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Ohm bidirectional
21x2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm bidirectional
8
15
8
1
14
14
15
15
21
21
15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 34. Access Module front cover plate 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
93 / 436
SLOT G
Rx
Tx

34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm
34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm
LEGENDA
LEGENDA
(1) Rx 75 ohm connectors for

2Mbit/s Channels
(5) Rx 120 ohm connector for

2Mbit/s Channels
(2) Tx 75 ohm connectors for

2Mbit/s channels
(6) Tx 120 ohm connector for

2Mbit/s channels
(3) Rx connector for

34Mbit/s channel
(7) Rx connector for

34Mbit/s channel
(4) Tx connector for

34Mbit/s channel
(8) Tx connector for

34Mbit/s channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 35. Access Module front cover plate 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
94 / 436

SLOT H
3 x 34 /45 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE
6
5
4
3
2
1
LEGENDA
(1)(3) Tx connectors for 34Mbit/s Trib. connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(4)(6) Rx connectors for 34Mbit/s Trib. connection
Figure 36. Access Module front cover plate 3x34/45 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
95 / 436

SLOT H
140/155 Mbit/s Trib. Access Module
LEGENDA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(1)(2) Connectors for 140/155 Mbit/s

Trib. Connection
Figure 37. Access Module front cover plate 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
96 / 436

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 General description
Figure 38. on page 98 illustrates, in block diagram form, the units employed and the general operating
functions.
The functions carried out by the equipment can be split into the following subsystems:
STM4 Aggregate subsystem (when 1651SM is involved)
STM16 Aggregate subsystem (when 1661SMC is involved)
Connect subsystem
It is indicated by the Matrix units and connection circuits of the Tributary and Aggregate units.
Tributary subsystem
In this release the 1651 SM or 1661 SMC equipment tributary subsystem is provided with an
extension only for the 2 Mbit/s management, thus increasing their number up to 252. This
extension is provided by the 1641 SMD (Drop Shelf) equipment.
These 252 2Mit/s streams are subdivided into three 21 x 2 Mbit/s units housed in the Line Shelf
Equipment, as regards the 63 2 Mbit/s streams and into nine 21 x 2 Mbit/s units housed the
Drop Shelf Equipment, as regards the 189 2 Mbit/s streams.
The latter are multiplexed into three STM1 electrical units (assigned to slots 5,6,7) housed in
the Line Shelf as can be seen from Figure 38. on page .98
The Drop Shelf equipment is totally managed by the Line Shelf, hence it is not a NE but it is part
of Line Shelf as far as the Network Management is concerned.
Protection subsystem
It is obtained with the spare units and the functional units circuitry.
Synchronizing subsystem (Clock Reference unit)
Auxiliary and Overhead subsystem

It is achieved with the AUX unit, and with the OHBUS connections obtained with the functional
units.
Control and management subsystem

It is achieved through the Equipment Controller unit, which interfaces the Card Controller
subunits inside all the units (except for the Power Supply unit), the Craft Terminal (Interface F)
and the Management Center (Interface QB3*) and the non SDH Alcatel equipment (Interface
Q2).
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal (RECT) feature is provided and through the QECC
protocol it allows the operator to perform a set of management operations and display the Alarm
synthesis information of all the subnetwork NEs .
Power Supply subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The subsystems are thoroughly explained in the following.

The Aggregate and Tributary subsystems crossrefer to Figure 39. on page 99.
Functions that are not operative in this release are nonetheless mentioned to better define the system
aspects. However, the reader is informed as to their nonuse.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
97 / 436
STM16
AGGREG
STM16
W
STM4
WHEN
1651 SM
IS USED
AGGREG
STM16
E
AGGREG
STM4
W
AGGREG
STM4
W
SPARE
STM16
WHEN
1661
SMC
IS USED
STM4
AGGREG
STM4
E
AGGREG
STM4
E
SPARE
STM4
OH BUS
MATRIX
UNIT
MATRIX
UNIT
SPARE
EOW
3x64Kbit/s
3xV11
AUX/EOW
TRIBUTARIES
(10 SLOTS)
CONTROL & DCC BUS

2Mbit/s
SPARE
1+N
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
1.5 Mbit/s
SPARE
1+N
34/2 TRAN. MUX

5x2Mbit/s
SPARE
1+N
Q B3
CLOCK DISTRIBUTION
3 x 63 2Mbit/s
SPARE
FROM DROP SHELF 1+N
CLOCK
REF
(#)
STM1 OPT
STM1 OPT
CLOCK
REF
SPARE
(*)
34,45,140Mbit/s
STM1 EL
SPARE
1+N
DVB
34,45,140Mbit/s
STM1 EL
SPARE
1+N
2MHz
EXT
DVB
3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(#)
(*)
These Units can be APS (1+1) protected
POWER
SUPPLY
1
These Units can be EPS (1+1) protected
Figure 38. General Block diagram
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
98 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
SPI
LPT
LPA
PI
LPT
LPA
PI
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
2/1.5 Mbit/s
21
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
TX OR RX DVB
UNIDIRECTIONAL PORT
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
LPC
RST
ACCESS MODULE
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
MUX
RST
SA
MST
LPA
PI
LPA
PI
LPT
LPT
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
HPC
HPC
3
34 Mbit/s
or 45 Mbit/s
ACCESS MODULE
HPA
HPA
LPC
SA
MST
16
LPA
LPT
HPA
16
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
LPA
LPT
34 Mbit/s
1
2 Mbit/s
PI
HPC
HPC
5
HPA
ACCESS MODULE
PI
DEMUX/MUX
LPA
LPT
HPA
LPC
MATRIX
PASS
THROUGH
PASSTHROUGH
(Jumper kit)
SA
MST
SA
PI
LPA
HPT
140/155 Mbit/s
ELECTRICAL
ACCESS MODULE
RST
MST
PG
(SA)
MSP
SNCP
MST
SA
155
ACCESS MODULE
HPA
MUX
STM4 AGGREGATE
SPI
4 x 38 Mbit/s
HPA
LPC
WEST
STM4
WEST
STM16
STM16 AGGREGATE
RST
RST
SPI
155 Mbit/s
OPTICAL
PI
RST
MST
SA
HPT
HPA
LPC
MUX
SPI
PI
RST
MST
SA
MSP
SNCP
4 x 38 Mbit/s
EAST
STM4
EAST
STM16
155 Mbit/s
OPTICAL 600
STM4 AGGREGATE
MUX
STM16 AGGREGATE

140
140/STM1 SWITCH TRIB.
34/2 TRAN. MUX and 5x2 Mbit/s
3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. or 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB.
DVB TRIB
2 Mbit/s TRIB or 1.5 Mbit/s TRIB
Figure 39. Block diagram of the Tributary and Aggregate units
07
99 / 436
This subsystem is present when 1651 SM equipment is used. The equipment allows a max. of four STM4
Aggregate units to be used.
The aggregate operates as a bidirectional interface (Tx/Rx) between the optical fiber and the Tributary
signals (connected through the Matrix unit and the opposite side Aggregate).
The STM4 signal (622 Mbit/s) is interconnected with:
WEST side, regular
WEST side, spare
EAST side, regular
EAST side, spare

The allowed configurations are:
(1 unit)
(1 unit)
(1 unit)
(1 unit)
Unprotected terminal
(1 unit)
Unprotected Add/Drop (2 units)
APS Protected terminal
(2 units)
APS Protected Add/Drop
(4 units)
The description is applicable to all the STM4 Aggregate units of this release listed in chapter 2 on page
65.
The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependance on optical components used
for Long distance or Short distance.
The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the units front coverplace. The units which
operate in the second window are indicated with 4.1, those operating in the third window with 4.2.
The units are identified by the type of connector used, FC/PC or SC/PC or DIN connectors.
The unit identified by JE (Joint engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the dispersion
values (see chapter 4 Technical Specificationson page 279).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The bidirectional functional circuits are:

SPI
(Synchronous Physical Interface)

It interfaces the STM4 signal and the optical fiber, by extracting timing (in Rx).
MUX
(Multidemultiplexing function)
It serial/parallel converts from STM4 to STM1 and viceversa.
RST
(Regeneration Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Regeneration section (RSOH)
MST
(Multiplexer Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Multiplexing section (MSOH)
SA
(Section Adaptation)
Processes the pointer to synchronize the subsystem and the line frequency
HPC
(Higher order Path Connection)

Allows selection and grooming of the sixteen AU4 streams to utilize in the STM4
frame.
The AU4 streams can belong to the STM4 Aggregate of the opposite side
(pass through) or to the Tributaries (add/drop) connected through the Matrices.
Each signal is split over a 38 Mbit/s 4wire bus.
This HPC function is not operative when Full Matrix is used (if is realized in the same
Full Matrix).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
100 / 436

3.1.1 STM4 Aggregates subsystem

3.1.2 STM16 Aggregate subsystem

This subsystem is present when 1661SMC equipment is used. The equipment allows a max of two
STM16 Aggregate units to be used.
The Aggregate operates as a bidirectional interface (Tx/Rx) between the optical fiber and tributary signals
(connected through the Matrix unit) and opposite side Aggregate.
The STM16 signal (2488 Mbit/s) is interconnected with:
WEST side (1 unit)
EAST side (1 unit)
The allowed configurations are
Unprotected terminal (1 unit)
Unprotected Add/Drop (2 units)
The description is applicable to all the STM16 Aggregate units of this release listed in chapter 2 on page
65.
Th Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the units front coverplate. The units which
operate in the second window are indicated with 16.1, those operating in the third window, with 16.2.
The units are identified by the type of connector used, FC/PC or SC/PC or DIN connectors.
Some Units are marked by the ID or ENH abbreviation or named Enhanced. These items are preset
in order to supply additional ITUT management functions for the future Releases of the 1661SMC
Equipment. In current release these new functions are not operative and all the Aggregates have the same
performances.
The same units cannot work with previous kind of Aggregate placed on the other side of the optical span.
Previous kind of Aggregate (with different optical interface) are no more supplied in this release but can
have been upgraded from previous release.
The AU4 East/West connection (passthrough) are realized by means front connection using the cables
of the Coaxial Jumper Kit, see chapter 2 on page 65..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For structured (VC12, VC3) Passthrough Full Matrix Unit is used.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
101 / 436
SPI
(Synchronous Physical Interface)

It interfaces the STM16 signal and the optical fiber, by extracting timing (in Rx).
MUX
(Multidemultiplexing function)
It serial/parallel converts from STM16 to STM1 and viceversa.
RST
(Regeneration Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Regeneration section (RSOH)
MST
(Multiplexer Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Multiplexing section (MSOH)
SA
(Section Adaptation)
It processes the pointer to synchronize the subsystem and the line frequency
HPC
(Higher order Path Connection)

Allows selection and grooming of the 16 AU4 to utilize in the STM16 frame.
The AU4 streams can belong to the STM16 Aggregate of the opposite side (pass
through) or to the Tributaries (add/drop) connected through the Matrices.
The AU4 passthrough with opposite side Aggregate is realized through four 622 Mbit/s
signals; in the connection with Matrices each AU4 signal is split over 38 Mbit/s 4wire
bus. These connections are used for tributary dropinsert, TU passthrough and
Aggregate crossconnections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The STM16 Aggregate units can be connected to an eventual external Optical Amplifier to implement
spans of the link.
The Optical Amplifier alarm report is performed via discrete contacts (Housekeeping incoming pins).
A bidirectional transmission on a single fiber is allowed by using an external optical passive coupler.
The transmission direction is set by using not assigned bits of S1 byte.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
102 / 436

The bidirectional functional circuits are:

3.1.3 Connection subsystem

This subsystem allows all tributaries and Aggregates connections.
When STM4 Aggregates are used the Tributary and Aggregate subsystems provide 16 STM1
payloads which can be managed by the Connection subsystem, i.e., 4 for the Agg. EAST, 4 for the Agg.
WEST, 8 for the TRIBUTARIES (see Figure 40. ).
When STM16 Aggregates are used the VC4 connection can be 8 for Aggr., distributed in every manner
and not 4 East and 4 West (see Figure 43. on page 108).
STM16 Agg. differences are indicated in para.3.1.3.1 on page 107.
To this concern, the MATRIX units have been assigned besides the Tributary and Aggregate units circuitry
used.
Different MATRICES can be chosen depending on the connections needed:
CONNECTION CARD
FULL MATRIX and 16x16 MATRIX (NB 1)
The following table illustrates the connections for each unit:
Table 12. Connection options
CONNECT OPTION
UNIT
VC4
VC3/VC12 ACROSS 16 STM1
AGGTR
AGGAGG
TRTR
AGGTR
AGGAGG
TRTR
CONNECTION CARD
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
FULL MATRIX
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
AGG
TR
=
=
(NB1)
Aggregate
Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB1
As indicated in chapter 2 on page 65. in the current release a new Matrix Unit has been introduced: 16x16
Full Matrix. This new Unit is an hardware upgrade for the present Full Matrix Unit and it is preset to
support, in the future release, the new standard ITUT management functions (J1/J2, TIM, POM,
SNCP/N). In current release these new features are not performed, therefore the 16x16 Full Matrix Unit
and the Full Matrix Unit carry out the same functions.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
103 / 436

AGG.
AGG.
SPARE
SPARE
4 x AU4
( + 4 Spare )
AGG.
AGG.
STM4
STM4
WEST
EAST
4 x AU4
( + 4 Spare )
4 x AU4
( + 4 Spare )
MATRICES
8 x AU4
( + 2 Spare )
TRIB.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 40. Connection with STM4Aggregate (1651 SM)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
104 / 436

Connection Card (see Figure 41. )

Creates a simple extension between the Tributaries and the Aggregates.
The connection functions are carried out only on the VC4s by the Aggregates dedicated
circuits.
The following Tributary units can be utilized:
STM1 optical. This unit can also contain VC12 or VC3 structures, that will not be
managed but only transferred.
The Connection Card doesent perform any Cross connection.

Two Connection Cards must be utilized.
SPARE
AGG.
WEST
(*)
AGG.
WEST
AU4 PASSTHROUGH
AGG.
EAST
CONNECTION CARD 2
SPARE
AGG.
EAST
(*)
*
*
CONNECTION CARD 1
AU4 DROP/INSERT
TRIB
1
TRIB
2
TRIB
10
140 Mbit/s
STM1 (VC4 MANAGED)
(*) NOT ALLOWED WITH STM16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
BOTH CONNECTION CARDS MUST BE INSERTED. THE CONN. CARD 2 IS NOT A SPARE
FOR THE FIRST ONE.
Figure 41. Connection with Connection Card
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
105 / 436
Full Matrix and 16x16 Matrix (see Figure 42. )
Same sided VC Aggregate connections are also possible.

The selection of circuits mapping signals into the SDH structures depend on the type of
connection involved.
VC12 and VC3 structures of STM1 signal are processed
An additional Matrix unit can be utilized as spare.
SPARE
SPARE *
AGG. EAST
AGG. WEST
AGG.
WEST
AGG.
EAST
STM16 AGG. AU4 PASSTHROUGH
SPARE FULL MATRIX
CROSS
CONNECTIONS
AGG. WEST
16 STM1
AU/VC MANAGEMENT
CROSS
CONNECTIONS
AGG. EAST
PASSTHROUGH
AGG. WESTAGG. EAST
TRIBTRIB
CROSSCONNECTIONS
DROPINSERT
TRIBAGG.
FULL MATRIX
TRIB
1
TRIB
10
2Mbit/s
34Mbit/s
140Mbit/s
OPTICAL/ELECTRICAL STM1
* NOT ALLOWED WITH STM16
WITH STM16 AGG. THE AU4 PASSTHROUGH ARE REALIZED
BETWEEN AGG. UNIT BY MEANS DIRECT CABLING.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 42. Crossconnection with Full Matrix
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
106 / 436

All the Aggregate and Tributary connection options are possible.
3.1.3.1 STM16 Aggregate differences (1661 SMC)

See Figure 43. on page 108.

When using the STM16 Aggregates, while needing only the VC4 connection, the eight VC4 connected
Aggregates (connecting the subsystem) will be distributed in any direction and not only 4 East + 4 West
as for the STM4.
With SNCP, up to 8 VC4 connected to one side will be protected by the other.
There are two ways of implementing crossconnection when needing lowerorder crossconnection with
STM16 Aggr.. Both will use the Full Matrix unit:
1)
Linear links.
In this case lower order VC grooming can be implemented inside 8 VC4 distributed in every direction (not
only 4 East + 4 West).
2)
SNCP ring.
In this case lower order VC grooming can be implemented inside 4 VC4 from/to East and 4 from/to West.
3)
Enhanced Connectivity In SNCP Ring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is possible to activate the Enhanced Connectivity Function that allows to protect up to 8 VC4 with
Loworder crossconnection on condition that all the LO VC were connected with the same Connection
Configuration Mode. If instead is necessary to manage each single TU in different manner the connection
comes back under the previous constraint.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
107 / 436
AGG.
16 max AU4
STM16
WEST
W
*A/D

AGG.
STM16
EAST
Passthrough (P.T)
E
A/D*
ADDDROP *
8 max AU4 ( +8 Spare)
MATRICES
8 x AU4
( + 2 Spare )
TRIB.
*:
By A/D (Add/Drop indication) it is generally meant all the connections with Aggregates managed by
the MATRIX (dropinsert, TU passthrough, crossconnection aggregate).
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
NUMBERS OF AU4 USED

WA/D
E A/D
W+E A/D
P.T
LINEAR
8
8
8
16
(max 8)
VC4 SNCP RING
8
= W
A/D
W+E
16W
VC12/VC3 SNCP RING
4
= W
A/D
W+E
16W
VC12/VC3 ENHANCED
SNCP RING
8
= W
A/D
W+E
16W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 43. Crossconnection with STM16 Aggregate (1661 SMC)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
108 / 436

3.1.4 Tributary Subsystem

The Tributary Subsystem consists of a set of Units and functions housed and managed in the main Shelf
1651 SM /1661 SMC ( Line Shelf Tributary Subsystem) and one optional extension named Drop Shelf
Tributary Subsystem housed in the 1641 SMD Equipment. The latter is wholly managed by the Line
Shelf as regards the alarms, configurations and control hence as far as the Network management is
concerned the Drop Shelf is part of the 1651 SM / 1661 SMC NETWORK ELEMENT and it is not
distinguishable from the former.
The first control level on the units is performed by the Card Controller Subunit mounted on it that manages
the unit and interfaces the Equipment Controller as far as concern Alarms, Configuration, Performance
Monitoring etc.
3.1.4.1 Line Shelf Tributary Subsystem
The line shelf can house the following types of Tributaries:
1.5 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s
45 Mbit/s
140 Mbit/s
Plesiochronous
155 Mbit/s, STM1 electrical

155 Mbit/s, STM1 optical
Synchronous
Digital Video Broadcasting
Asyncronous Serial
Interface
The 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s TRIB. and 2/34 Trans. Mux units can be inserted only in the first 3 slots of the first
group, besides the spare of slot 5.
Besides the basic 21*2Mb/s Tributary, a specialized unit with additional feature named Retiming, is
allowable (see para 3.2.1.2 on page 162).
Three signals per 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s unit are managed. While for the 2 Mbit/s unit, 21 signals are
managed on the same card.
Three DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting ) unidirectional signals per unit are managed. The Unit can work
as transmitting or receiving by HW presetting selection. The Unit transmits or receives three 270 Mbit/s
coded TV channels with a resulting effective bitrate ranging from 140 Mbit/s. Inside the Unit this signal
is put on 45 Mbit/s unidirectional frames to be transported on the SDH network at VC3 level.
The DVB tributary is equivalent to a standard 34/45 Tributary under the Craft Terminal point of view and
also regarding the Network Management perspective.
The 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit operates as a tributary for a 140 Mbit/s or a 155 Mbit/s electrical
signal by SW selection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit and the STM1 optical unit (S1.1 TRIB. , L1.1 and L1.2 )
manage only one signal.
The 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Trib. can be EPS N+1 protected.
The 3x34, 3x45 Mbit/s Trib. can be EPS 1+1 and N+1 protected .
The DVB Trib. cant be EPS neither N+1 nor 1+1 protected.
The 140/155 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary electrical unit can be EPS 1+1 and N+1 protected .
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
109 / 436
The equipment is provided with 10 tributary slots split into two groups of 5 units each. The 5th slot of each
group is only assigned to the spare unit (1+N protection).
The rest of the units can occupy any position as long as they are configured as follows (except spares):
8 per STM1 optical or 140/STM1 electrical (8 streams)

8 per 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB (24 streams)
8 per 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB (24 streams)
8 per DVB TRIB (24 unidirectional streams)
Heterogeneous tributary configuration is allowed.

The electrical Tributary physical access are the Access Modules subunit that interface the tributary
signals with the external source.
These modules differ in termination (75 or 120 ohms) and type of connector (Siemens or Type 43 or Sub
D).
The DVB phisical access are on the front cover plate by means 3 pairs of BNC connectors.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the DROP SHELF is present the first three slots of the second set are dedicated to house as many
STM1 electrical units. On these units convey the 3 x 63 2Mbit/s flows coming from the Drop Shelf by
means three pairs of coaxial cables that have to be connected to the Access Modules relevant to the Units
inserted in the Line Shelf slot # 5,6,7. Refer to the Table 14. on page 112.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
110 / 436

The 155 Mbit/s electrical unit and the STM1 optical unit are APS 1+1 Single Ended protected .

3.1.4.2 Line shelf Tributary Subsystem
Table 13. Configuration
1651 SM/1661 SMC

SPARE
(1+N)
STM1 EL
SPARE
(1+N)
STM1 EL
STM1 OPT.
STM1 OPT.
140 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
140 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
3x34 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
3x34 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
3x45 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
3x45 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
DVB
DVB
21x2 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
21x1.5 Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
34/2 and 5x2Mbit/s
SPARE
(1+N)
STM1 ELECT.
Unit carrying
3 x 63 2Mbit/s from Drop
Shelf
TRIB.1
TRIB.2
TRIB.3
SET # 1
TRIB.4
TRIB.
Spare 1
TRIB.5
TRIB.6
TRIB.7
SPARE
(1+N)
TRIB.8
TRIB.
Spare 2
SET # 2
This table summarizes the configuration options used and indicates the units assigned to each tributary
slot.
The Access Module subunits interface the electrical tributary signals with the external source, except the
DVB physical access that is reached directly on unit front cover plate .
The Access Module subunits differ in bitrate, termination (75 or 120 ohms) and K20 standard protection
(if any).
Local market Access Module can be supplied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
With reference to Figure 39. on page 99 the main functional block of each unit employed is defined in the
following.
NOTE: Some functions can be present in both of the connected units (e.g., in the tributaries and in the
Full Matrix), because the units can work with different equipment and configurations.
In this case the sole duty of the LPC function (e.g., when using the trib. with Full Matrix) is of
establishing the position of the tributary flow in the first of the three relevant slots TUG3.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
111 / 436
The Drop Shelf trib subsystem provides up to 189 x 2048 Mbit/s streams using nine 21 x 2 Mb/s tributaries.
The 1641 SMD provides a 9 +1 equipment protection scheme for these tributaries.
Table 14. Configuration
1641 SMD
SPARE
1+N
21 x 2 Mbit/s
TRIB.
1
TRIB.
2
TRIB.
3
TRIB.
4
TRIB.
5
TRIB.
6
TRIB.
SPARE
21 x 2 Mbit/s
TRIB.
8
TRIB.
9
TRIB.
10
21x2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY unit

The following are the main bidirectional functional circuits:
PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 2 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting timing
(on the Tx side).
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) Extracts/inserts the 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to the
C12 synchronous container
LPT (Lower order Path termination) Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual
container (VC12).
HPA (High order Path Adaptation) Processes the TU12s pointer
LPC (Lower order Path Connection) Crossconnects any position of the STM1 interfacing the
aggregates through matrices.
3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. unit

PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 34 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting
timing (on the Tx side)
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) Extracts/inserts the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to
the C3 synchronous container
LPT (Lower order Path termination) Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the
virtual container (VC3).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
112 / 436

3.1.4.3 Drop Shelf Tributary Subsystem
3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. unit

PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 45 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting
timing (on the Tx side)
DVB TRIB. unit

Used for video signal that comes in the unit through an ASI interface. The Unit manages a range of
frequencies from 1 Mbit/s to 40 Mbit/s. Each DVB video stream is mapped over a VC3 (45Mbit/s
plesiochronous stream.
A part from the ASI physical interface that follows the CENELEC EN 500839 Recommendations, the
main functional circuits, under the ITUT point of view, are the same as 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. unit:
34/2 Trans Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary

The unit interfaces a 34 Mbit/s framed plesiochronous signal, and five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signals.
The 34 Mbit/s stream is demultiplexing into sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals.
PI (Physical Interface)It interfaces the 34 Mbit/s (2 Mbit/s) signal with the external source by
extracting timing (on the Tx side)
MUX/DEMUX (for the 34 Mbit/s signal only
It demultiplexes (in Tx) the 34 Mbit/s signal into sixteen 2 Mbit/s ones.
It multiplexes (in Rx) the sixteen 2 Mbit/s streams into one 34 Mbit/s signal.
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
Drops/Adds the 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to the C12 synchronous container
LPT (Lower order Path termination)
Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual container (VC12).
HPA (High order Path Adaptation)
Processes the TU12s pointer
LPC (Lower order Path Connection)
Crossconnects any position of the STM1 interfacing the aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
113 / 436
The unit can be utilized for one 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary or for one 155 Mbit/s electrical
synchronous tributary (this facility is SW selectable).
PI (Physical Interface).
It interfaces the tributary signal with the external source by extracting timing (on the Tx side)
The circuit is utilized by both types of tributaries.
The following circuits have been defined:
140 Mbit/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Inserts the 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal into the C4 synchronous container
HPT (Higher order Path termination)

PG (SA) Pointer Generator of section Adaptation.

Insert a fixed pointer value in AUOH.
155 Mbit/s
ED
RST (Regenerator Section Termination)

Manages the first three lines of the SOH.
MST (Multiplexer Section termination)

Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH
SA (Section Adaptation)
Processes the AU4 pointer
MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) and SNCP (Path Protection Switching)

This circuit is applicable to both types of Tributaries. Its function is to choose between the
main/standby paths (MSP) of the same side Aggregate and the East/West side (SNCP) of the
signals received (through the matrix) from the Aggregates.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
114 / 436


155 Mbit/s Optical Tributary unit (S1.1 TRIB. F.C., L1.1 TRIB. F.C., L1.2 TRIB. F.C.)
S and L letters define the Short or Long distance unit.
FC defines the connector used.
SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)

It E/O interfaces the external source by extracting timing from Rx

Manages the first 3 lines of the SOH

Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH.
Processes the AU4 pointer to synchronize timing.
HPT (Higher order Path termination)

HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation)

It synchronizes (in the Rx direction only) the AU4 pointer and the TU pointers that might be
inside the VC4.

Crossconnects any position of the STM1 interfacing the aggregates through matrices.
155 Mbit/s Optical Tributary unit (S1.1 TRIB. 600, L1.1 TRIB. 600, L1.2 TRIB. 600)
S and L letters define the Short or Long distance unit.
FC defines the connector used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)

It E/O interfaces the external source by extracting timing from Rx

Manages the first 3 lines of the SOH

Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH.
Processes the AU4 pointer to synchronize timing.
MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)

Its function is to choose between the main/standby paths (MSP) and the East/West side (SNCP)
of the signals received (through the matrix) from the Aggregates.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
115 / 436
The equipment is provided with automatic switching protections managed by the Equipment Controller
unit. The protections are activated following alarm detection, thus guaranteeing system availability.
To switch, the equipment is provided with spare unit and suitable circuitry and devices.
The operative protections of this release are:
Equipment protection
1+1 and 1+N EPS (Equipment protection Switching) for electrical tributaries
1+1 EPS (Equipment Protection Switching) for Clock Reference and Full Matrix unit
Power Supply Protection. If three power supply units are utilized, one of these will be considered
as spare.
Network protection
1+1 Single ended MS Linear Protection (APS) for STM4 Aggregate and synchronous
tributary unit
SNCP at TU12, TU3, VC4 level, utilized in ring networks.
Drop and Continue implemented through a SNCP single ended connection between the NEs
that are involved in the dual node architecture.
TWOFIBER MSSPRING (Multiplex Section Shared Protection Rings) for STM16
Aggregate only.
The switching information is also indicated on the Craft Terminal screen.

Protections are defined in the following.
3.1.5.1 General description of the terms and definitions used in this paragraph
The types of protection are:
Equipment protection
EPS
Network protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
MS Linear Trail Protection (APS)

SNCP
Drop and Continue
TWOFIBER MSSPRING
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
116 / 436

3.1.5 Automatic Protections Subsystem

EPS (Equipment protection switching)

With EPS a spare unit fully replaces a faulty unit.
EPS is the action taken as a consequence of the detection of a permanent hardware fault (internal)
in a unit. EPS is applicable only to units that are electrically interfaced. For EPS management, the units
used as spare must store a copy of the configuration of the protected units.
MS Linear Trail Protection ( Simplified APS)
Purpose of this protection is to use a spare connection if the working one is no longer available.
Switching might be caused by line failure or faulty hardware on another system connected to the one being
considered ( SF switching criteria) or by the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (SD switching criteria). For this
latter the Equipment provisioning supports the definition of the SD threshold value and the choice to
include or not the SD in the singleend APS.
The MS Linear Trail Protection is also used as protection against hardware faults on the SDH line interface
(Aggregates or Synchronous Tributaries); in this case it is assumed that the line interface is part of
the line.
The MS Linear Trail Protection applies to the synchronous interface only and it allows two Operating
Modes:
bidirectional (not operative in this release)
unidirectional
In the bidirectional operating mode the failure of one line, in one direction, determines the use of the spare
connection for both directions.
While in the unidirectional operating mode, the spare connection is used only in the direction where faults
have occurred.
The protection is non revertive and the Manual switch mode and lockout are available
SNCP (Subnetwork Connection Protection) (PPS)
SNCP is used on ring networks and the switching type supplied is only dedicated (1+1)
This protection can be forced on single LO and HO VC by means the Remote Control option of Alarm
Status and Control function.
Switching occurs on the path, selecting (Rx side) the signal transmitted to both Tx West and East sides.
SNCP is active on VC4, TU12 or TU3 path based on fail indications like: Ex Ber(B3), AU AIS, AU LOP,
TU AIS, TU LOP respectively.
The use of the Connection Card does not allow SNCP function on the optical STM1 Tributary named S
1.1 Trib. F.C., L 1.1 Trib. F.C. and L 1.2 Trib. F.C., but this protection is provided by the Optical Trib 600
type.
Drop and Continue
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drop and Continue is an architecture to connect subnetworks, in order to improve traffic availability.
The traffic can be dropped at two nodes on the ring . The continue signal is forwarded like a passthrough
signal.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
117 / 436
Two fiber Multiple SectionShared Protection Ring supports network topology only.
It requires only two fibers for each span of the ring.
Switch occurs on AU4, loopedback from the working to the spare AU4, carried on the same fiber.
The switching operation is dual ended, using K1,K2 bytes of SOH and an appropriate algorithm.
Each span of the ring requires only two fibres. Each fibre carries both working channels and protection
one; the AU4 # 9 to #16 of the STM16 streams work as spare for the other main AU4 # 1 to #8.
Architecture types and protection mode are:
1+1
1 spare line / unit is present for 1 working line / unit. Both in APS and EPS.
Spare carries the same amount of traffic as the working one.
1:1
1 spare line / unit is normally used for lower priority traffic and can replace 1
working line / unit with high priority traffic. Both for APS and EPS.
Not operative in this release.
1:N
1 spare line / unit is normally used for low priority traffic and can replace one out
of N line / unit with high priority traffic.
Not operative in this release
1+N
1 spare line / unit can replace one out of N working line / units.
MS Linear Trail 1 + N is not operative release
When N is greater than 1 each working line can be prioritized. This to decide which working line to protect
in case of double failure.
Two operating modes can be selected for these protection architecture:
revertible
not revertible
In the revertive operation the original switching configuration is automatically restored when the failure is
removed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
At this regard the following performances are allowable:
ED
CRU EPS 1+1 : Only Not revertible
TRIBUTARIES and MATRIX EPS 1+1: Not revertible (suggested)
1+1 MS Linear Trail Protection : Not revertible
1 + N TRIBUTARY EPS : Revertible as the relevant definition states.

In this case a suitable Wait time to restore must be specified and it must be the same for all
Tributaries.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
118 / 436

2F MSSPRING (STM16 system only)
3.1.5.2 EPS for electrical tributaries

Types of protection:
a)
1+N
b)
1+1
Refer to Table 13. on page 111
1 + N
Trib. spare 1 protects trib 1 to 4.

This group of 5 trib. is defined SET1.
Trib. spare 2 protects trib. 5 to 8.

This group of 5 trib. is defined SET2.
This protection applies to all the electrical trib (2 Mb/s, 34 Mb/s, 45 Mb/s, 34/2 Trans Mux, 140 Mb/s, STM1
electrical)
When an n+1 EPS protection group is composed by 21*2Mb/s cards with and without Retiming function,
the Spare card should have Retiming capability in order to guarantee the full features protection to every
main traffic card.
2 Mb/s 1+N protection is possible only in the first Tributary SET and trib. 4 cannot be used (N max 3).
EPS 1+N is only revertive.
1 + 1
The tributaries are paired (4):

Trib1Trib2, Trib3Trib4, Trib5Trib6, Trib7Trib8.
Within each pair, the highest Trib. is the spare one.

Trib spare 1 and 2 are not used.
The 2 Mb/s 1+1 protection is a 1+N prot., when N=1.

The tributary electrical connections are realized on the Access Module Subunits mounted at the top of the
subrack.
Access Module differs for bit rate and type of connection and they are used in the protection configuration
for 34 Mb/s, 45 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s trib. and 155 Mbit/s.
The DVB tributary unit is not EPS protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
In order to correctly set EPS for 3x34 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s Tributaries refer
to para 3.2.18 on page 263, para 3.2.24.3 on page 277, para 3.2.24.4 on page 278.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
119 / 436
1+1 Connections
Figure 44. shows the example for 1+1, 140 Mb/s or electrical STM1 trib. Only the signal for trib 1 and
2 is indicated.
The tributary signal is connected to the Access module of the working trib. unit (1). The same signal is
connected with the switch module of the spare trib unit (2) through the backpannel.
The command MSW coming from the Equipment Controller, activates the Switch Driver inside the Access
Modules selecting the connection with trib.1 or 2 by means of two relays (one for transmitter side and one
for receiver side) that switches the I/O customer signals towards working tributary or towards spare
tributary.
The same configuration applies to trib. pairs 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8.
MSW1
TRIB.
1
140Mb/s
OR
STM1
ELECTRICAL TRIB.
TRIB
2
SPARE
MSW2
ACCESS MODULE
Figure 44. 1+1 EPS connection for 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical trib. 1 and 2
Figure 45. shows the example for 1+1, 3x34 Mb/s Trib. or 3x45 Mb/s Trib.. Only the signals for trib 1 and
2 are indicated. The operating mode is as that of the 140 Mb/s.
ACCESS MODULE
1
34Mbi/s
45Mb/s
TRIBS.
TRIB.
1
2
3
MSW1
MSW2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TRIB.
2
SPARE
Figure 45. 1+1 EPS connections for 3x34 Mb/s trib. 1 and 2
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
120 / 436

c)
d)
2 Mb/s 1+N connections

Figure 46. shows these connections.

The 21x 2/1.5 Mbit/s signals are transmitted to the relevant tributary units (1 to 3) through an Access
Module.
The same Access Modules can switch the signals towards the Spare 1 tributary. When the switch is active
(MSW command), all the 21 signals of the faulty Tribs. are managed by the spare 1 trib..
ACCESS MODULE
21
1
2/1.5 Mbit/s
TRIB.
1
1
21
MSW1
ACCESS MODULE
42
22
TRIB.
2
2/1.5 Mbit/s
22
42
MSW2
ACCESS MODULE
63
43
2/1.5 Mbit/s
TRIB.
3
43
63
1
TRIB.
SPARE 1
MSW3
21
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 46. 1+N EPS connections for 2/1.5 Mb/s trib.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
121 / 436
e)
140 Mb/s and STM1 electrical trib. 1+N connections
The 140 Mb/s or electrical STM1 signals are connected to the relevant tributary through the Access
Modules.
The Modules can switch (commands MSW 1:4 and 5:8) signals 1 to 4 towards the tributary spare 1 and
the signals 5 to 8 towards the tributary spare 2.
It is possible to protect a mixed composition of 140 Mb/s and STM1 electrical Trib. by selecting the
relevant option for the Trib. Spare 1 or 2 Configuration (refer to Operators Handbook Subrack
Configuration).
ACCESS MODULE
MSW1
TRIB.
1
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
MSW2
TRIB.
2
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
MSW3
TRIB.
3
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
MSW4
TRIB.
4
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
TRIB.
SPARE 1
ACCESS MODULE
MSW5
TRIB.
5
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
MSW6
TRIB.
6
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
MSW7
TRIB.
7
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
MSW8
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM1
TRIB.
8
TRIB.
SPARE 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 47. 1+N EPS connections, 140 Mbit/s or electrical STM1 trib.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
122 / 436

Figure 47. shows this connection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f)
34 Mbit/s trib. and 45 Mbit/s 1+N connections.
Figure 48. on page 124 showns this connections.

The Access Modules connect the proper 3x34 Mb/s (3x45 Mb/s) signals to each tributary.
The Modules can switch (commands MSW 1:4 and 5:8) the signals towards the 3 Switch Units in the
following way:
ED
trib. 1 to 4, the first two 34 Mb/s (45 Mb/s) signals to the Spare Trib. 1
trib 5 to 8 the first two 34 Mb/s (45 Mb/s) signals to the Spare Trib. 2.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
123 / 436
MSW1
1
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
MSW1
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
1
2
MSW1
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
3
TRIB.
2
MSW4
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
3
TRIB.
4
10
MSW4
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
SPARE 1
11
MSW4
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
12
MSW5
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
13
MSW5
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
5
14
MSW5
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
15
TRIB.
6
MSW8
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
7
TRIB.
8
22
MSW8
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
SPARE 2
23
MSW8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
34Mb/s
or 45Mb/s
24
Figure 48. 1+N EPS connections, 34 Mb/s trib.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
124 / 436
g)
34/2 Trans Mux & 5x2Mbit/s 1+N Connections

(See Figure 49. )

The 2 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s signals are connected to the relevant tributary through the 21x2 Mbit/s Access
Modules with coaxial connectors (75 Ohm 1:0/2.3).
For the 34 Mbit/s signal we use the 15th Tx and Rx connector. For the 5 2 Mbit/s signals the first 5 Tx
and Rx connectors are used.
For further details refer to the Installation Section ( Chapter 5 on page 311) .
1
34M
34M
2M
1
2Mb/s
TRIB.1
34/2
5x2M
2M
5
MSW1
2
34M
34M
2M
1
2Mb/s
TRIB.2
34/2
5x2M
2M
5
MSW2
3
34M
34M
2M
1
2Mb/s
TRIB.3
34/2
5x2M
2M
5
MSW3
34M
SPARE
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2M
2M
Figure 49. 1+N EPS connections, 34/2 Trans.Mux & 5x2M
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
125 / 436
h)
Operating mode of the trib. EPS switch
The Spare tributary houses the EPS Decisor whose function is to process the alarm status received from
the working tributaries (OK, KO 1 to N),with the proper alarm status.
The EPS decisor takes into account, in case of 1+N protection, of the signals priority. By OKKO signal
it is meant:
OK :
USE THE SPARE. The spare unit is available and is replacing a faulty working unit
(PROTECTION condition)
KO :
DONT USE THE SPARE. The spare unit has failed or no working unit has failed.
(IDLE condition).
The other units concerned with switching receive the OKKO signal from the spare trib. unit.
The OKKO signals are also received from the working units used in a priority decisor to detect the working
tributary to substitute with a spare(1+N protection).
The HWP circuits of the connected unit, switchesover to the spare tributary unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OK KO signals are also sent towards the Equipment Controller.

In this way the Equipment Controller sends the MSW1:MSW8 commands to the Access Modules as
described above.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
126 / 436

The description is referred to Figure 50. on page 127 and is valid for 1+1 and 1+N protections.

HWP
TRIB.
1
T1
T1
OKK01
TRIB.
N
TN
TN
OKK0N
PRIORITY
DECISOR
MATRIX MAIN
(AGGREGATE MAIN WITH
CONNECTION CARD)
EPS
DECISIOR
OK KO
INTERNAL FAILURE
TSP
TRIB SPARE
TRIB. SPARE
MATRIX SPARE
(AGGREGATE SPARE WITH
CONNECTION CARD)
OKK01
OKK0N
MSW1
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
ESCT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSWB
Figure 50. Tributary EPS operation
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
127 / 436
The protection operates at unit level and allows switching over to a spare unit according to the following
arrangements:
Full Matrix unit: not revertive or revertive 1+1 switch
Clock Reference unit: not revertive 1+1 switch
Switching occurs following a failure criteria associated with a unit failure or any internal failure
(Card missing, card or software mismatch, card not responding).
With regard to the Full Matrix the switch operation involves all the units processing the signals swopped
with the Full Matrix (Aggregates, tributaries, AUX/EOW) without intervention of the Equipment Controller
unit.
The spare Full Matrix processes (EPS decisor) the alarm status received from the Main Full Matrix
(OKKO MAIN signal) with the proper status.
When Main is in service and OK, the status is defined IDLE.
When Main is KO and Spare is OK, the status is defined PROTECTION and the Spare Full Matrix
is set into service.
All the connected units receive the OKKO command from the spare FULL Matrix to select (HWP)
the signal swopped (bridgeTx and switchRx) with this units. (KO, dont use SPARE; OK, use SPARE).
In revertive mode, when Main is OK again it returns into service. Figure 51. on page 129 indicates the
Full Matrix switch.
The 1+1 switch (not revertive) of the CRU unit involves all the units processing the synchronisms received
from the same CRU A and B (Tributaries, Aggregates, AUX/EOW), without the intervention of the
Equipment Controller unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All units switch upon receiving the unit failure alarm criteria from the same CRU A/B. Signals CKA/B,
(clocks) and CRU A/B ALARM are illustrated in Figure 68. on page 150.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
128 / 436

3.1.5.3 EPS for Full Matrix (or 16x16 Matrix) and CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. Full Matrix EPS
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
129 / 436
TRIB
TRIB
H
W
P
SWITCH
HWP
BRIDGE
Rx
Tx
OKKO
SPARE
HWP
OKKO
EPS
DECISIOR
AUX/EOW
SPARE
FULL
MATRIX
OKKO MAIN
MAIN
FULL MATRIX
H
W
P
H
W
P
AGG
AGG

This functions represent a 1+1 unidirectional line protection for STM4 Aggregates, STM1 optical
tributaries and STM1 electrical tributaries.
It operates at line and unit level, software detecting hardware internal and line failures.
The fine switching criteria are : Loss of Signal, Loss of frame, MSAIS and Signal Degrade.
It is not revertive.
The following description is referred to the Aggregate.
With reference to Figure 52. on page 131, all the units connected to the Aggregate Main A and Spare B of
one side (tributary, Full Matrix and other side Aggregates) with HWP function, must bridge the same signal
on both A and B Aggregate (Tx), while the selection of the signal coming from Aand B depends on
the status of OKKO signal of the Aggregates.
The Spare Aggregate (B) processes (MS Trial Protection decisor) the alarm status received from the Main
Aggregate (A) (OKKO A signal) with the proper alarm status.
When Main Aggregate is inservice and OK, the status is defined as IDLE.When Main Aggregate is KO
and spare is OK, the status is defined as PROTECTION, and the Spare Aggregate in set into service.
All the connected units receive the OKKO B command from the Spare Aggregate to select (switch of
HWP) the signal received from this unit (OK, SPARE selected; KO, MAIN selected).
The OKKO functional signals, when transmitted to the various units, are called OSW meaning OUTPUT,
ISW meaning INPUT.
For Optical and 155Mb/s electrical tributaries MS Trail Protection the same operation is performed with
the following specific indications:
the tributaries are associated in four pairs: trib1trib2, trib3trib4, trib5trib6, trib7trib8
within each pair, the highest trib. is the spare one
trib. spare 1 and 2 are not used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Mixed composition of Optical and STM 1 Electrical Tributaries in SL APS protection is allowable.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
130 / 436

3.1.5.4 Single Ended MS Trial Protection ( Simplified Linear APS)

UNIT 1
BRIDGE
A
A
MAIN
AGGREGATE
HWP
A
A
B
SWITCH
OKKO A
OKKO B
MS TRAIL
PROTECTION
DECISOR
B
INTERNAL+ LINE
FAIL
B
UNIT n
A
B
A
B
SPARE
AGGREGATE
B
Tx
Rx
OKKO B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 52. Single Ended MS Trial Protection (SLAPS)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
131 / 436
SNCP is employed on ring networks on which several equipment have been installed. Two operating mode
can be selected for single VC SNCP:
revertive
not revertive
In the revertive operation the Wait time to restore is fixed at 5 min.

As stated in the example shown in Figure 53. on page 133 several equipment (numbered 1 to 5) are
ringconnected on a looped path.
Each of the equipment on the node is bidirectionally connected (East and West sides).
One of the two directions represent the main path (clockwise).
The opposite direction will utilize a second fiber line for the spare traffic (counter clockwise).
The automatic protection intervenes upon detecting path failure.
Each transmitting tributary node is permanently connected (bridge) in the main traffic direction (clockwise)
and in the protected traffic direction (counter clockwise).
The Tx signal reaches destination through two different paths thus enabling the node receiving it to select
the best one (switch).
The example of Figure 53. on page 133 illustrates the connection between two tributaries (T1 and T2) and
relevant input/output nodes with associated passthroughs.
For example, T1 is transmitted by equipment 2 in both directions, but will be extracted from equipment
5 by the main connection (clockwise).
A failure or degrade on the main path causes to switch over to the spare one with subsequent and
simultaneous check on the two paths.
It can be deduced from the above that oneway directions concerns not only ring propagation but
switching as well. When the receiving end switches no information is sent to the corresponding Tx side
to activate the switching operation at the remote end (Single ended).
To manage switching the SNCP architecture utilizes the data inherent to the Path and not to the Line.
Switching is in fact activated by defective operations occurring at the VC4 or TU12/3 levels.
When the path is no longer available, an AIS signal is transmitted on the same path to activate protection.
In this manner SNCP can protect the paths following cable breakdown or failures along the fiber and
nodes.
Cable breakdown concerns all the fibers it contains hence it places traffic in both directions outof
service, while a failure concerns only one fiber.
The Tributary and Full Matrix units are provided with a path switching circuit (bridge + switch). Its enabling
depends on the equipment configuration.
Forced switch command
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This command belongs to the Remote Control option of the Alarm Status and Control Application and
it activates the switches between the protected and the protecting path, with reference to single Low
order and High order VCs.
This command is prominent as regards the Alarms that activates the SNCP and therefore this command
is executed independently from these latter. To recover the previous protection algorithm based on the
Alarms the operator sends from CT, the Clear command.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
132 / 436

3.1.5.5 SNCP

STMn
T1, T2 PASSTHROUGH
BRIDGE
T1
T2 PASSTHROUGH
T1 PASSTHROUGH
T2
SWITCH
CLOCKWISE
COUNTER
CLOCKWISE
T2
T1 PASSTHROUGH
T2 PASSTHROUGH
T1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 53. Typical ring network with SNCP (PPS)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
133 / 436
3.1.5.6 Drop and Continue
The Drop and Continue architecture has been implemented in the network to improve traffic availability.
Drop and Continue is a way of protecting a path crossing a number of subnetworks, e.g., rings.
The subnetworks should be connected through at least two nodes (so realizing two independent
connections).
The equipment is configured as DROP and CONTINUE on each interconnection node.
The subnetworks equipment implement the SNCP 1+1 connection.
The resulting architecture affords protection against multiple failures (evenly distributed one per
subnetwork) tolerated without traffic loss (node failure or single cable cut).
The traffic entities interconnected by the drop and continue feature can be TU12, TU3 and AU4.
The Drop and Continue feature improves traffic availability as compared with the simple endtoend
SNCP. More subnetworks are connected the further is availability increased.
The Drop and Continue features simultaneously realizes the following on one node:
unidirectional passthrough
protected drop
insertion in the opposite direction with respect tothe passthrough direction.
The configurations achievable are:
D/CW INSW
D/CE INSW
D/CE INSE
D/CW INSE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
D/C stands for Drop and Continue, the letter after it (W=West, E=East) indicates the drop protected side
(e.g., W means West main side, and spare side is the EAST one).
The end letter (INSE or INSW) indicates the insert side.
The Unidirectional passthrough is always in the direction opposite to that of the insert side (e.g., when
INS E the passthrough is from East to West).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
134 / 436

(see Figure 54. on page 135, Figure 55. on page 136, Figure 56. on page 137, Figure 57. on page137.)

For further information refer to Figure 54. which shows the D/CW INSW configuration.
WEST
AGGREGATES
EAST
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W

The Drop and Continue featuring two connected rings
Figure 55. on page 136.
(with dual connection) is
indicated in
Nodes 3, 4, 6 and 10 are configured as Drop and Continue.

SNCP protection is enabled throughout the equipment. When in normal condition, the unidirectional way
of traffic from 1 to 8 is supposed to be:1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8.
After a failure on the 1st ring between nodes 2 and 3 (see Figure 56. on page137 ), the link direction is:
1 , 5 , 4 , 3 , 6 , 7, 8.
Passthrough is used between nodes 4 and 3, and switch on node 3.
After a second failure on the 2nd ring between nodes 6 and 7 (see Figure 57. on page 137) the selected
direction on the link is : 1 , 5 , 4 , 10 , 9 , 8.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The operative switch is on node 8 and the previous pass through between nodes 4 and 3 is no more used.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
135 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
5
W
D/CW
3
INSW
D/CW
955.100.562 K
E
W
INS
W
INSW
D/CE
4
6
D/CE
436
INSE
INS
W
TRIB
3AL 36668 AA AA
INS
E
TRIB
E
INS
E
INSE
10
9
Figure 55. Drop and Continue
07
136 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
955.100.562 K
3
4
6
10
7
9
Figure 56. Drop and Continue 1st failure
2
5
3
4
6
10
Figure 57. Drop and Continue 2nd failure
07
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
137 / 436
This protection is foreseen for the STM16 Aggregate links in the ring network topology of which it
withstands single failures only in dual ended switching modality (using K1K2 byte, with appropriate
algorithm). To perform this function the use of Full Matrix Unit is mandatory.
Its operation mode is revertive.
The supported MSSPRING is compliant to the ITUT Rec.G.841.
A 2F MSSPRING consists of a set (from 2 to 16) of Network Elements each equipped with a double
bidirectional (Tx and Rx) aggregate port.
The NEs are connected in a ring by means of two optical fibers, one for the clockwise direction and the
other for the counterclockwise one.
The MS SPRING protection is an alternative with respect to SNCP. While MS SPRING allows the
connection at the same time on the clockwise and on the counterclockwise direction on the same AU4
that can be inserted and extracted in each span, on the contrary the SNCP connection engages the same
AU4 on both sides for the whole link.
The bandwidth of a 2F MSSPRING is divided into two halves of equal capacity called respectively
working (AU4# 1 to AU4# 8) and protection capacity (AU4#9 to AU4# 16). The AU4# 1 is protected
by AU4#9 up to AU4#8 that is protected by the AU4#16. The working capacity is used to carry the high
priority traffic, while the protection capacity is used for low priority traffic that is lost in case of failure.
See Figure 58.
The low priority AU4 must not be configured; they must be left in the default status in all connection
configuration tables. The Mode with wich the signal is sent must be always Unprotected.
In this release the low priority connections are not managed.
The MS SPRING algorithm starts as a consequence of the following Section alarms:
LOS, LOF, MS AIS, EXBER (B2), SIGNAL DEGRADE (B2)

TRIBUTARY
PROTECTED
SIGNAL
e
w
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WORKING CHANNELS (AU4#1 TO AU4#8)

PROTECTION CHANNELS (AU4#9 TO AU4#16)
TRIBUTARY
PROTECTED
SIGNAL
Figure 58. 2F MS SPRING Connection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
138 / 436

3.1.5.7 TwoFiber MSSPRING (Multiple Section Shared Protection Ring)

(See Figure 58. to Figure 65. page 138 to145 )

APS in 2fiber MSSPRING

In case of fibre break the APS for 2F MSSPRING uses a synchronized sequence of bridge and
switch operations that modify the internal connections of the two NEs adjacent to the failure and
displaces working (high priority) AU4s into protection (low priority) AU4s.
Only the NEs adjacent to the failure are interested to the switch and bridge functions while for all other
NEs the final configuration is a pass through of all protection (low priority) AU4s.
The following Figure 59. on page 140 up to Figure 62. on page 141 highlight how the connections are
modified as a consequence of a bridge or a switch operation.
The Bridge operation is performed on the Tx side while the Switch is performed on the Rx side.
The Bridge operation on the East side for example in the cited figure, has the effect of routing
the outgoing high priority West traffic also to the outgoing protection East capacity.
The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.
When a Switch operation is working on the East side all of the connections that have as a
source an AU4 belonging to the West working capacity are replaced by connections that have
as a source the incoming East protection traffic, maintaining the first destination of the signal.
The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the opposite
side.
In the same way:
The Bridge operation on the West side for example in the cited figure, has the effect of routing
the outgoing high priority East traffic also to the outgoing protection West capacity.
The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.
When a Switch operation is working on the West side all of the connections that have as
a source an AU4 belonging to the East working capacity are replaced by connections that have
as a source the incoming West protection traffic, maintaining the first destination of the signal.
The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the opposite
side.
The diagram of Figure 63. on page 142 depicts the final effect of Bridge and Switch synchronized steps
for traffic restoration in a Network with one fault. Thes steps are carried out via a protocol using the K1 and
K2 bytes. The failed span is replaced by the protection traffic of the span not affected by the failure.
The K1 byte carries information about:
failure code
WTR
the addressee of the message
The K2 byte carries information about:
the message source Node

the addresser Node status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The K1 and K2 are exchanged between the Node that are adjacent to the failure, instead the other Nodes
put K1 and K2 in passthrough.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
139 / 436

protection
working
BEFORE
AFTER
Figure 59. Effect of a BRIDGE EAST operation
protection
working
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
BEFORE
AFTER
Figure 60. Effect of a BRIDGE WEST operation
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
140 / 436

protection
working
BEFORE
AFTER
Figure 61. Effect of SWITCH EAST operation
BEFORE
protection
working
AFTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 62. Effect of SWITCH WEST operation
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
141 / 436
TRIBUTARY
PROTECTED
SIGNAL
E
SWITCH
EAST

BRIDGE
WEST
SWITCH
WEST
BRIDGE
EAST
E
1
W
(*)
(*)
WORKING CHANNELS
TRIBUTARY
PROTECTED
SIGNAL
PROTECTION CHANNELS
BRIDGE
SWITCH
(*) All protection AU4 are put in Passthrough in the 5th and 6th NEs
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 63. Line break recovering operations
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
142 / 436
An example of 2F MSSPRING is in Figure 64. on page 144.

In the example a ring of four nodes is protected with 2F MSSPRING

AU41 carries the traffic of each span : CB, BA, AD, DC
AU42 carries the traffic DB (passthrough in C)
AU49 protects AU41
AU410 protects AU42
After a failure in the section CB, the following actions are taken C and B nodes:
node B : Tributary access 1 and 2, previously dropinserted on AU41 and AU42

WEST, are switched respectively on AU49 and AU4 10 EAST.
In this way, by means node A and D, reach nodes C.
node C:
nodes A and D have no switching
Tributary access 1, previously dropinserted on AU4.1 EAST, is switched on

AU49 WEST
In this way, by means nodes D and A, reaches node B.
Rx AU42 WEST, previously in passthrough on Tx AU42 EAST, is looped on
Tx AU410 WEST. In this way, by means nodes DA, reaches node B (Signal
transmitted D to B).
Rx AU42 EAST is no more received.
So, on Tx AU42 WEST is looped the Rx AU410 WEST.
In this way, the signal transmitted by the node B flows on nodes ADC and here
is looped, reaching again node D.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
We can obtain from the example that is possible bandwidth reuse for some traffic patterns (AU49
protects four connections on AU41) having the same protection for several connections (shared
protection).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
143 / 436
A . AU4 1
B : AU4 1

A
D
AU4.9Prot. AU4.1
AU4.10 Prot. AU4.2
C
D
C : AU4 1
B : AU4 1
B : AU4 2
E
D
B
W
W
E
C
WEST
AU4
1
2
9
10
EAST
AU4
1
2
9
10
1
2
9
10
1
2
9
10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WEST
AU4
1
2
9
10
EAST
AU4
1
2
9
10
1
2
9
10
1
2
9
10
Figure 64. 2F MSSPRING example of operation
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
144 / 436

SQUELCHING FUNCTION
The Squelching function is activated when a node that carries Tributary Drop/Insert, remains isolated
because of a double failure.
In this case to avoid misconnections on the AU4 involved in MS SPRING protection, an AIS signal will be
inserted on Low Priority streams transmitted from the nodes adjacent to the isolated one. See Figure 65.
Initially before the double failure isolated the Node 2, connections between Trib3 and Trib1 and between
Trib2 and Trib4 were both active on AU4 #1 in the example.
After the second failure and without the Squelch function the MS SPRING algorithm would activate the
Bridge and Switch functions on the nodes adjacent to the Node2 and would act a misconnection between
Trib3 and Trib4 by means the protection AU4#9 in the example. In virtue of Squelching function the Nodes
adjacent to the isolated Node2 send AIS on Low Priority AU4#9 avoiding in this way the misconnection
between Trib3 and Trib4 in this case.
After the failure has been removed, a similar reverse sequence of operations on the NEs adjacent to the
recovered span will be activated. The reverse procedure can start after a step configurable WTR ( 5 sec.,
5 min., 10 min., 15 min.).
TRIB. 1
TRIB. 3
TRIB. 2
AU4 #1
W
AU4 #1
E
TRIB. 4
AU4 #1
E
AU4 #1
W
SWITCH
EAST
BRIDGE
WEST
SWITCH
WEST
BRIDGE
EAST
3
E
(SF/SD)
(SF/SD)
AIS ON
AU4 # 9
AIS ON
AU4 # 9
PASSTHROUGH
AIS ON
AU4# 9
AIS ON
AU4 # 9
PASSTHROUGH
AIS ON
AU4 # 9
PASSTHROUGH
WORKING CHANNELS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PROTECTION CHANNELS
Figure 65. Squelching on isolated Node connection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
145 / 436
Each VC4 that has to cross the ring boundary (only HVC level ring interconnections are considered here)
must be output by two nodes, one of which, the Primary Service Node (PSN) drops it and continues to the
Secondary Service Node (SSN). In the opposite direction, the SSN inserts a copy of the VC4 into the ring
and the PSN selects by means the Primary Node Service Selector function, between the VC4 coming
from the SSN and the VC4 that can be locally inserted by means an STM1 Tributary. The selection is
made on the PathAIS basis (AUAIS).
The protection mechanism works on the hypothesis that the other ring selects one of the two versions
of the incoming VC4 and transmits two identical copies of the VC4 towards the PSN and the SSN ( this
is guaranteed if the other ring is an MSSPRING or an SNCP ring).
Note that the PSN and the SSN need not to be adjacent and need not to be the same for all of the VC4
that cross the ring boudary: i.e. each crossing VC4 has two associated nodes that act as PSN and SSN.
In the Connection Configuration Applications this function is named: D/C IC W(E) that means Drop and
Continue, Interconnection W or E (protected) . The letter (W=West, E=East) indicates the insertion side
of AU4 data stream coming from Tributary (Main) or from Line (Protection).
Using the function: D/C IC Passthrough W or E the Operator can choose the main connection towards
the Line (Main) and for the protection the STM1 Tributary is used in order to protect the 8 main AU4s.
Note that the D/C IC and the D/C IC PassThrough connections can be used not only with the MS SPRING
protection but also in the case of SNCP SNCP interworking.
2F MS SPRING
D/C IC W
D/I BID UNP W

E
W
E
SS
Primary
Service
Node
Secondary
Service
Node
E
SS
D/I BID UNP W
D/C I/C E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2F MS SPRING
SS = Service Selector
Figure 66. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
146 / 436

When a 2f MSSPRING is interworked with another ring (either SNCP or MSSPRING), the
interconnection of the two is performed by connecting two nodes per ring with HVC connections, as shown
in Figure 66. on page146 and as a more detailed example in Figure 67. on page 147.
T1
D/I PROT.W
E
SNCP
D/C W INS W
D/C E INS E
E
D/I BID. UNP.W
D/C IC W
MS SPRING
E
D/I BID. UNP. E
D/C IC E
E
D/C E INS. E
D/C W INS. W
SNCP
E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
T1
D/I PROT. E
Figure 67. D/C IC Connection used for the SNCP/MS SPRING Interworking.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
147 / 436
3.1.6 Synchronizing subsystem
The equipment is mainly synchronized by the Clock Reference unit in compliancy with the ITUT G.783
Recs. based on Timing Marker management.
The scope of the unit is to supply the other units inside the equipment with a 38 MHz clock and relevant
sync. signal (To), and an external 2 MHz clock (T4).
In this release the following units are available:
Enhanced CRU
Enhanced CRU 0,37 ppm
These units have different performances.

The first has a stability in Hold over mode of 1ppm / day.
The second unit Hold over stability is of 0,37 ppm / day. Both have a complete compliance with the G.81s
Recommendation.
The unit operates in three different modes:
locked
holdover
freerunning
1) In the locked operating mode the unit receives the following timing signals:
Clocks from the 21x2Mbit/s Tributaries (T2)

38 MHz clock from the STMN Aggregates or STM1 Tributaries (T1)
2048 kHz clock (G.703) received from the external source (T3).
A max. of 6 references are softwareselected through the Craft Terminal and the commands are sent from
the Equipment Controller towards the Unit Card Controller.
The synch. references can be either manually selected through CT/OS, or automatically through the
algorithm on the CRU unit.
Automatic selection of the timing references (T0 local and T4 external) is principally based on the quality
of each reference derived from the SOHs byte S1 (SSMB) of the STMN Aggregates and STM1
Tributaries.
CT/OS will assign a quality level to permit using the SSM Algorithm to select the timing source when
implementing non STMN signals or signals coming from equipment not managing byte S1.
When the quality levels are identical the selection criteria is based on the set priority.
The reference quality level utilized to generate T0, or a quality level forced by CT/OS is inserted on the
SSMB of the STMN signals outputting the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The QL6 criteria is sent to the NEi clock which had supplied the synch. reference to obtain the T0.
This operation is carried out to prevent thetiming reference synchronizing the NEi itself (timing loop).
Switching between the references also depends on the alarm conditions detected on the signals.
Other types of operating modes are possible.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
148 / 436

(see Figure 68. on page 150)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2) With regard to Holdover, the unit holds the last valid reference with a max. shift of 1 ppm/day
(or 0.37 ppm/day for the CRU 0.37ppm unit).
This operating mode is associated with the loss of references selected by the operator.
Dedicated alarms will arise when the node will enter in Holdover or Freerunning mode due to either
quality criteria or signal validity. Loss of synchronism signals on the aggregate and tributary ports are
anyway available as independent alarms (LOS).
3) In the Freerunning operating mode the local clock has a 4.6 ppm accuracy. The unit operates in
this mode when no valid synchronism signals are present nor Holdover reference values had been
stored.
Selection of the 1+1 protected units receiving the reference clock depends on the CRU alarm conditions.
The unit provides the external equipment (T4) with a 2048 kHz clock. This clock can be obtained either
directly from the T0 output signal, or by processing the T1 timing signals with the selection references
(priority, quality, Timing signals list).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
149 / 436
UNIT 1
CK
CK
UNIT n
CKA

CRU B ALARM
CRU
SELECT.
CRU
SELECT.
CKB
CKA
CKB
SW SELECT.
CRU A ALARM
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
CARD CONTROLLER
RECEIVED CLOCKS
T1
FROM
STMN
FROM
2Mbit/s
FROM
EXT
(2MHz)
CKA
T2
QUALITY
PRIORITY
CLOCK (T4)
EXT
T3
CLOCK + SYNC. (TO)

FOR ALL UNITS
HOLD OVER
FREERUNNING
CLOCK REFERENCE UNIT A
CK B (TO)
CLOCK REFERENCE UNIT B
CK (T4)
EXT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 68. Synchronizing subsystem
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
150 / 436
3.1.7 Auxiliary and Overhead Subsystem

The following description applies to all the AUX/EOW units.

The SDH Standard offers a considerable quantity of service channels in the Section Overhead bytes
(SOH) and Path Overhead bytes (POH) of Synchronous frame. These bytes are used for alignment, parity
check and network management operations etc..
Part of them are also used for user data and speech channels and are interfaced towards the Aggregate,
Matrix and Tributary units through different Auxiliary unit. It is also possible to select both the Spare
Aggregate to convey to the vocal terminations the dedicated byte.
The AUX/EOW unit establishes a digital speech bypass and can be used on a wide network basis.
The AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit realize the analog speech bypass between the two aggregate sides,
and can also establish a connection with an external telephone set through the relevant connector. See
Figure 117. on page 322 and Table 20. on page 323.
The AUX unit can be used as required:
to externally access the service interfaces

to connect the external access points to the SOH and POH bytes of the units (terminations)
to allow the SOH and POH bytes to pass through the various units
The external access points of the unit are:
1 local operators set for speech connections useful for service communication in the link. The
AUX/EOW UNIT permits the speech digital bypass and can be used for wide networks.
three 64 Kbit/s G.703 data channels
three V.11 data channels (9600 baud )
The AUX and the various units are wired in the following manner:
four 5.2 Mbit/s connections, one per four (max.) Aggregates, to manage the SOHs auxiliary
bytes.
four 4.86 Mbit/s connection termed OHBUS to manage the POH and SOH auxiliary bytes of
the Tributaries and Matrices.
The Craft Terminal is utilized to softwareselect the terminations and passthrough of the SOH and POH.
This type of programming allows to access all the overhead bytes, hence guaranteeing service extension
in compliancy with standard applications, e.g.,for the bytes not yet defined.
Another OHBUS is also present which wireconnects bytes S (serial alarms) and K1, K2. These latter
between STM1, STM4, STM16 for the Indicative Alarms and STM16 for MS SPRING management.
Direct interworking between STM1 interfaces and radio regenerator equipment is fully supported.
Figure 69. on page 152, summarizes the description given and illustrates the POH bytes utilized by each
unit on the OHBUS streams.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Handling of overhead bytes is described, at various labels in Figure 73. on page 163 , Figure 77. on
page 177, Figure 83. on page202 , Figure 84. on page 203,Figure 90. on page 231 and Figure 93. on
page 240
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
151 / 436

AUXILIARY ACCESSES
OW extension
64Kb/s
V11
OW
INTERFACES
AGGR.
AGGR.
WA
EA
WB
EB
SOH 5.2 Mb/s
SOH 5.2 Mb/s
SOH 5.2 Mb/s
SOH 5.2 Mb/s
SOH: E1, E2, F1

and free SOH bytes
OH BUS 4,86 Mb/s
140: F2,Z3,Z4, Z5(POH)
155: E1,E2,F1
and free SOH bytes
21x2 M
TRIB
=1
3x34 M
TRIB.
=1
MATRIX
A
=3
140/155 M
TRIB.
=1
= 10
= 10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 69. Auxiliaries / Overheads block diagram
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
152 / 436

3.1.8 Control subsystem

(see Figure 70. on page 154).
In this release the User can utilise two different type of Equipment Controller: ESCT or SMEC2 (alternative
units).The main features, common to both of them, are described below.
The Control subsystem residing on the equipment represents the lowest SDH network management
level.
Besides analyzing the operating status of the equipment, it also controls the protections + switching and
carries out management functions (e.g.,configuration).
The control subsystem consists of the Equipment Controller unit and of the Card Controller subunits
all of which belong to equipment units except for the Power Supply unit. They are connected through the
LIECB and NIECB bus.
The LIECB bus contains all the operating data as well as the unit configuration data. NIECB swops the
DCC bytes data for the TMN (Q ecc*).
The alarm criteria activates the LEDs situated on the decentralized units and on the Equipment Controller,
and also enables the forwarding of data towards a source external to the equipment.
The meaning of each LED indicating alarm condition is explained in the access point figures in chapter
2 on page 65.
The Power Supply unit too forwards its alarm criteria to the Equipment Controller.
An additional function of the Controller subsystem is of interfacing the Equipment Controller with a source
external to the equipment.
These connections and relevant functions are:
Interface F for local management operations through the Craft terminal.

It carries out operations that allows to activate and service the equipment. Additionally it
updates the local equipment software release through software download operations.
The operations realized are:
Events and alarms reports
Operative commands
Memory events and alarms for maintenance
Forwarding and checking configurations for equipment, connection, TMN dialog
Administrative functions with operators enabling and password definition and change
Performance measurements.
Updating the equipment software release through software download operations.

The management applications are realized by means of sets of diskettes supplied with the equipment
( see Chapter 2 on page 65 )
For installation, description, etc see the Operators handbook.
When Remote Craft Terminal option is used, by means one F interface is possible manage a max of 32
equipment.
Interface QB3* to connect the Operation System of the TMN network.

In this manner it is possible to carry out network management functions from a Center on
several equipment. The functions realized are as those for Local Management.
Interface QB2. It is used to connect the external plesiochr. equip. with the TMN network
(Mediation Device operation).
Commands forwarded towards the rack to light up the relevant lamps
Equipment remote alarms accessible at the tagblocks
Customized parallel contacts to receive/transmit alarms; accessible at the tagblock.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Therefore, the subsystem is of extreme importance for the maintenance and turnon operations.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
153 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 70. Controller subsystem
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
154 / 436
AND OR/ 3
POWER SUPPLY
1
CARD CONTROLLER
UNIT n
CARD CONTROLLER
UNIT 1
2
3
NIECB
LIECB
UNIT
INTERFACE
MANAGEMENT
QB2
PARALLEL CONTACTS
REMOTE ALARMS
RACK LEDS
PESIOCHRONOUS
EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
SYSTEM
LOCAL
CRAFT
TERMINAL

INTERFACES
EXTERNAL
QB3*

3.1.8.1 Network Management Interfaces

The equipment (defined Network Element, NE) has three operative interfaces: one to manage the local
or remote equipment (Interface F) one to manage the network (Interface QB3*), and the other for the
Mediation Device function (Interface Q2/RQ2).
Interface F establishes connection with the local Craft Terminal.
When Remote Craft Terminal option is used, by means the F interface it is possible to manage a max of
32 equipment.
Interface Q2/RQ2 performs the Mediation Device function. It allows to manage from CT or OS other
ALCATEL non SDH telecommunication equipment ( video, radio, access..). It can avoid the need of a
dedicated mediation device.
The ADM provides the master side of a dedicated RS485 multipoint and acts as a mediation element
with respect to the connected Q2/RQ2 slave equipment ( max. 32 ). The selection between Q2 interface,
synchronous with a bit rate of 19.2 Kbit/s, and RQ2 interface asynchronous, with a bit rate sw selectable
of 1.2 /2.4 /4.8 /9.6 Kbit/s is provisionable.
Interface QB3* permits to establish connection with the Operative System of the Management System.
In this connection the O.S. is available in a protected version (OS Main and OS Spare).
Figure 71. on page 156 illustrates the general management architecture of the equipment.
The QB3* connected NE is defined as GATEWAY. Connection is made through the QX & SYNC Access
module.
The connection of the other equipment to the TMN is managed through the DCC channels inside the STM
frame with QECC* protocol.
The connection mode is indicated in the following (see Figure 72. on page 156).The Equipment Controller
unit transfers messages between QB3* and DCC.
To forward TMN messages towards other NEs, the Equipment Controller uses the NIECB connection with
the Card Controller of the East and West Aggregate units (STM1 tributaries units as well, if any).
In this way the messages are transmitted on D1 ....D12 bytes of STM (DCC).The connected NE extracts
the messages from these bytes and sends them to the Equipment Controller.
In the selected NE the Equipment Controller uses the LIECB connection to exchange data with the card
controller of the various units.
This data is then transferred towards the Operative System via the Aggregates DCC. In all the NE not
involved the Equipment Controller lets through the DCC between the two aggregates.
The 1651SM indications in Figure 71. on page 156 are valid also for 1661 SMC.
3.1.9 Power Supply Subsystem
Power to the equipment units is supplied by two Power Supply unit plus a spare. The latter can be removed
without causing trouble to service.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Protection to the station power supply is afforded by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
155 / 436
Q3
OPERATION
SYSTEM
LAN
BRIDGES
LAN
LAN
BRIDGES
QB3
1651 SM
GATEWAY
DCC
CRAFT
TERMINAL
1651 SM
GATEWAY
F
1651 SM
NE
DCC
DCC
Q2
1651 SM
NE
1651 SM
NE
LAN
BRIDGES
DCN
1651 SM
NE
DCC
LOCAL/
REMOTE
C.T
F
DCN : DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK
DCC
DCC
ADM
DCC
ADM
DCC
ADM
ADM
(up to 31)
Q2
NON
NON
SDH EQ.
SDH EQ.
........
NON
NON
SDH EQ.
SDH EQ.
NON
.........
NON
SDH EQ.
SDH EQ.
(up to 31)
(up to 31)
Figure 71. 1651SM/1661 SMC General Management Architecture
OPERATION
SYSTEM
LAN
QB3
AUIB2 ADAPTER/2
AGG. W
STMN
S
T
M
DCC
CARD
CONTR.
AGG.
E
ESCT
NIECB
NIECB
NE
AGG. E
NE ( 1651 SM GATEWAY )
LIECB
NIECB
E
S
C
T
LIECB
NIECB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AGG. W
Figure 72. Connection Mode for TMN
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
156 / 436

OPERATION
SYSTEM

3.2 Unit description

In the following paragraphs are inserted the detailed information of each units and subunits of the
equipment.
As far as concerns the detailed alarm indications, refer to the Operators Handbook, Alarms Status and
Control application description.
3.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributaries

(See Figure 75. on page 165).
This description is applicable to all 2 Mbit/s tributary units:
21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 OHM
21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 OHM
21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 OHM Retiming
21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 OHM Retiming
In the end of the following para 3.2.1.1, it will be given a short account about the new 2 Mbit/s Trib. in which
i has been added the Retiming Function
3.2.1.1 21x2Mbit/s TRIB.
The 21x2Mbit/s TRIB. unit allows a max. of twentyone 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to
access the STM1 synchronous digital structure. After having synchronized each tributary to the timing
and synchronism signals received from theClock reference unit, the unit transmits the tributary signals
(mapped in the STM1 structure) to the MATRIX unit to be transmitted towards the EAST/WEST
Aggregate units.
Since the STM1 structure can carry a max. of sixtythree 2Mbit/s tributary streams, the digital streams
leaving the unit involved result to be equipped with only one third of the general STM1 frame capacity.
The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 2Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted from
the received STM1 frames and then transmitted towards external equipment of lower hierarchical order.
The Access module subunits, which will be described in the following, interface the 2Mbit/s signals with
the external source.
The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which points out any malfunctions
to the Card Controller subunit. The latter informs the Equipment Controller unit through LEDs and other
indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following topics are dealt with in the following:
ED
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
Power supply, Remote Inventory
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
157 / 436
The unit interfaces the 21 plesiochronous tributaries and the STM1 synchronous digital structure.
The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s4wire bus format, to the units processing the aggregate
stream.
Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relevant 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)
are received from the Clock reference unit(CRU) of the equipment.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals depends
on the operating status of the two CRUs.
The twentyone 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in HDB3 format.
The description deals with only one of the 21 tributaries in that they follow the same procedure.
An electric transformer decouples the line signals. Afterwards, the signal accesses the P.I.
(Physical Interface) consisting of G.703 Interface and Decoder. The G703 interface circuit:
regenerates the line signal thus recovering a Nyquist attenuation within the 06 dB range
extracts the 2MHz clock from the line signal. This signal is also sent to the CRU.
The Decoder:
decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3> data + NRZ clock)
detects the loss of the signal and hence generates the LOS alarm
Loops back following the Card Controller commands.
As primary condition, the 2Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted to transit through a synchronous
network. A C12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path
Adaptation).
Through the LPT operation (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC12 container is structured to
distribute its octets within a time interval of 500msec. which corresponds to 4 STM1 frames period.
The VC12 consists of a C12 container and a POH octet (path overhead) assigned to the first position
of the structure.
Figure Figure 73. on page 163shows the structure of a VC12 and the POH.
The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) permits to structure the TU12 through the
insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC12 inside the TU12
stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM1
frames.
Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU12 structure.
The operations described are performed on all the twentyone 2Mbit/s tributaries.
At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each nth tributary (121) can be
connected to any of the 63 positions of the STM1 frame thus structuring the connection matrices.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 38.88Mbit/s 4row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregate units
via the MATRIX units.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
158 / 436

Transmission

Reception
On the Rx side, the unit receives (through the Matrix units) the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each
EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 aggregate units.
A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate (Main or Spare) to analyze (1 or 2 in the cited figure) for
each side (WEST and EAST) through commands (PROT WEST, PROT EAST) received from the Card
Controller of the unit.
Full Matrix utilizes only West 1/2.
The protection EPS of the Full Matrix, selects main or spare.
The 21 TU12s are chosen and extracted and, according to the indications received from the Card
Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).
The TUOHs pointer interpreter checks the loss of signal (AIS) on each selected stream.
At this point each VC12 is individually processed, therefore the description will deal with only one VC12
but is applicable to all the tributaries.
By means of the LPT (Low order Path Termination) operation the POH is extracted from the VC12
thus obtaining the C12 structures.
The POH is processed inside the POH Management circuit.
The following operations are carried out:
estimate BIP2. Error counting is utilized to generate the FEBE signal (Tx side).
control the SIGNAL LABEL. Checks the regular configuration of the signal label bits.
FEBE check. Checks if errors have been detected on the remote equipment by BIP2
calculation.
FERF check.
Path Trace extraction
All the above operations are processed through the Unit Card Controller.
The 2Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C12 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock.
A DPLL circuit is utilized with time base supplied by an external oscillator.
The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded.
This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when detecting loss of TU12.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The G703 interface and the electric transformer adapts the 2Mbit/s tributary signal to ITUT Rec. G703
and is then sent to an external source.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
159 / 436
Card Controller
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals to
be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interface
processes the alarms received from the two CRUs, namely:
ISWCAN : internal alarm received from the CRU A;
ISWCBN : internal alarm received from the CRU B;
The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria in case of loss of the selected timing signal.
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance.
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored through
the EEPROM. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and the OSW switching criteria
to send to the other units.
Loop Management
Line looping ( Line L ) and Internal looping are possible at the tributary level. They are managed by the
LPT and LPM signals. It is possible to activate them via software .
Through the line loopback the signal received from the tributary external line is looped on the tributary
output rx side.
Through the internal loopback the signal received from the aggregate is looped on the tributary tx side.
Loops are used to test at various level the equipment and the line.
AIS Processing
Detection of the need to forward AIS indication enables the AIS registers to forward the AIS signal to the
G.703 Rx Interfaces.
Dialog with the Equipment Controller unit
Information on setting options, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
through the LIECB and NIECB connections.
Physical position acknowledgment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Through signals ID 04 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the subrack.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
160 / 436

The Card Controller subunit carries out the following main functions:

MSP protection
This function permits to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signals received from aggregates
WEST (West Aggregate Main or West Aggregate Spare). The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST
command) is carried out on aggregates EAST.
Selection (performed during the turnon phase) and switching operations (performed during the operating
phase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These
criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA, MB
from Full Matrix are used.
EPS Tributary management
This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from other
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para EPS for electrical
tributaries on page 119.
Unit type acknowledgment
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
The power supply voltages present at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Enhanced Monitoring unit are:
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.

The electrical ground and chassis ground strapconnected.
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, date
of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which
utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected to
the Equipment Controller.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
161 / 436
This is a unit managed like the basic 21*2Mb/s Trib described above, but with the additional circuits to
support the 2Mb/s Retiming feature.
The Retiming function applies the Equipment Clock to the outgoing 2Mb/s signal that therefore becomes
synchronized with the SDH network synchronization reference .
The additional circuit that allows this implementation consists in an elastic buffer that is able to absorb
the jitter and wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occurs.
This feature is programmable via SW, in order to include or exclude the Retiming for each single port. The
same 21*2 Mb/s Unit can mix ports that apply or not the retiming.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Two different hardware board options ( Tributary unit part numbers) are needed to provide 75 Ohm and
120 Ohm impedance.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
162 / 436

3.2.1.2 21 x 2 Mbit/s Tributary with Retiming

8 bit
G = rrrrrrrr (r = BIT INTERVAL FOR FIXED JUSTIFICATION)
VC12
W = iiiiiiii (i = 2.048 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY BIT)
POH of VC12
G
C1, C2 = JUSTIFICATION SIGNALLING BIT
o = OVERHEAD BITS
125 us
32 byte
POH STRUCTURE :
2 BITS TO ESTIMATE THE BER THROUGH THE BIP2
ENCODING PROCEDURE PERFORMED ON THE PREVIOUS
VIRTUAL CONTAINER (THE FIRST AND SECOND BITS OF
BIP2 CONSTITUTE THE PARITY BIT OF ODD AND EVEN
ORDER BITS)
W
G
G
C1 C2o o o r r
W
125 us
S1, S2 = NEGATIVE AND POSITIVE JUSTIFICATION

OPPORTUNITY REFERRED TO SIGNALLINGS C1 AND C2
32 byte
W
G
1 BIT TO INDICATE (TO THE REMOTE TERMINAL) THE

RESULT OF THE BER ESTIMATION DETECTED ON THE
OPPOSITE DIRECTION: VALUES 0 AND 1 OF BIT FEBE
(FAR END BLOCK ERROR)
RESPECTIVELY INDICATE ABSENCE OF VIOLATION AND
PRESENCE OF ONE OR TWO VIOLATIONS OF THE
PARITY LIMITS ESTABLISHED BY BIP2
1 BIT TO CHECK THE PATH TRACE THROUGH AN

APPROPRIATE PROTOCOL (NOT UTILIZED WITH THIS
RELEASE)
C1 C2o o o r r
W
125 us
32 byte
3 BITS PRESETTABLE FOR THE SIGNAL LABEL

1 BIT FOR THE FERF (FAR END RECEIVE FAILURE)
ALARM INDICATION.
W
G
G
C1 C2r r r r s1
S2 i i i i i i i
W
125 us
32 byte
W
G
BIP2
F
E
B
E
PATH
TRACE
SIGNAL
LABEL
F
E
R
F
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 73. VC12 Structure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
163 / 436

TU12
V1
125 us
35 byts
V2
0
1
125 us
34
NEGATIVE
JUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY
V3
35
POSITIVE
JUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY
125 us
69
V4
70
125 us
104
V1
105
125 us
BYTES BELONGING TO
THE PREVIOUS TU12
BYTES BELONGING TO
THE SUBSEQUENT TU12
139
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
V2
Figure 74. TU12 Structure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
164 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
2Mbit/s
TRIB.
TO
CRU
5.5V
+5.3V
+12.1V
D2UP21
D2UN21
D2EP21
D2EN21
D2UP1
D2UN1
D2EP1
D2EN1
FUSES
POWALIM
5V
AIS21
PERFORMANCE
CTYPE 0 : 3
T21RX
AIS
AIS
T21RX
T1RX
TUOH
GENERATION
TU12
FORMATTING
(HPA)
PPS
T21TX
T1TX
T21TX
436
OSWi
SYNCA
SYNC
CAREM
3AL 36668 AA AA
TO ALL
THE UNITS
CRU
CRU
SELECTION
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER ESCT UNIT
CARD CONTROLLER
LIECB
NIECB
EQ. CONTR.
1+1
AGGREGATE
PROTECTION
ISW1,2W
ISW1,2E
AGGR.
MSP
PROTECT.
MSP
PROTECT.
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
PROT WEST
PROT EST
PROT WEST
TU12
WEST
EXTRAC.
PROT EST
TU12
EAST
EXTRAC.
FROM
TRIBS
21
21
WEAST 2
WEAST 1
EAST 2
EAST 1
4
DR2WI
WEST 2
DR1WI
4
WEST 1
/
4
EAST 2
/
DR2EI
DR1EI
4
EAST 1
/
4
/
DT1Wi
4
/
DT2Wi
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
4
/
DT1Ei
4
/
DT2Ei
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
LOOPBACK
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR
UNIT TYPE
EPS
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEAGMENT
AIS
TRIBUTARIES
PERFORMANCE
MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT
ALARMS
CONFIGURATIONS
51.8MHz
AIS1
POH
EXTRACTION
( LPA)
POH
GENERATION
VC12
FORMATTING
(LPT)
DYNAMIC MATRIX
CKA
CRU
CLOCK
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
REGENERATION
( LPA)
DATA
POH
MANAGEMENT
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
INSERTION INTO
C12 (LPA)
T1TX
ISWT
EQ. CONTR.
+12V
T21RX
T21TX
+5V
LOS
HDB3AMI/NRZ
DECODER
AND LOOP BACK
CLOCK
HDB3AMI/NRZ
ENCODER
AND LOOP BACK
DATA
PWALM
2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY21
PI
G703
INTERFACE
PI
G703
INTERFACE
2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY1

TO THE MATRIX
FROM THE MATRIX
ID 0 : 4
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
SYNCB
CK
CKB
Figure 75. Block diagram: 21x2 Mbit/s trib.
07
165 / 436
3.2.2 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary
The 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB unit allows to multiplex up to 21 data streams at 1.544 Mbit/s to be multiplexed
into 21 VC12 in order to be easily transported into the SDH network.
The unit is an upgrading of the 21x2 Mbit/s unit. Infect it is provided with twentyone 1.4 Mbit/s external
interfaces (T1 standard) and twentyone emulators inside the 2 Mbit/s interfaces (E1 standard).
After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the Clock
reference unit, the unit make it possible to transmit the tributary signals (mapped in the STM1 structure)
towards the EAST1/2 and WEST1/2 Aggregate units.
The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 1.5 Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted
from the received STM1 frames and then transmitted towards external equipment of lower hierarchical
order.
Regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions to the
Card Controller subunit, the latter informing the Equipment Controller unit through LEDs and other
indications.
The following topics are dealt with in the following:
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
Transmission
The unit interfaces the 21 plesiochronous tributaries and the STM1 synchronous digital structure.
The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s 4parallelstream format, to the units processing the
aggregate stream.
Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relative 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)
are received from the Clock reference unit (CRU) of the equipment.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals,
depends on the operating status of the two CRUs.
The twentyone 1.5 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in B8ZS format with 100 ohms bal.
impedance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The description deals with only one of the 21 tributaries in that they follow the same procedure.
An electric transformer decouples the line signals. The T1/NRZ circuit perform the line signal adaptation,
clock extraction and B8ZS>NRZ+CK decoding.
The LOS alarm is detected.
Afterwards the signal is sent to the 2 Mbit/s Mapping circuit. The latter inserts the 1.5 Mbit/s stream
into a proprietary format frame.
The twentyone 1.5 Mbit/s signals are processed and are added the FIXED appropriate redundancies
to generate twentyone 2 Mbit/s streams.
In this manner the 1.5 Mbit/s incoming signal frequency information is kept inside the 2 Mbit/s stream
allowing to utilze the 1.5 Mbit/s signals for the CRU unit clock synch.source.
Now the NRZ format signal + clock is encoded in a RZ+/RZsignal with a HDB3 code.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
166 / 436

(see Figure 76. on page 171)

Afterwards the signal accessed the G.703 interface which has to recover the 2 Mhz clock from the line
signal. This clock is also sent to the CRU.
The next circuit performs the code decoding (HDB3> date + NRZ clock), detects the loss of signal and
hence generates the LOS alarm.
Moreover it performs the loopback on thr Card Controller commands.
network. A C12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path Adaptation).
Through the LPT operations (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC12 container is structured to
distribute its bytes within a time interval of 500 sec. which corresponds to 4 STM1 frame period.
The VC12 consists of a C12 container and a POH byte (path overhead) assigned to the first position
of the structure.
Figure 73. on page 163 shows the structure of a VC12 and of the POH.
The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) permits to structure the TU12 through the
insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC12 inside the TU12
stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM1
frames. Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU12 structure.
At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each nth tributary (121) is
switched over to any one of the 63 positions of the STM1 frame thus structuring the connection matrices
towards the West and/or East aggregates.
The 38.88Mbit/s 4row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and/or EAST aggregate
units depending from the software configurations.
The main alarms, collected by the Card Controller, indicate (for each tributary):
LOS: loss of signal

over/underflow of the elastic store.
Reception
On the Rx side, the unit receives the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each EAST1/2 and WEST1/2
aggregate unit with protection 1+1.
The MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze for each side (WEST and EAST) through
commands PROT WEST, PROT EAST received from theCard Controller of the unit.
The 21 TU12s are chosen and extracted from the selected tributaries, through the dynamic connection
matrix ( SNCP/I functions) , according to the indications received from the Card Controller.
The TUAIS condition and the loss of pointer can be detected by the TUOHs pointer interpreter.
At this point each VC12 is individually processed.
The LPT (Low order Path Termination) operation extracts the POH from each of the VC12s to obtain the
C12 structure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following operations are carried out in the POH MANAGEMENT circuit:
BIP2 astimation on the preceding Virtual Container Error counting utilized to generate the
FEBE signal (Tx side).
SIGNAL LABEL control.It checks the regular configuration of the signal label bits.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
167 / 436
FEBE check.It checks if errors have been detected on the remote equipment through BIP2
estimation.
FERF check.
Path Trace extraction to verify the continuity of the link.
All the above operations are processed through the Unit Card Controller.
The 2Mbit/s signal is regenerated by processing the C12 (LPA Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock.
A DPLL circuit is utilized with time base supplied by an external oscillator .
The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded. It can be replaced by the AIS signal (all ones) when detecting loss
of TU12.
Finally through the G. 703 interface circuit the Mbit/s signal is forwarded to HDB3>NRZ decoding
circuit.
The Aligner circuit realizes the signal alignment word and setting the frame counter in such a way to
recover the 1.544 Mbit/s payload.
Thruogh the PLL Demapping circuit is extracted the 1.544 Mbit/s stream from the 2 Mbit/s signal.
A PLL digital circuit with a 51.84 Mhz clock is utilizes.
AIS is detected on the 2 Mbit/s signal, a signal all ones is inserted on the 1.544 Mbit/s outgoing stream.
Finally, through the electrical transformer the 1.5 Mbit/s signal is adapted according to the G.703 Rac. and
then sent to an external source of the unit.
On the outgoing signal the Equalizer Control circuit permits to equalize the signal depending on the cable
length.
This operation can be executed at only one tributary level or simultaneously on all the twentyone
tributataries.
Card Controller
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU from which the synchronism and timing signals to be used as reference
for the unit are extracted. To provide the selection criteria, this interface processes the alarms received
from the two CRUs, namely:
ISWCAN : internal alarm received from CRU A;
ISWCBN : internal alarm received from CRU B;
The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria when the selected timing signal is lost.
Local dialog for alarms, configuration and performance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the E2PROMstored software setting
options. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and the OSWi switching criteria
to send to all the other units.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
168 / 436


Loop Management
Line looping ( Line L ) and Internal looping are possible at the tributary level. The are managed by the LPT
and LPM signals. It is possible to activate them via software .
Through the line loopback the signal received from the external line is looped on the tributary tx side.
AIS Processing
Dialog with the Equipment controller unit
Information on setting options, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through
the local LIECB and NIECB wiring.
MSP protection
This function permits to select (through commands PROT WEST and PROT EAST) one of the signals
received from aggregates WEST and EAST.
phase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units.
These criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
Tributary EPS management
This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from the other
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command.
The EPS Protection is described in para. Automatic Protections Subsystem in para. 3.1.5 on page116.
Main unit acknowledgment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller Trib. can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
169 / 436
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
Malfunction or voltage failure generates the PWALM alarm.

The unit is provided with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, date
of construction).
This store is powered by a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which utilizes
it for the Remote Inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly connected to the
Equipment Controller.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
170 / 436

The power supply voltages at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
5.5V
+5.3V
+12.1V
PI
FUSES
ENCODER
NRZ/HDB3
LOS
DECODER
AIS21
PERFORMANCE
CTYPE 0 : 3
T21RX
51.8MHz
( LPA)
REGENERATION
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
T21RX
T1RX SNCP/I
AIS
GENERATION
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER UNIT
SYNC
1+1
AGGREGATE
PROTECTION
ISW1,2E
LIECB
NIECB
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
OSWi
SYNCA
CKA
SYNCB
CKB
CAREM
FROM
AGGR.
ISW1,2W
FROM/TO
EQ. CONTR.
21
21
T21TX
T1TX
EAST
WEST
EXTRAC.
TU12
PROT EST
EXTRAC.
FROM/TO
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
PROT WEST
PROT EST
PROT WEST
PROTECT.
MSP
PROTECT.
MSP
WEST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
TU12
T21TX
FROM
TRIBS
ISWT
TO ALL
FROM CRU THE UNITS FROM CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
CARD CONTROLLER
EPS
AIS
TRIBUTARIES
MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT
LOOPBACK
AIS
( LPT)
EXTRACTION
POH
AIS1
GENERATION
TUOH
(HPA)
FORMATTING
TU12
CRU
SELECTION

UNIT TYPE
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEDGMENT
PERFORMANCE
ALARMS
CONFIGURATIONS
CLOCK
MANAGEMENT
DATA
POH
(LPT)
POH
FORMATTING
C12 (LPA)
VC12
INSERTION INTO
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
TO
EQ. CONTR.
PWALM
+2.5
+3.3
T21RX
T21TX
HDB3/NRZ
CLOCK
DATA
DYNAMIC MATRIX
+5V
5V
+12V
POWALIM
1.5 Mbit(s TRIBUTARY 21
51.8MHz
1.5
RZ+
51.8MHz
INTERFACE
G703
G703
RZ
INTERFACE
NRZ
HDB3
RZ
RZ+
D1.5UP21
NRZ
HDB3
NRZ
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
D1.5UN21
NRZ
CK2
NRZ
PLL
CK ALIGNER CK2
DEMAP.
2 Mbit/s
MAPPING
LOS
CK
1.5
EQUALIZATION
CONTROL
PI
T1/NRZ
NRZ
T1TX
/
DT1Ei
4
/
4
DR2WI
DR1WI
4
/
DR2EI
DR1EI
4
/
DT2Wi
DT1Wi
4
/
DT2Ei
D1.5EP21
D1.5EN21
D1.5UP1
D1.5UN1
D1.5EP1
D1.5EN1
1.5 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY 1
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
2Mbit/s
TRIB.
TO
CRU
FROM
WEST 1
AGGREGATE
FROM
WEST 2
AGGREGATE
FROM
EAST 1
AGGREGATE
FROM
EAST 2
AGGREGATE
TO
WEST 1
AGGREGATE
TO
WEST 2
AGGREGATE
TO
EAST 1
AGGREGATE
TO
EAST 2
AGGREGATE

ID 0 : 4
CK
Figure 76. 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary
07
171 / 436
3.2.3 3x34Mbit/s TRIB
The 3x34Mbit/s TRIB unit allows a max. of three 34Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to access the
STM1 synchronous digital structure.
After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from theClock
Reference Units, the unit, by means of the MATRIX units, transmits the tributary signals (mapped in the
STM1 structure) towards the EAST and WEST Aggregate units.
the received STM1 frames and then transmitted towards external lower hierarchical equipment. Access
module units interface the 34Mbit/s tributary signals with the external source (see description further on).
The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal malfunctions to the
Card Controller subunit. The latter informs the Equipment Controller unit through LEDs and other
indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following are dealt with in the following:
ED
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
172 / 436

(See Figure 79. on page 178)

Transmission
The Tx part of the unit interfaces the three 34Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and the STM1
synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units as a 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus structured
stream for processing.
The CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNA and SYNB synch. signals are received
from the Clock Reference Unit (CRU).
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals depends on the
operating status of the two CRUs.
The unit receives three HDB3 coded/75 ohms unbal. 34.368 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.
The description that follows concerns only one of the three tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.
The signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of the G.703 Interface and the Decoder.
The G.703 Interface circuit:
Regenerates the line signal by recovering an 012 dB attenuation at the Nyquist frequency.
Extracts the 34 MHz clock from the line signal.
The Decoder:
Codedecodes, i.e.: HDB3 > data NRZ + clock.
Detects signal loss hence generate the LOS alarm
Loops back following the CARD CONTROLLER commands
Before being sent to a synchronous network the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted and then
inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA:Lower order Path Adaptation).
Through the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC3 is arranged so as to distribute its
octets within a time interval of 125msec. corresponding to the duration of 1 STM1 frame.
The VC3 consists of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributed
within the structure.
Figure 77. on page 177 shows the structure of a VC3 and the POH bytes functions.
The operation that follows formats the TU3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion.
The TUOH consists of nine bytes.
The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of the VC3.
The remaining 6 bytes are stuff bytes.
Figure 78. on page 177 illustrates the TU3 structure.
The operations described are carried out in each of the three 34 Mbit/s Tributaries.
At this point, through the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each nth tributary (13) is cross
connected to one of the three positions assigned to it in the STM1 frame thus creating a connection matrix
towards the WEST and EAST aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates via
the MATRIX units.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
173 / 436
The unit receives four 38.88 Mbit/s streams from each EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 Aggregates through the
Matrix units.
A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze (1 Main or 2 Spare) for each side using the PROT
WEST and PROT EAST commands received from the Card Controller unit.
Three TU3s are chosen from the selected tributaries and, in accordance with the signalling indications
received from the Card Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).
The Full Matrix uses only West 1 and 2.
The EPS protection of the Full Matrix selects Main or Spare.
The TUOH pointers interpreter detects presence of AIS and LOP on each selected stream.
At this point each VC3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC3 but it is
applicable to all of the three tributaries.
The POH is extracted from the VC3s thus obtaining the C3 structures.
The POH Rx processing circuit:
extracts J1 to check connection continuity( not available in this release).
compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC3, and if errors are detected
they are sent to the Card Controller.
extracts C2 to check the VC3 configuration
extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits of byte G1, and the FERF indication from the
5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller
The 34 Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C3 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the signal (DATA) and the34 Mbit/s clock.
The regenerated tributary signal is HDB3 encoded. This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when
loss of TU3 signal has been detected (see description above).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Finally, the G.703 Interface circuit adapts the 34368 Kbit/s signal to the characteristics specified by ITUT
Rec.G.703 and then sent to a source external to the unit.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
174 / 436

Receive side
Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions

CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals to
ISW CAN = internal alarm received from CRUA
ISW CBN = internal alarm received from CRUB

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and to generate (together with
all the other alarms detected by the unit) the OSWi criteria to send to all the equipment units.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Byte J1 interface
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3. (Not used in this
release).
Loop Management
output rx side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AIS Processing
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
175 / 436
This function permits to select (PROT WEST command) one of the two signals received from the
Aggregate WEST, Main or Spare. The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST command) is carried out on
Aggregate EAST.
When two Full Matrix are used this protection acts the EPS between these units.
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para EPS for electrical
The power supply voltages present at the input of the unit are:
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.
The electrical ground and chassis ground are strapconnected.
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
176 / 436

MSP Protection

85 byte
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
H4
Z3
VC3
C3
Z4
Z5
POH STRUCTURE:
J1 (path trace) utilized to transmit in a cyclic mode a 64octect configuration in order to check
the connection continuity. Not operative in this release.
B3 resulting from the BIP8 performed on the previous VC3, before the scrambler.
C2 (signal label) = the configurations are utilized to indicate if VC3 is equipped or not, or the
payload structure
G1 (path status) utilized to transmit information on the link status to the remote terminal.
It contains:
four bits for the FEBE (Far End Block Error) indication, where the decimal numbers 08
indicate the number of violations of BIP8 (the illegal values 9 to 15 indicate absence of
errors);
one bit for the alarm indication FERF (Far End Receiving Failure) and other three digits
not utilized.
F2, utilized for the transmission of one channel coming from the AUX unit (OHBUS circuit).
Z3Z5 can be accessed via AUX board interface.
H4 not utilized.
Figure 77. VC3 structure
86 byte
H1
H2
H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
H1,H2,H3
VC3
PAYLOAD
S
T
U
F
F
I
N
G
9 ROWS
TU 3
TU Pointer (TUOH)
Figure 78. TU3 structure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
177 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
34 Mbit/s TRIB
POWALIM
5V
+5V
FUSES
+12V
+5.3V
5.5V
T21TX
CK
HDB3/NRZ
ENCODER
INS.AIS
SYNC
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
CAREM
CRU
SELECTION
ISWCAN
CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
LIECB
NIECB
MSP
PROTECTION
AIS
MANAGEMENT
ISW1,2E
AGGR.
PROT WEST
WEST
EXTRAC.
PROT EST
EAST
EXTRAC.
MSP
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
PROT WEST
4
DR2WI
WEST 2
DR1WI
4
/
WEST 1
4
EAST 2
/
DR2EI
ISWT TRIBS
PROTECT.
MSP
PROTECT.
PROT EST
EPS
TRIBUTARIES
MANAGEMENT
WEAST 2
WEAST 1
EAST 2
EAST 1
DR1EI
4
EAST 1
/
4
/
DT1Wi
4
/
DT2Wi
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
4
/
DT1Ei
4
/
DT2Ei
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
LOOPBACK
PPS
T21TX
T1TX
T21TX
T1TX
ISW1,2W
ID 0 4:
ISWCBN
SYNCB
CKA
CK
CKB
FROM POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 79. Block diagram : 3 x 34 Mbit/s Trib.
07
178 / 436

EQ. CONTR.
CARD CONTROLLER

UNIT TYPE
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEAGMENT
PERFORMANCE
J1
BYTE J1
INTERFACE
T3RX
T2RX
T1RX
CTYPE 0 : 3
TU AIS
DETECTION
TU AIS
DETECTION
TUOH
GENERATION
TU3
FORMATTING
(HPA)
PERFORMANCE
CONFIGURATIONS
AIS3
T3RX
AIS1
POH
EXTRACT.
(LPT)
POH RX
PROCESSING
POH
GENERATION
AND
PROCESSING
VC3
FORMATTING
(LPT)
ALARMS
TO ALL
THE UNITS
SYNCA
CRU
34MHz
34Mbit/s SIGNAL
REGENERATION
(LPA)
OSWi
EQ. CONTR.
DATA
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2, Z3Z5
J1
B3
C2
G1
34Mbit/s SIGNAL
INSERTION INTO
C3 (LPA)
OHBUS
MANAGEMENT
LOS
HDB3/NRZ
DECODER
TRIBUTARY1
34Mbit(s TRIBUTARY3 T21RX
OHBUS
PI
G703
INTERFACE
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
PI
CLOCK
DATA
G703
INTERFACE
+12.1V
D34U3
D34E3
D34U1
OHBUS
D34E1
34Mbit/s
TO THE MATRIX
FROM THE MATRIX
3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary


The 34/2 Trans Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit allows one 34 Mbit/s and five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous
stream(s) to access the synchronous digital structure.
The 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous structured stream is demultiplexed into sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals.
The twentyone 2 Mbit/s streams are then processed until a frame structure has been obtained from/to
which a TU12 can be either add/dropped.
Since the STM1 structure can carry a max. of 63 2Mbit/s tributary streams, the digital streams leaving
the unit involved result to be equipped with only one third of the general STM1 frame capacity.
the received STM1 frames. The five 2 Mbit/s streams and one 34 Mbit/s stream are obtained by
multiplexing the remaining sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals and transmitting them towards external lower
hierarchical equipment.
The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions to
the Card Controller subunit. The latter conveys the information to the Equipment Controller ESCT unit
and lights on a local alarm indication (LED).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The description is split into:
ED
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
179 / 436
The unit interfaces the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary, the five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and
the STM1 synchronous digital structure. The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus format,
to the units processing the aggregate stream.
Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relative 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)
are received from the Clock reference unit(CRU) of the equipment.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals depends
on the operating status of the two CRUs.
The 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary is received in HDB3 format with 75 ohms unbal. impedance
Afterwards the signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of Interface G.703 and the Decoder.
The G.703 interface circuit:
Regenerates the line signal.
extracts the 34MHz clock from the line signal.
The Decoder:
decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3> data NRZ + clock)
detects the loss of the signal hence generates the LOS alarm
Loops back following the Card Controller commands
The Demux circuit decodes and demultiplexes the 34,368 Mbit/s signal into sixteen 2048 Mbit/s NRZ
streams.
Besides the 34 Mbit/s frame it also acknowledges four 8 Mbit/s frames as requested by the plesiochronous
demultiplexing strategy. It provides access to the 34 Mbit/s service bit (B12) and to the bit slip option.
Plesiochronous alarms are detected.
The 65 MHz X0 oscillator generates sixteen 2,048 MHz clock signals associated to the mapped tributaries
of the 34 Mbit/s incoming frame.
The five 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in HDB3 format with 75/120 ohms bal./unbal.
impedance. The termination is strapset.
The description that follows concerns only one of the five tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.
An electric transformer decouples the line signals. Afterwards the signal accesses the Physical Interface
(P.I.) consisting of Interface G.703 and the Decoder.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The function of the G703 interface circuit is to:
ED
generate the line signal thus recovering a Nyquist attenuation within the 06 dB range
extract the 2MHz clock from the line signal. This clock signal is also sent to the CRU.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
180 / 436

Transmission

The Decoder:
decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3> data NRZ + clock)
detects the loss of the signal hence generates the LOS alarm
Loopbacks onto the Card Controller commands
The description that follows is common to all the twentyone 2 Mbit/s signals.
network. A C12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path
Adaptation).
Through the LPT operation (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC12 container is arranged to distribute
its octets within a time interval of 500 sec. which corresponds to a period of 4 STM1 frames.
The VC12 consists of a C12 container and a POH octet (path overhead) assigned to the first position
of the structure.
The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) structures the TU12 through the
generation and insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC12 inside
the TU12 stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval
of 4 STM1 frames. Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU12 structure.
The operations described are performed on all of the twentyone 2Mbit/s tributaries.
At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each nth tributary (121) is
assigned to any of the 63 positions of the STM1frame thus structuring the connection matrices towards
the West and East aggregates.
The 38.88Mbit/s 4row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregate units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The main alarms, collected by the Card Controller, indicate (for each tributary):
ED
LOS: loss of signal
over/underflow of the elastic store.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
181 / 436
Reception
The MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate Main or Spare to analyze between the two received from
WEST and the two received from EAST, through commands PROT WEST, PROT EAST coming from the
Card Controller.
The 21 TU12s (with SNCP functions) are chosen and extracted from the selected tributaries, through
the dynamic connection matrix, according to the indications received from the Card Controller.
The TUOHs pointer interpreter checks AIS on each selected stream.
At this point each VC12 is individually processed, therefore the description will deal with only one VC12
but is applicable to all the tributaries.
To obtain the C12 structure the POH is extracted from the VC12 through the LPT (Low order Path
Termination) operation.
The POH MANAGEMENT circuit carries out the following operations:
BIP2 estimate. Error counting is utilized to generate the FEBE signal (Tx side).
SIGNAL LABEL check. Check regular configuration of the signal label bits.
FEBE check. Check if errors have been detected on the remote equipment by BIP2
calculation.
FERF check.
Path Trace extraction (not available in this release).
All the above operations are managed by the Unit Card Controller.
The 2Mbit/s signal is regenerated by processing the C12 (LPA Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock. To this concern a DPLL circuit is utilized with time base
supplied by an external oscillator.
The twentyone 2 Mbit/s streams are split into two blocks (a 16stream one and a 5stream one) and sent
to two different paths.
The sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals of the 34 Mbit/s stream (which can be looped back through the Card
Controller) are sent to the Mux circuit to be multiplexed into the 34 Mbit/s structured stream.
The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded and can be replaced by the AIS signal when detecting the loss of
the 34 Mbit/s signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The G703 interface and the electric transformer adapt the 34,368 Mbit/s tributary signal to ITUT
Rec. G.703 characteristics and is then sent to an external source.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
182 / 436

On the Rx side, the unit receives the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each EAST and WEST aggregate unit.
Card Controller

CRU selection
ISWCAN : internal alarm received from the CRU A;
ISWCBN : internal alarm received from the CRU B;
The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria in case of loss of the selected timing signal.
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the EEPROMstored software setting
options. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the OSWi switching
signal to send to all the other units to execute switching.
Loop Management
output rx side.
AIS Processing
Dialog with the Equipment controller ESCT unit
Information on setting options, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the ESCT Equipment Controller unit
through the local LIECB and NIECB wiring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSP protection (for Aggregate APS)

received from aggregates WEST and EAST , Main or Spare.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
183 / 436
This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from the other
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS Protection is described in para. 3.1.5.2 EPS
for electrical tributaries on page119
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller Trib. can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
The power supply voltages present at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Enhanced Monitoring unit are:
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
PWALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (Part Nos., series,
date of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller ESCT unit
which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the Equipment Controller ESCT.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
184 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
5.5V
+5.3V
+12.1V
CK
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
REGENERATION
(LPA)
CK
CTYPE (3:0)
CONFIGURATIONS
ALRMS
PERFORMANCE
16
POH
GENERATION
VC12
FORMATTING
(LPT)
AIS21
POH
EXTRAC.
(LPA)
POH
MANAGEMENT
TUOH
GENERATION
TU12
FORMATTING
(HPA)
AIS
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
CRU
SELECTION
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
SYNC
CK
CAREM
LIECB
NIECB
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
OSWi
SYNCA
SYNCB
CKA
CKB
FROM
AGGR.
ISW1,2EN
FROM / TO EQ.
CONTR. ESCT
ISW1,2WN
TO ALL
THE UNITS FROM CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
MPS
PROTECTION

LOOPBACK
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS MAIN UNIT
ACKNOWLED.
PERFORMANCE
AIS
MANAGEMENT
CARD CONTROLLER
EPS
TRIBUTARIES
MANAGEMENT
T21X
T6RX
T21X
T6TX
T21RX
T6RX
T5RX
T1RX
T6TX
MSP
PROTEC
PROT WEST
TU12
WEST
EXTRAC.
PROT EAST
MSP
PROTEC
PROT EAST
TU12
EAST
EXTRAC.
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
PROT WEST
21
21
T21TX
FROM
TRIBS
ISWT
FROM CRU
LOOP
BACK
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
INSERTION INTO
C12 (LPA)
AIS1
T21RX
AIS1
AIS
POH
EXTRAC.
(LPA)
T1TX
T5TX
TO EQ.
CONTR. ESCT
MULTIPL.
PWALM
POWALIM
5V
+5V
+12V
CK
NRZ/HDB3
ENCODER
51,84MHz
CK
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
REGENERATION
(LPA)
TUOH
GENERATION
POH
GENERATION
T21TX
T6TX
T5TX
FROM / TO EQ
CONTR. ESCT
REMOTE
INVENTORY
FUSES
PI
G703
INTERFACE
LOS
HDB3/NRZ
DECODER
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
NOT USED
D34UB
CLOCK
DATA
T5Rx
T5Tx
CK
DEMULTIPL.
34Mb/s
TRIB.
D34UA
PI
G703
INTERFACE
NRZ/HDB3
ENCODER
DATA
POH
GENERATION
TU12
FORMATTING
(HPA)
VC12
FORMATTING
(LPT)
PPS
DYNAMIC MATRIX
D34EB
D34EA
D2UP5
2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY5
DATA
CLOCK
LOS
2Mbit/s SIGNAL
INSERTION INTO
C12 (LPA)
DT1Wi
DT1Wi
DT1Wi
DT1Ei
FROM EAST
AGGREGATE
NOT USED
D2EP5
HDB3/NRZ
DECODER
D2UN5
PI
G703
INTERFACE
DATA
T1TX
D2EN5
D2UN1
PI
G703
INTERFACE
CLOCK
D2UN1
D2EP1
D2EN1
2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY1
TO WEST
AGGREGATE
34Mb/s
TRIB.
2Mbit/s
TRIB.
TO
CRU

TO EAST
AGGREGATE
FROM WEST
AGGREGATE
ID 04
:
Figure 80. 34/2 Trans Mux and 5 x 2 Mbit/s tributary
07
185 / 436
3.2.5 3x45Mbit/s TRIB
The 3x45Mbit/s TRIB unit allows a max. of three 45Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to access the
STM1 synchronous digital structure.
After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from theCRU,
the unit, by means of the MATRIX units,transmits the tributary signals (mapped in the STM1 structure)
towards the EAST and WEST Aggregate units.
the received STM1 frames and then transmitted towards external lower hierarchical equipment. Switch
module units interface the 34Mbit/s tributary signals with the external source (see description further on).
indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following are dealt with in the following:
ED
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
186 / 436


Transmission
The Tx part of the unit interfaces the three 45Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and the STM1
synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units as a 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus structured
stream for processing.
from the CRU unit.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals depends on the
operating status of the two CRUs.
The unit receives three B3ZS coded/75 ohms unbal. 44.736 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.
The description that follows concerns only one of the three tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.
The signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of the G.703 Interface (also compliant with
ANSI T1 102 Rec. DS3 interface) and the Decoder.
The G.703 Interface circuit:
Regenerates the line signal by recovering an 06 dB attenuation at the Nyquist frequency.

Extracts the 45 MHz clock from the line signal.
The Decoder:
Codedecodes, i.e.: B3ZS > data NRZ + clock.

Detects signal loss hence generate the LOS alarm
Loops back following the CARD CONTROLLER commands
Before being sent to a synchronous network the 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal at 44.736 Mbit/s is
adapted and then inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA: Lower order Path Adaptation).
Through the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC3 is arranged so as to distribute its
octets within a time interval of 125msec. corresponding to the duration of 1 STM1 frame.
The VC3 consists of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributed
within the structure.
Figure 77. on page 177 shows the structure of a VC3 and the POH bytes functions.
The operation that follows formats the TU3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion. The TUOH
consists of nine bytes.
The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of the VC3. The remaining
6 bytes are stuff bytes.
The operations described are carried out in each of the three 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. At this point, through
the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each nth tributary (13) is crossconnected to one of the three
positions assigned to it in the STM1 frame thus creating a connection matrix towards the WEST and
EAST aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates via
the MATRIX units.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
187 / 436
The unit receives four 38.88 Mbit/s streams from each EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 Aggregates through the
Matrix units.
A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze (1 or 2) for each side using the PROT WEST
and PROT EAST commands received from the Card Controller unit.
Three TU3s are chosen from the selected tributaries and, in accordance with the signalling indications
received from the Card Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).
The Full Matrix uses only West 1 and 2.
The EPS protection of the Full Matrix selects Main or Spare.
The TUOH pointer is utilized to detect presence of AIS on each selected stream.
At this point each VC3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC3 but it is
extracts J1 to check connection continuity (not available in this release).
compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC3, and if errors are detected
they are sent to the Card Controller.
extracts C2 to check the VC3 configuration extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits
of byte G1, and the FERF indication from the 5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card
Controller
obtaining the signal (DATA) and the 45 Mbit/s clock.
The regenerated tributary signal is B3ZS encoded. This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when
loss of TU3 signal has been detected (see description above).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Finally, the G.703 Interface circuit adapts the 44736 Kbit/s signal to the characteristics specified by ITUT
Rec.G.703 and then sent to a source external to the unit.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
188 / 436

Receive side
Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions

CRU selection
ISW CA = internal alarm received from CRUA
ISW CB = internal alarm received from CRUB
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance.

Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Byte J1 interface
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3. (Not used in this
release).
Loop Management
output rx side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AIS Processing
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
189 / 436
This function permits to select (PROT WEST command) one of the two signals received from the WEST.
The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST command) is carried out on Aggregate EAST.
When two Full Matrix are used this protection acts as EPS between these units.
tributaries. This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 EPS
for electrical tributaries on page 119.
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
190 / 436

MSP Protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
PWALM
5V
+5V
+12V
T3RX
T3TX
INS. AIS
NRZ/HDB3
ENCODER
CK
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
PERFORMANCE CTYPE 0 : 3
J1
T3RX
T2RX
T1RX
ISWCAN
OSWi
SYNCA
CAREM
FROM
CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CARD CONTROLLER
EQ CONTR.
LIECB
NIECB
TO ALL
THE UNITS
CRU
SELECTION

MAIN UNIT
BYTE J1
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE
ACKNOWLEAGMENT INTERFACE
ALARMS
AIS3
TU AIS
DETECTION
TU AIS
DETECTION
AIS1
T3RX
POH
EXTRAC.
(LPT)
CONFIGURATIONS
45MHz
45Mbit/s SIGNAL
REGENERATION
(LPA)
POH RX
PROCESSING
TUOH
GENERATION
TU3
FORMATTING
(HPA)
T3TX
T2TX
T1TX
T3TX
EAST
3 EXTRAC.
WEST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
PPS
WEST
3 EXTRAC.
MSP
PROTECTION
AGGR.
MSP
PROTECT.
PROT WEST
PROTECT.
MSP
PROT EAST
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
PROT WEST
4
/
DT1Wi
4
/
DT2Wi
4
/
DT1Ei
4
/
DT2Ei
4
/
DT1Wi
4
/
DT2Wi
4
/
DT1Ei
4
/
DT2Ei
ISWT TRIBS
PROT WEST
EPS
TRIBUTARY
MANAGEMENT
AIS
MANAGEMENT
LOOPBACK
ISW1,2EN
CKA
SYNCB
CRU
DATA
J1
B3
C2
G1
POH TX
GENERATION
AND
PROCESSING
VC3
FORMATTING
(LPT)
F2, Z3,Z5
J1
B3
C2
G1
45Mbit/s SIGNAL
INSERTION INTO
C3 (LPA)
OH BUS
MANAGEMENT
LOS
HDB3/NRZ
DECODER
SYNC
ISW1,2WN
EQ. CONTR.
FUSES
34Mbit/s TRIBUTARY3
OHBUS
PI
G703
ANSI DS3
INTERFACE
OHBUS
CLOCK
DATA
5.5V
+5.3V
+12.1V
D45U3
D45E3
D45U1
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
PI
G703
ANSI DS3
INTERFACE
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
45Mb/s
TRIB.
AUX
OHBUS
D45E1
T2TX
T1TX
TO
WEST 2
AGGREAGTE
TO
WEST 1
AGGREAGTE
TO
EAST 2
AGGREAGTE
TO
EAST 1
AGGREAGTE
TO
WEAST 2
AGGREAGTE
TO
WEAST 1
AGGREAGTE
TO
EAST 2
AGGREAGTE
TO
EAST 1
AGGREAGTE

ID 0 : 4
ISWCBN
CK
CKB
Figure 81. Schema funzionale 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB.
07
191 / 436
3.2.6 DVB Tributary
The DVB tributary has been introduced to support point to point and broadcast transmission of a Digital
Video stream compliant with DVB specifications.
It supports the following features :
transmitting and receiving function selectable by hardware jumpers present on the board
three indipendent TX or RX channels are available on a single board
ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface ) supported by means of standard devices ; both distributed
and burst transmission modes are supported
supported video stream rate between 1.44 and 39.9 Mbit/s automatically detected and
managed by the board
both 188 and 204 packet lenght are supported
Three independent bidirectional ASI interfaces are availables . As requested by the standard, input and
output are decoupled by a transformer.
Separate BNC connectors are provided for ASI Input and Output .
On the Tx side, each of the three ASI ports are mapped into a 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream; then the
45 Mbit/s channels are mapped into a STM1 synchronous frame.
The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 45Mbit/s streams are extracted from the
received STM1 frames and then processed by a Base Processor to obtain three ASI streams .
indications.
A DSP is responsible for board configuration and programming.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following deals with:
ED
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
192 / 436

Transmission

The following description applies to each of the three input ports.

The Tx side of the board receives an MPEGTS data packet or data burst stream .The lenght of each
packet is compliant to the ASI EN 500839 Specs. so it can be 188 or 204 bytes lenght .The ASI stream
frequency is 270 Mbit/s.The incoming stream frequency handled ranges from 1.44 Mbit/s up to 39.9 Mbit/s.
By means of an ASI interface the packets are converted into a serial flow and a 27 Mhz clock is recovered
from the data and is locked to a 45 Mhz clock by means of a PLL.
A proprietary solution for MPEGTS packet mapping into an unframed 45 Mbit/s PDH stream has been
adopted. A DSP processor and an FPGA (programmable device) are used to implement the adaptation
process.
This flow is then mapped into an STM1 synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units
as a 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus structured stream for processing.
from the Clock Reference unit (CRU).The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate
the unit timing signals depends on the operating status of the two CRUs.
Before being sent to a synchronous network the 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted and then
inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA:Lower order Path Adaptation).
Then, by means of the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC3 is arranged to distribute
its bytes within a time interval of 125 sec. corresponding to a 1 STM1 frame period. The VC3 consists
of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine bytes equally distributed within the structure.
The operation that follows formats the TU3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion. The TUOH
consists of nine bytes. The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of
the VC3. The remaining 6 bytes are stuff bytes.
The operations described are carried out in each of the three 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. At this point, through
the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each nth tributary (13) is crossconnected to one of the three
positions assigned to it in the STM1 frame thus creating a connection matrix towards the WEST and
EAST aggregates.
The 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates
depending on the configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Card Controller (also concerned with presetting options) gathers the main alarms i.e., Loss of signal
(LOS), elastic store under/overflow, from each Tributary.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
193 / 436
The unit can receive up to four 38.88 Mbit/s streams two from the EAST1/2 and two from WEST1/2
Aggregates.
An MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate (1 or 2) to analyze using the commands received from
the Card Controller unit.
Three TU3s are chosen from the tributaries selected through the dynamic connection matrix and, in
accordance with the signalling indications received from the Card Controller.
The TUAIS condition and the loss of pointer are detected by the TUOHs pointer interpreter.
At this point each VC3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC3 but is
extracts J1 to check connection continuity (not operative in this release)
compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC3, and any detected errors are
sent to the Card Controller.
extracts C2 to check the VC3 configuration
extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits of byte G1, and the RAI indication from the
5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller
obtaining the signal (DATA) and the 45 Mbit/s clock which lock the 27 Mhz clock. A DPLL is implemented
in the DSP processor to guarantee high performance in terms of residual jitter and wander figures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 45 Mbit/s signal is then mapped into an MPEGTS stream by the FPGA. ASI burst or packet data are
generated and are sent to the ASi interface togheter with the clock.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
194 / 436

Reception
Card Controller

The main functions performed by the Card Controller are:

CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU from which the synch. and timing signals to be used as reference signals
for the unit are extracted.
The interface processes the alarms received from the two CRUs to supply the selection criteria:
ISWCAN = internal alarm received from CRUA
ISWCBN = internal alarm received from CRUB

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the E2PROM stored software setting
options. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
Dialogue with the Equipment controller unit
Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller ESCT unit
MSP protection
received from aggregates WEST and EAST.
Selection (performed during the turnon phase) and switching (performed during the operating phase) are
processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicate
the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
Tributary EPS management
This unit is not EPS protected
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller acknowledges the unit on which it is mounted.
Byte J1 interface (Not operative in this release)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
195 / 436
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The PWALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.

of construction).
This store is powered by a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which utilizes
it for the Remote Inventory.
The contents of the Remote Inventory is fully described in on para. 4 on page 279.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly connected to the
Equipment Controller.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
196 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
436
5.5V
+5.3V
FUSES
3AL 36668 AA AA
PWALM
4.5 V
+ 4.5
+5V
+3.3 V
T3TX
SYNC
SYNCB
CK
AIS3
T3RX
AIS1
POH
EXTRACT.
(LPT)
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
OSWi
SYNCA
CKB
CKA
CAREM
FROM/TO
EQ. CONTR.
LIECB
NIECB
FROM CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
J1
MSP
FROM
AGGR.
TU3
WEST
EXTRAC.
PROT EST
TU3
EAST
EXTRAC.
WEST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
(LPC)
PROTECTION
ISW1,2E
TO ALL
FROM CRU THE UNITS
CRU
SELECTION
CARD CONTROLLER

UNIT TYPE
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEDGMENT
PERFORMANCE
T3TX
T2TX
T1TX
T3TX
T2TX
T1TX
SNCP/I
DYNAMIC MATRIX
BYTE J1
INTERFACE
T3RX
T2RX
T1RX
CTYPE 0 : 3
TU AIS
DETECTION
TU AIS
DETECTION
TUOH
GENERATION
PERFORMANCE
CONFIGURATIONS
ALARMS
F2, Z3Z5
CK45
45Mbit/s SIGNAL
REGENERATION
POH RX
PROCESSING
POH TX
GENERATION
AND
PROCESSING
TU3
FORMATTING
(HPA)
ISW1,2W
TO
EQ. CONTR.
PLL27
CK45
DATA
OHBUS
MANAGEMENT
45Mbit/s TRIBUTARY3 T3RX
OHBUS
FPGA
OHBUS
CLOCK
DATA
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2, Z3Z5
J1
B3
C2
G1
VC3
FORMATTING
(LPT)
+12.1V
D45U3
D45E3
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
DVBASI
PHYSICAL
INTERFACE
OHBUS
CK45
45Mbit/s SIGNAL
INSERTION INTO
C3 (LPA)
MSP
PROTECT.
MSP
FROM/TO
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
PROT WEST
4
DR2WI
DR1WI
4
/
DR2EI
DR1EI
4
/
4
/
DT2Wi
FROM
WEST 1
AGGREGATE
FROM
WEST 2
AGGREGATE
FROM
EAST 1
AGGREGATE
FROM
EAST 2
AGGREGATE
TO
WEST 1
AGGREGATE
TO
WEST 2
AGGREGATE
4
/
DT1Wi
4
/
DT2Ei
TO
EAST 1
AGGREGATE
TO
EAST 2
AGGREGATE
4
/
DT1Ei
PROTECT.
PROT EST
PROT WEST
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
FROM/TO
AUXCH
EOW
AGG.
TX/RX
DSP
NRZOUT
ASIOUT
ASIIN
PLL45
CONFIGURATION
REGISTERS
DVB TRIBUTARY

ID 0 4:
Figure 82. Block diagram : DVB TRIB.
07
197 / 436
3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit
The unit bidirectionally interfaces a 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous or 155 Mbit/s STM1 synchronous
electrical stream towards the aggregate.
The type of tributary required is software selectable. The Tributary units are interfaced with the external
source through switch module units (see description further on).
The Card Controller subunit belongs to this unit and also manages it.
The operating description is split into:
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
The above are now defined as follows.

TRANSMISSION
The description that follows explains the operations carried out to forward the 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s
Rx external signal to the Aggregates via the Matrices.
The CMIIN input signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) where the following functions are carried
out:
G.703 interface compliant operations

extraction of the incoming tributary clock,
generation of the LOS N alarm should the signal fail.
The 155 Mbit/s TRIB. clock is sent to the CRU and the CMI/NRZ decoding is carried out.
The EN 140/155 command selects either the 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s signal to enable either of the two
routes.
140 Mbit/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The circuits involved are:
ED

The 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C4 container to be adapted so as to be
transported into the synchronous network.
HPT (Higher order Path Termination)

The Virtual Container (VC4) is formatted.
The VC4 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 msec. interval (i.e., one
STM1 period), and consists of the C4 container and POH. The latter containing nine octets
equally distributed within the frame. Figure 83. on page 202 depicts the structure of a VC4 and
of the POH bytes: J1, B3. C2, G1, F2, H4, Z3Z5.Bytes F2, Z3Z5 contained in the OHBUS
dedicated stream are utilized by the AUX unit. The OHBUS can be accessed through the
FUTUREBUS interface.
PG (SA) Pointer Generator of the Section Adaptation.

A fixed pointer value is inserted in the AUOH to structure the AU4 signal.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
198 / 436


155 Mbit/s
Only VC4 structured streams are managed.
The circuits involved are:
RST (Regenerator Section termination)

terminates the first three rows of the SOH extracting data from it.
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)

terminates the last five rows of the SOH extracting data from it.
Figure 84. on page 203 illustrates the SOH structure and the bytes making it up.
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1Z2 and the spare bytes are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated
stream through the FUTURE BUS unit that gives it a logical tension termination .
It synchronizes the Rx timing signal with the internal one received from the selected CRU unit.
Adaptation is carried out by the AU pointer.
B3 parity control on the VC4s POH for performance monitoring operations.
At this point the selected signal is sent to the output (towards the Aggregates via the Matrices) split over
a 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus.
RECEPTION
The signal is received from the Aggregate units over the 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus through the Matrices.
The signal is then managed and forwarded towards the Tributary outputs.
The signal is first of all managed by:
MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)Selects one of the two signals Main or Spare incoming from
EAST (WEST) side Aggregate. Choice is made between the Main or Spare of the same side
Aggregate.
SNCP (Path Protection Switching)

Protects the ring network configured streams (path) by means of the alarm detected AIS status
and B3 Parity Control (East or West side selection). Choice is made between the Main or Spare
path coming from the opposite side Aggregate.
Hence one of the two following signals can be accessed:

140 Mbit/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The circuits concerned are:
ED
HPT (Higher order Path Termination

Extracts the POH bytes from the VC4 structure and manages them accordingly
Bytes F2, Z3Z5 are sent to the AUX unit over an OHBUS dedicated stream through the
FUTURE BUS interface.

Restructures the 140 Mbit/s Tributary by extracting it from Container C4.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
199 / 436
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)

The bytes of the last five rows of the SOH are inserted.
RST (Regenerator Section termination)
The bytes of the first three rows of the SOH are inserted.
Figure 84. on page 203 illustrates the bytes making up the SOH structure.
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream.
At this point one of the two signals is selected from the two received paths.
The circuitry downstream NRZ/CMI encode, and the Physical Interface (P.I.) executes the G.703 Interface
compliant operations.
Afterwards signal CMIOUT is forwarded to the Tributary output.
OH BUS
In addition to the above OHBUS streams, on which information is exchanged for data and speech
channels, there is another OHBUS stream for the communication of the K1, K2, S bytes between the
aggregates and tributaries.
S is a serial stream carrying the external alarm criteria. These bytes are utilized for switching operations.
The OHBUSs are interfaced through the FUTURE BUS DRIVER.
Bidirectional switching is not operative in this release.
Card Controller
The following are the main functions carried out by the Card Controller subunit:
Dialog with the Equipment Controller unit
Data on setting options, alarms, actions taken, performance, etc., is exchanged through the LIECB
and NIECB connections thereby permitting the Equipment Controller to manage the operations assigned
to it.
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration, performance
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the software setting options stored through
the E2PROM. From the unit are received the alarm and performance criteria. The alarms due to unit
failures light up the red LED (1) (LEDN command), and generates the COSW signal which, added to the
EXT ALM (unit external alarms) and to the power supply alarm PW ALM, generate the OSW switching
command.
LED (2) ON means that the unit is working (WK CH).
Unit type acknowledgement
The Card Controller acknowledges the unit on which it is mounted through signals CTYPE 03.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Byte J1 interface
It transmits/receives data on byte J1 (VC4 path trace; the digital data structure recurs with a 64 STM 1
frame periodicity).
Loop Management
Drives two unit loops:
LPT =
Equipment loopback (local), permits to transmit, towards the Tx side, the signal received from
the aggregates
LPM = Line loopback (remote), permits to transmit, towards the tributary, the signal received from the
Tributary Line.
It is possible to activate them via software .
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
200 / 436

155 Mbit/s

DCC Management
Internally interfaces the 192 Kbit/s (D1D3) and 576 Kbit/s (D4D12) channels of the SOHs TMN stream
whenever managed by the Equipment Controller unit.
140/155
Selects the type of tributary.
CRU Selection
It selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) containing the synch. and timing signals to extract as reference
for the unit involved.
The alarms (ISWCA, ISWCB) received from the two units are processed to enable selection.
Physical position acknowledgement
The physical position of the unit inside the subrack is acknowledged by the Card Controller through signals
ID04.
MSP protection
This function permits to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal received from aggregates:
WEST MAIN or WEST SPARE. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is carried out on
aggregates EAST.
phase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These
criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signal ISW MA, MB from
Full Matrix are used.
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 EPS for electrical
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunctions or voltage failure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
of construction).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
201 / 436
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
H4
Z3
C4
or
VC4 PAYLOAD
VC4
Z4
Z5
POH OF VC4
J1 (path trace) utilized to transmit in a cyclic mode a 64octet configuration in order to check
the connection continuity. Not operative in this release.
B3 resulting from the BIP8 performed on the previous VC4, before the scrambler.
C2 (signal label) = the configurations are utilized to indicate if VC4 is equipped or not or the
payload structure.
G1 (path status) utilized to transmit information on the link status to the remote terminal.
four bits contain the FEBE Tx (Far End Block Error) signal, where the decimal numbers
08 indicate the number of violations of BIP8 (the illegal values 9 to 15 indicate absence
of errors);
one bit to carry the FERF Tx alarm signal and three unused bits
F2, utilized for the transmission of one channel coming from the AUX unit.
H4, multiframe indicator (utilized for the payloads structured through TUG) which indicates the
subframe of each multiframe.
Z3Z5 can be accessed via AUX board interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 83. VC4 Structure and POH byte contents
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
202 / 436

261 bytes

9 COLUMNS (Bytes)
A1
RSOH
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
AU POINTERS
B2
MSOH
B2
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
Z1
B2
PAYLOAD STM1
K1
S1
Z1
Z2
Z2
M1
9 ROWS
E2
the 6 octets of type A1 = 11110110 and A2 = 00101000 constitute the alignment word (48 digits)
C1 indicates the STM1 Tributary inside an STMN signal.
octet B1, resulting from the BIP8 procedure performed on the previous frame at the scrambler
output, is inserted into the current frame before scrambling. Not operative.
Octet B1 is utilized to support maintenance of the radio regenerator section (performance
monitoring).
The three B2 octets, resulting from the BIP24 encoding performed on the previous frame
without the first three rows of SOH, are inserted into the current frame before scrambling; they
are not estimated again in the repeaters because they are utilized to estimate the BER between
multiplexer.
E1 and E2 are utilized for service telephone communication between regenerators (E1) and
between muldex and muldex (E2).
D1D3 are utilized as a 192Kbit/s channel for data communication (DCC=Data Communication
Channel) between Regenerators in the TMN network. To support interworking with radio
regenerator equipment (RRA).
D4D12 are utilized as a 576Kbit/s channel for data communication (DCC) between
multiplexers in the TMN network.
F1 is utilized to transmit a data or Voice channel received from AUX unit.
K1 and K2 are utilized for MS Linear Trail Protection signalling channel. The last four K2 bits
are used like MSRDI multiplex section remote indication (FERF) and AIS alarms between the
multiplexers.
S1 indicates synchronism status.
Z1 and Z2 are spare bytes for function not yet defined
M1 byte, indicates MSREI Farend Block Errors (FEBE) for the multiplex section.
X Byte reserved for national use.
Bytes are reserved for future international standards, additional national use ect.
is a Media Dependent byte (only two are accessible). Not operative.
Bytes are not scrambled (like the whole 1ts row)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A1
261 COLUMNS (bytes)
Figure 84. STM1 structure and SOH byte contents
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
203 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
PWALM
5V
SYNC
5.5V
+5V
+12V
COMMUNICATION
WITH
CONTROLLER
EQUIPMENT
LIECB
NIECB
ISWCAN
CKA
SYNCB
:
ID04
ISWCBN
SYNCA
CK
CKB
Figure 85. Block diagram: 140/STM1 Switch tributary
07
204 / 436
MSP
PROTECTIONS
MANAGEMENT
AGGR.
PROT W
PROT E
COSW
LDN
OSW
WKCK
>1
=
PWALM
EXTALM
PERFORMANCE
EAST 1
TO
ALL
UNITS
WEAST 2
WEAST 1
EAST 2
EAST 1
WEAST 2
WEAST 1
EAST 2

TRIBS
ISWT
FULL
MATRIX
EPS
TRIBUTARY
MANAGEMENT
ISW MA,MB
EQ CONTR.
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLEAGMENT
ISW1,2EN
CRU
ALARMS
ISW1,2WN
CRU
CRU
SELECTION
J1
CONFIGURATION
PROT W
MPS
140/155
SELECTION
LPT
PPS
MPS
INTERNAL
DIALOG FOR
BYTE J1
LOOP
DCC
MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT INTERFACE PERFORMANCE
CONFIGUURATION
ALARMS
LPM
LOOP
155
:
D1D3
:
D4D12
K2
D4D12
E2,D4D12
MST
MSOH
INSERT
HPT
POH
EXTRACTION
PROT E
B3,K2
POH
B3
CHECK
EN 140/155
B1,D1+D3
RST
RSOH
INSERT
LPA
140Mbit/s
RICONSTRUCTION
UNIT TYPE
ACKNOWLEAGMENT
:
CTYPE03
EN 140/155
LOOP L
140Mbit/s
B2,K2.D4D12
:
F2,Z3+Z5
B3,J1,C2,G1
SA
AU
SYNCHRONIZATION
PG
(SA)
FUSES
NRZ
LPM
CKL
LPT
LOOP 155
MST
MSOH
TERMINATION
J1,B3,C2
HPT
VC4 SHAPING
FROM
MATRIX
+5.3V
CMI
CK
VCX0
140/155
K1,K2,S
E1,F1
RST
RSOH
TERMINATION
F2,Z3,Z5
LPA
INSERT
INTO C4
B1,D1D3
LPT
EN 140/155 155 Mbit/s
LOOP L
OHBUS
MANAGEMENT
NRZ
CMI
+12.1V
PI
G.703
EN 140/155
CLOCK
PI
G.703
REMOTE
INVENTORY
CMIOUT
CAREM
140/155
Mbit/s
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
CMIIN
140 Mbt/s
LOOP 140
OHBUS
140/155
Mbit/s
LOSN
TO
MATRIX
3.2.8 Optical STM1 Tributary units

3.2.8.1 S1.1 and L1.1 Optical Tributary Unit

This description is applicable to all optical STM1 tributary unit of this release:
S1.1 TRIB. FC
L1.1 TRIB. FC
L1.2 TRIB. FC
L and S letters define the Long or Short distance unit. FC and SC denote the type of connectors used.
The STM1 Tributary unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM1 optical signal and the
signals received from the WEST or EAST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit.
On the Rx side, the unit performs the functions described in ITUT Rec.G783 thus inserting the 38Mbit/s
signals received from the Matrix units into the STM1 synchronous tributary frame to be transmitted to the
optical fiber line.
The reciprocal operations are carried out on the Tx side, i.e., convert the optical signal into an electrical
one, and transmit the 38 Mbit/s signal obtained towards the Matrix Units.
Synchronous streams containing VC4, VC3 or VC12 can be managed through the Full Matrix unit.
The SNCP protection on VC4 streams is not available with this unit, using Connection Card unit.
the Card Controller subunit. The latter will inform the Equipment Controller unit through LEDs and other
indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The description of the unit operation is subdivided as follows:
ED
Reception
Transmission
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
205 / 436
Reception
the informative data (DTiW and DTiE) structured as 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus from the Matrix unit
the CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks with the relative 2kHz SYNCA and SYNCB synch. signals
from the Clock Reference units
The selection is performed through a command received from the Card Controller subunit.
The received data is then processed as specified by ITUT Rec. G.783.
As primary condition, this data is inserted in the assigned positions inside VC4 payload (LPC Lower order
path connection). Afterwards the HPT operation (Higher order path termination) structures the higher
order virtual container VC4 so as to distribute its octets within a time interval of 125msec. which
corresponds to a one STM 1 frame period.
The VC4 consists of a VC4 payload and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributed
within the structure. Figure 83. on page 202 shows the structure of a VC4 and the J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4,
Z3Z5 bytes of the VC4s POH.
Bytes F2, Z3Z5 are utilized by the AUX unit though the OHBUS dedicated stream accessible through
the Futurebus unit.
Through the SA (Section Adaptation) operation, the line transmission is synchronized to the stream
received from the Aggregate units via the Matrix. This synchronization is obtained by adding the AUOH
to the VC4 structure.
SOH bytes are added to complete the STM1 frame structure. This phase of the procedure is enabled
by the MST operation (Multiplexer Section Termination) to terminate the last 5 rows of SOH, and through
the RST operation (Regenerator Section Termination) to terminate the first 3 rows.
Figure 84. on page 203 shows the SOH structure and the description of the bytes making it up as well as
the STM1 structure.
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through the
FUTURE BUS Interface.
The STM1 outgoing signal is parallelseries converted to obtain a 155.52Mbit/s digital stream and relative
synchronism signal (D155T and CK155T). To this concern the VCXO generates a 155.52MHz clock
phaselocked to the reference clock (PLL) received from the CRU.
Loops LPM (line side) and LPT (station) are possible during the turnon and maintenance phases.
The two loops are processed by the Card Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The STM1 signal is then converted by the Tx optical module as stated by ITUT Rec. G.957
requirements.
This signal is transmitted to the line through connector (5) and it is detailed in Chapter 4 Technical
Specification on page 279.
The unit also supplies the ALS criteria, as defined by ITUT Rec.G.958, and can preset the three different
optical protection algorithms.
The following commands reset the optical protection:
ED
manual, LASER ON for 2 seconds every time that pushbutton (3) is pressed
automatic, LASER ON for 2 secs every 180 secs.
manual for test, LASER ON for 90 secs. every time that pushbutton (3) is pressed for more
than 12 secs.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
206 / 436

The unit receives:

Command HIGHREFL is used as the LOS alarm (loss of pulses received from the optical receiver) for the
optical protection over the bidirectional fiber ALS can be excluded through strapping.
Moreover the Tx optical module processes the following alarms:
LDFAIL
failure inside the optical transmitter.

It intervenes when the Tx power decreases (3dB).
LDDEG
LD degradation. It intervenes when the bias current of the optical component

increases vs. the initial value (50%).
MITL
loss of pulses transmitted from the LASER owing to causes external to the
transmitter (e.g. interruption of data set to 0, intervention of the optical protection
ecc.)
All the alarms are collected by the Card Controller.

Transmission
The unit receives the 155Mbit/s signal from the optical fiber line (connector (3)) .
The Rx optical module uses the APD photodiode to regenerate and convert the signal into an electrical
NRZ signal (D155R) with the relative CK155R synchronism.
The Rx optical module processes the LOS alarm, indicating loss of pulses on the Rx optical fiber line, used
on the optical protection circuit.
The 155Mbit/s clocks and data reach the circuit which 1:4 seriesparallel converts and then supplies a
38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus (D38R) with relative synchronism (CK38R). The CK38R synchronism is sent to
the STX1PR gatearray and to the two CRU units where it is utilized as an external reference clock.
The STX1PR gatearray uses the D38R data to perform the reciprocal operations as described by
ITUT Rec. G783.
The SOH bytes are extracted from the descrambled 38.88Mbit/s signals through RST (Regenerator
Section Termination) and MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) operations.
The RST operation extracts and checks the first 3 rows of SOH:
Bytes A1 and A2; Alignment word. Loss of alignment generates LOF alarm
Byte B1; check and BIP8 parity counting
Bytes D1D3; termination towards the Card Controller for data channels
Bytes E1, F1, and any remaining bytes; termination towards the OHBUS
The MST operation extracts and checks the last 5 rows of SOH:
byte B2; check and BIP24 parity counting. The presence of errors generates the SD (Signal
Degrade) or Excessive BER alarms;
Bytes K1, K2; APS, MSAIS and MSFERF signalling;
Bytes D4D12; termination towards the Card Controller TMN;
termination of the E2, Z1, Z2 bytes and other bytes towards the OHBUS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
At this point the SA operation (Section Adaptation) synchronizes the CK38R, (38kHz clock) and CK
(internal clock timing signals). Adaptation occurs through AUOH pointer justification.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
207 / 436
J1 is extracted to check connection continuity. Not operative in this release.

B3 is compared with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC4, and any detected errors
are sent to the Card Controller
C2 is extracted to check the VC4 configuration
the FEBE indication is extracted from the first half of byte G1, while the FERF indication is
contained in another digit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller
All these bytes and all the bytes that have not been mentioned are sent to the Card Controller of the unit
or to the AUX/EOW unit (F2 Byte).
After having extracted the POH bytes, the HPA (Higher Order Path Adaptation) adapts the line multiframe
with the internal multiframe. Adaptation occurs by transferring the AU pointer movement to the TU pointers
housed in VC4 payload. The last operation performed on the Rx side concerns LPC(Lower Order Path
Connection). The LPC operation permits to route the TUs contained in the STM1 frame. The DRiE and
DRiW data will be sent to the EAST and WEST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit. All the signals are
structured as a 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus with the synchronism reference established by the selected CRU.
Card Controller
The Card Controller carries out the following main functions:
CRU selection
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance

the EEPROM. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the COSW signal
which, added to the EXT ALM (unit external alarms) generates the OSWi switching criteria to send to all
the equipment units.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc., is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Through the CTYPE 03 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
208 / 436

The HPT circuit (Higher Order Path Termination) extracts the POH bytes from the VC4 structure.

Byte J1 interface
It transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC4. The datas format is repetitive
and has a 64 STM1 frame periodicity.
DCC byte interface
It transmits (and receives) the DCC bytes D1D3 and D4D12 towards (from) the processing circuits of
bytes SOH.
LPM/LPT Processing
Remote (station side) and Local looping (line side) can be performed through the LPM/LPT signals.
LPT =
the aggregates
Trib. Line.
MSP/APS protection
This function allows for APS Aggregate to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal, Main
or Spare, received from aggregates WEST. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is carried out
on aggregates EAST.
Selection (during the turnon phase) and switching operations (during the operating phase) are
processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicate
the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA, MB
from Full Matrix are used.
The APS is described in para 3.1.5.2 Simplified Linear APS on page 119.
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 EPS for
electrical tributaries on page 119.
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) which stores the unit inventory data (codes, series,
date of construction).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
209 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
POWER
SUPPLY
TO
MATRIX
AUX
FROM
MATRIX
TU
ROUTING
(LPC)
C2
PWALM
POWALIM
5V
+5V
AU/TU
POINTERS
SYNCH.
(HPA)
+12V
5.5V
J1
B3
PPS
G1
POH RX
PROCESSING
+5.3V
FUSES
TU
ROUTING
(LPC)
J1
B3
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
MSP
MSP
+12.1V
DR1Ei 4
/
DR2Ei 4
/
DR1Wi 4
/
DR2Wi 4
/
HOBUS
DT1Ei 4
/
DT2Ei 4
/
DT1Wi 4
/
DT2Wi 4
/
SYNC
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
H4
CK
LPT
(SA)
TIMING
SYNCH.
CTYPE 0 : 3
CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
PROT
E
LIECB
NIECB
CAREM
CKA
SYNCB
COSWi
ID 0 : 4
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
SYNCA
CK
CKB
Figure 86. Block diagram: Optical Trib.
07
210 / 436
TRIBS. FULL AGG.

MATRIX

TO ALL
THE UNITS
>
= 1 OSW
REMOTE
INVENTORY
RX
OPTICAL
MODULE
HIGHREFL
ISWT
EQ. CONTR.
EXT ALM
PROT
W
LDSSHUT
OPTICAL
PROTECTION
MANAGEMENT
ALS
CK
TX
OPTICAL
MODULE
MPS /APS
PROTECTION
MANAGEMENT
ALARMS
INTERNAL
DIALOG FOR
ALARMS
CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE
CK155R
D155R
LOS
P
L
L
CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE
LPT LPM
S/P
CONVERSION
155.52MHz
P/S
CONVERSION CK155T
D155T
LDFAIL
LDDEG
ISW MA,MB
EQ. CONTR.
CRU
SELECTION
CARD CONTROLLER
BYTE DCC
INTERFACE
:
D1D12
BYTE J1
:
D1D3
4 D38R
/
INTERFACE
J1
CK38R
FIRST THREE
SOH (RST)
ROWS
EXTRACTION
D4D12
:
D1D3
:
A1A2
D4D12
:
D1D3
:
A1A2
FIRST THREE
SOH (RST)
ROWS
INSERTION
SOH TX
MANAGEMENT
SOH RX
MANAGEMENT
LAST FIVE
SOH (MST)
ROWS
EXTRACTION
K1,K2
B1
B2
K1,K2
B1
B2
LAST FIVE
SOH (MST)
ROWS
INSERTION
UNIT TYPE
LPM/LPT
MANAGEMENT ACKNOWLED
LPM
POH
EXTRACTION
(HPT)
POHRX
POHTX
AU4
FORMATTING
(SA)
MITL
ISW1,2W
CRU
G1
OH BUS
MANAGEMENT
C2
POH TX
PROCESSING
VC4
FORMATTING
(HPT)
AUOH
GENERATIOIN
ISW1,2E
155Mbit/s
155Mbit/s
3.2.8.2 S1.1 and L1.1 Optical Tributary 600


This description is applicable to the following optical STM1 tributary unit:
S1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
L1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
L1.2 TRIB. 600 FC
L and S letters define the Long or Short distance unit. FC and SC denote the type of connectors used.
The STM1 Tributary unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM1 optical signal and the
signals received from the WEST or EAST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit.
On the Rx side, the unit performs the functions described in ITUT Rec. G783 to insert the 38Mbit/s
signals, received from the Matrix units, into the STM1 synchronous tributary frame to transmit to the
optical fiber line.
The reciprocal operations are carried out on the Tx side, i.e., convert the optical signal into an electrical
one, and transmit the 38 Mbit/s signal obtained towards the Matrix Units.
This unit allows SNCP protection on VC4 stream also with Connection Card Unit.
All levels of VC are managed by means of the Full Matrix Unit.
In this unit LPC circuit even present are not utilised.
the Card Controller subunit which will signal it through LEDs and other indications to the Equipment
Controller unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unit operation is subdivided into:
ED
Reception
Transmission
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
211 / 436
Reception
the informative data (DTiW and DTiE), structured as 38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus, from the Matrix
unit
the CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNCA and SYNCB synch. signals
from the Clock Reference units
depends on the operating status of the two CRUs and is performed through a command received from
the Card Controller subunit.
The received data is then processed as specified by ITUT Rec. G.783.
The Aggregate and Matrix units are logically connected through the four backpanel physical interfaces.
The Multiplex Section Protection module (MSP) protects the streams extracted from the aggregates.
Path Protection Switching (SNCP) protects the ringnetwork configured streams extracted from the
Aggregates through the detection of the PathAIS and parity control (B3).
Bytes F2, Z3Z5 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through the Futurebus
interface.
Through the SA (Section Adaptation) operation the line transmission is synchronized to the stream
received from the Aggregate units via the Matrix. Synchronization is obtained through the AUOHs pointer
on the AU4 structure.
SOH bytes are added to complete the STM1 frame structure. This phase of the procedure is enabled by
the MST operation (Multiplexer Section Termination) to terminate the last 5 rows of SOH, and through the
RST operation (Regenerator Section Termination) to terminate the first 3 rows. Figure 84. on page 203
shows the SOH structure and the description of the bytes making it up as well as the STM1 structure.
The MST inserts the following overhead bytes:
D4/D12 incoming from the Card Controller or from the OHBUS D (Clear channel)
E2 incoming from the OHBUS S/P
B2 locally calculated
third byte Z2, contains the number of B2 parity errors detected on the Tx side
first byte Z1, whose less significative nibble contains the timing marker data processed by the
Card Controller
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The RST realizes the scrambler, adds the alignment word and inserts:
the locally calculated B1 parity
bytes E1 and F1 coming from the OHBUS S/P
bytes D1/D3 coming from the Card Controller
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through the
FUTURE BUS Interface.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
212 / 436

The unit receives:

The STM1 outgoing signal is parallelseries converted to obtain a 155.52 Mbit/s digital stream and relative
synchronism signal (D155T and CK155T). To this purpose the VCXO generates a 155.52MHz clock
phaselocked to the reference clock (PLL) received from the CRU.
Loops LPM (line side) and LPT (station side) are performed during the turnon and maintenance phases.
The two loops are processed by the Card Controller.
The STM1 signal is then converted by the Tx optical module as stated by ITUT Rec. G.957.
This signal is transmitted to the line through connector (5) and its characteristics are detailed in Chapter
4 Technical Specifications on page 279 .
The unit also supplies the ALS criteria, as defined by ITUT Rec.G.958, and can preset the three different
optical protection algorithms.
The following commands reset the optical protection:
manual, LASER ON for 2 seconds everytime that pushbutton (3) is pushed
automatic, LASER ON for 2 secs every 180 secs.
manual for test, LASER ON for 90 secs. everytime that pushbutton (3) is pushed for more than
12 secs.
Command HIGHREFL is used as the LOS alarm (loss of pulses received from the optical receiver) for the
optical protection over the bidirectional fiber.
ALS can be excluded through strapping.
Moreover the Tx optical module processes the following alarms:
LDFAIL
failure inside the optical transmitter.

It intervenes when the Tx power decreases (3dB).
LDDEG
LD degradation. It intervenes when the bias current of the optical component increases
vs. the initial value (50%).
MITL
loss of pulses transmitted from the LASER owing to causes external to the transmitter
(e.g. interruption of data set to 0, intervention of the optical protection ecc.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All the alarms are collected by the Card Controller.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
213 / 436
Transmission
The Rx optical module uses the APD photodiode to regenerate and convert the signal into an electrical
NRZ signal (D155R) with relative CK155R synchronism.
The Rx optical module processes the LOS alarm, indicating loss of pulses on the Rx optical fiber line, used
on the optical protection circuit.
The 155Mbit/s clock and data reach the circuit which 1:4 seriesparallel converts and supplies a
38.88Mbit/s 4wire bus (D38R) with relative synchronism (CK38R). The CK38R synchronism is sent to
the STX1PR gatearray and to the two CRU units where it is utilized as external reference clock.
The STX1PR gatearray uses the D38R data to perform the reciprocal operations as described by
ITUT Rec. G783.
The SOH bytes are extracted from the descrambled 38.88Mbit/s signals through RST (Regenerator
Section Termination) and MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) operations.
The RST operation extracts and checks the first 3 rows of SOH:
Bytes A1 and A2; Alignment word. Loss of alignment generates LOF alarm
Byte B1; check and BIP8 parity counting
Bytes D1D3; termination towards the Card Controller for data channels
Bytes E1, F1, and any remaining bytes; termination towards the OHBUS
The MST operation extracts and checks the last 5 rows of SOH:
byte B2; check and BIP24 parity counting. The presence of errors generates the SD (Signal
Degrade) or Excessive BER alarms;
Bytes K1, K2; APS, MSAIS and MSFERF signalling;
Bytes D4D12; termination towards the Card Controller TMN;
termination of the E2, Z1. Z2 bytes and other bytes towards the OHBUS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
At this point, the SA operation (Section Adaptation) synchronizes the CK38R, (38kHz clock) and CK
(internal clock timing signals). Adaptation occurs through AUOH pointer justification.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
214 / 436

The unit receives the 155Mbit/s NRZ signal from the optical fiber line (connector (3) ).
Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions:

CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU, Main or Spare (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and
timing signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria,
this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRUs, namely:
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance

the EEPROM. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the COSW signal
which, added to the EXT ALM (unit external alarms), generate the OSWi switching criteria to send to all
the equipment units.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc., is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Through the CTYPE 03 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
DCC byte interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This interface transmits (and receives) the DCC bytes D1D3 and D4D12 towards (from) the processing
circuits of bytes SOH.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
215 / 436
LPM/LPT Processing
LPT =
the aggregates
Trib. Line.
MSP/APS protection
This function allows for the APS Aggregate, to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal
received from aggregates WEST, Main or Spare. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is
carried out on
aggregates EAST.
When two Full Matrix units are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA,
MB from Full Matrix are used.
The APS Tributary protection utilizes the ISWT command received from other tributaries.
The ISWT also operates with the previously defined OSW command. The APS is described in para 3.1.5.2
Simplified Linear APS on page 119.
On a 1+1 configured STM1 Tributary network (APS) the green LED (2) on the front panel indicates that
the unit is operating. Its activation is handled by the Card Controller.
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
216 / 436

Remote (station side) and Local (line side) looping is performed through the LPM/LPT signals.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
POWER
SUPPLY
TO
MATRIX
AUX
FROM
MATRIX
PWALM
POWALIM
5V
+5V
5.5V
+12V
+5.3V
FUSES
MSP
MSP
PAISW
75ohm
MATCHING
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
PROT W
MSP
MSP
PAISE
+12.1V
DR1Ei 4
/
DR2Ei 4
/
DR1Wi 4
/
DR2Wi 4
/
HOBUS
DT1Ei 4
/
DT2Ei 4
/
DT1Wi 4
/
DT2Wi 4
/
PROT E
SYNC
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
CTYPE 0 : 3
CRU
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
BYTE DCC
INTERFACE
BYTE J1
:
:
D1D3
D1D12
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
EXT ALM
PROT
W
LIECB
NIECB
CAREM
CKA
SYNCB
TO ALL
THE UNITS
>
= 1 OSW
LDSSHUT
TRIBS. FULL AGG.

MATRIX
PROT
E
REMOTE
INVENTORY
RX
OPTICAL
MODULE
HIGHREFL
OPTICAL
PROTECTION
MANAGEMENT
ALS
CK
TX
OPTICAL
MODULE
MPS /APS
PROTECTION
MANAGEMENT
ALARMS
CONFIGURATIONS
INTERNAL
DIALOG FOR
ALARMS
CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE
CK155R
PERFORMANCE
LPT LPM
LOS
P
L
L
D155R
155.52MHz
P/S
CONVERSION CK155T
ISWT
EQ. CONTR.
D155T
ISW MA,MB
EQ. CONTR.
CRU
SELECTION
4 D38R
S/P
/
CONVERSION
E1
F1
D4D12
:
INTERFACE
J1
CARD CONTROLLER
UNIT TYPE
LPM/LPT
MANAGEMENT ACKNOWLED
LPM
A1A2
D1D3
:
CK38R
FIRST THREE
SOH (RST)
ROWS
EXTRACTION
D4D12
:
D1D3
:
A1A2
SOH TX
MANAGEMENT
SOH RX
MANAGEMENT
LAST FIVE
SOH (MST)
ROWS
EXTRACTION
K1,K2
B1
B2
E2
Z1,Z2
K1,K2
B1
B2
FIRST THREE
SOH (RST)
ROWS
INSERTION
LDFAIL
LDDEG
ISW1,2W
CRU
CK
(SA)
TIMING
SYNCH
LPT
LAST FIVE
SOH (MST)
ROWS
INSERTION
OH BUS
MANAGEMENT
PPS
FIRST THREE
SOH (RST)
ROWS
INSERTION
MITL

ISW1,2E
COSWi
ID 0 : 4
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
SYNCA
CK
CKB
Figure 87. Block diagram: Optical Trib. S/L1.1 600 FC/SC
07
217 / 436
EQ.
CONTR.
155Mbit/s
155Mbit/s
This unit physically connects the signals of 10 tributaries max. (38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus each) to the
STM4/STM16 main WEST/EAST aggregates.
An additional Connection Card must be provided to perform all the connections. This one is not the Spare
of the former. In order to perform the connections towards the Aggregates, both Connection Card Units
are required.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This unit allows the use of the 140/STM1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY and STM1 optical Tributary only.
The STM1 signal is managed at VC4 level. If the STM1 signals contain VC12 and VC3 levels they will
not be processed but only transferred.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
218 / 436

3.2.9 Connection Card unit
3.2.10 Matrix unit: Full Matrix Unit & 16x16 Matrix Units


The following description is suitable for both units named in the title. The new 16x16 Matrix Unit is an
hardware upgrade for the present Full Matrix Unit. For the future release this unit is already preset to
support the new standard ITUT management functions (J1/J2, TIM, POM, SNCP/N). In current release
these new features are not performed, therefore the 16x16 Full Matrix Unit and the Full Matrix Unit carry
out the same functions.
Unit streams VC4, VC3, VC12, corresponding to sixteen STM1 bidirectional signals, are provided with
an AU4 payload to be crossconnected.
The AU4 interfaces are:
10 for the tributaries, i.e.: max. 8 regular + max. 2 spare
16 for the aggregates, i.e.: 8 regular (4 for EAST1, 4 for WEST1) and 8 spare (4 for EAST2, 4
for WEST2). When STM16 Aggregate is used and no VC12/VC3 SNCP rings are present the
connections can be distributed any where, and not only 4 East + 4 West.
When STM16 Aggregate is used and the Enhanced Connectivity is activated (cfr. Line Shelf
Connection Configuration Operators Manual) and even if VC12/VC3 SNCP rings are
present, the connections can be distributed any where, and not only 4 East + 4 West.
(See para. 3.1.3.1 STM16 Aggregate differences (1661 SMC) on page 107).
Each AU4 signal is connected over a 38.88 Mbit/s 4row bus.

The following connections are established between:
Aggregates and Tributaries (DROP/INSERT)
Aggregates and Aggregates (both passthrough between the two sides and Cross Connection
of a VC/AU inside the same side Aggregate)
Tributaries and Tributaries (CROSS CONNECTION)
The description has been split into:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
crossconnection
Card Controller and ASIC Controller
Power Supply and Remote Inventory
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
219 / 436
Specifically:
The operations required to crossconnect the various units depend on the type of interfacing
unit and on the type of crossconnection to establish.
The following structures can be distinguished:
a)
Connection with aggregates or STM1 synchronous tributaries containing the VC12

and/or VC3 to process. These streams can be terminated towards the plesiochronous
tributaries or rerouted with other STM1s trib. or aggregates.
The VC12 and VC3 of the STM1 electrical trib. can also be processed. When using the
optical STM1 trib., the relevant mapping/demapping functions are disabled and performed
on the full matrix.
b)
Connection with aggregates or STM1 synchronous tributaries for which VC4 demapping
has not been requested.
In this case the VC4 can be fully rerouted or, if containing C4, can be terminated onto the
140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary.
c)
Connection with 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.
The various structures need various functional blocks.

To crossconnect it might be necessary to connect together different structures (e.g., typea
aggregate signals to connect to typec synchronous tributaries), hence both are used.
The following Rx streams are indicated for all the cited structures, see Figure 89. on page 225:
sixteen STM1 signals from the Rx side of the EAST 1/2, WEST 1/2 Aggregates (MSP circuit)
ten STM1 signals from the Tx side of the 10 plesiochronous or synchronous tributaries,
(HWP, Rx side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The purpose of the MSP is to select, for each EAST/WEST sides, the Aggregate regular operating streams
instead of the spare ones (eight STM1 streams leaving MSP vs. the 16 incoming ones).
The HWP circuit must select the 8 regular streams from the 10 streams received from the tributaries.
The resulting sixteen STM1 signals are individually handled by the circuitry down stream.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
220 / 436

Cross Connection
The above structures are now defined as follows:

Structure a)
The following circuits are used if the received signals have to be structured:
PI (SA) Pointer Interpreter of Section Adaptation. Identifies the AU4 pointer in order to
locate the start of VC4

Terminates the POHs of VC4 by carrying out the proper operations (see Figure 83. on
page 202).
Bytes F2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are sent towards the AUX unit via the OHBUS dedicated stream
(Futurebus interface)
HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation)

Processes the TU pointers of VC12 and VC3 to generate the TU pointers from position
0 of VC4 (as if AUOH pointed at 0).
LPOM (Lower order Path Overhead Monitoring)

One of the POHs of VC12 and VC3 are checked to count and control the BIP of POH
(B3 for the POH of VC3, or BIP2 for the POH of VC12).

This circuit space/time switches the TU12s and TU3s (max. of 1008 TU12) and chooses
the structure (a, b or c) towards which the signals will be sent.
The following circuits are implemented to transmit towards the STM1 signals (aggregates or
synchronous tributaries):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Inserts the POH of VC4 to fill up the Higher Order Virtual Container (see Figure 83. on
page 202).
Bytes F2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are received from the AUX unit via the OHBUS dedicated stream
(Futurebus Interface)
PG (SA) Pointer Generator of Section Adaptation.

It generates the new pointer AUOH for the VC4 (AU4 structure of Figure 88. on page 222).
It is set at 0.
Structure b)
PI (SA) Pointer Interpreter of Section Adaptation.

Identifies the AU4 pointer to locate the beginning of VC4.
HPOM (Higher order Path Overhead Monitoring)

Monitors the POH of VC4 by checking bytes J1, B3, C2, G1 only (see Figure 83. on page
202).
HPC (Higher order Path Connection)

This circuit switches the AU4 structure by selecting the structure towards which the signals
will be sent.
The following circuits are implemented to transmit towards the STM1 signals (aggregates
or synchronous tributaries):
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
221 / 436
HUG (Higher order Unequipped Generator)

This circuit is active only when the VC4 are not equipped, by setting default configurations
for the AUOH pointer and payload of VC4 (the structure is AU4, see Figure 88. on page
222).
AUOH
Figure 88. AU4 structure
Structure c)
In this case the information received from the tributaries is directly sent to the
crossconnection circuit.
Two possibilities can be distinguished:
For the 2 and 34 Mbit/s Tributaries: the relevant TU12 and TU3 are sent to the LPC with
complete crossconnection like that of structure a).
For the 140 Mbit/s Tributaries: the relevant AU4 are sent to the HPC with signals
crossconnected like that of structure b).
The signals exiting the crossconnection will be directly routed towards the interface circuits
to be transmitted to the plesiochronous tributaries.
The interface circuits utilize the signals of structure a), b), c). Therefore:
Sixteen STM1s can be connected to the Tx side of the EAST/WEST Aggregates towards
the regular and spare (1, 2) paths of both sides.
Eight STM1s can be connected to the Rx side of 10 Tributaries (max.)

This function enables the use of the Rx side of the HWP circuit to transmit eight STM1s
towards 10 possible tributaries (8 regular + 2 spare).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The unit is timed by two 38.88 MHz clocks (CKA, CKB) and relevant synch. signals SYNCA,
SYNCB received from the two CRU units.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources depends on the state of the two CRUs.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
222 / 436

Card Controller and ASIC Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following functions:

Information on setting options, criteria, reset, alarms, etc., is exchanged with the ESCT
Equipment Controller unit through the LIECB and NIECB connections.
Unit Configuration storing
Through signals ID 04 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the
subrack.
Dialog with ASIC Controller
This function allows the Equipment Controller to dialog with the ASIC Controller.
Led and switch commands
The signals exchanged with the ASIC Controller light up the red LED (1) to indicate local unit
alarms, and activate the switching command OSW to be sent to the other units.
OSW is also operated by ISWM received from other Matrixes for the Matrix EPS. This function
is described in para. 3.1.5.3 EPS for Full Matrix and CRU on page 128.
The ASIC Controller carries out the following operations:
Dialog with the Card Controller
Through this dialog the ASIC controller executes the operations required by the Equipment
Controller.
Internal/External Alarm Detection
Performance Monitoring
Command and reading of Software Settings
Generation of SNCP switch commands and AIS
Commands generated internally for alarms detection
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing
signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection
criteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRUs, namely:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ISWCA : internal alarm received from the CRU A;

ISWCB : internal alarm received from the CRU B;
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
223 / 436
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC4.
Data structure recurs with a 64 STM 1 frame periodicity.
Not operative in this release
MSP and HWP Protection
The PROT signal are generated to protect the Aggregate or tributaries streams when receiving
ISW from the Aggregate or Trib..

The power supply voltages present at the input of the Full Matrix unit are:
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM ( serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data
(codes, series, date of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller
unit which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly
connected to the Equipment Controller.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
224 / 436

Byte J1 interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
FROM Rx AGG. SIDE
FROM
AGG. AND
TRIBS.
FROM
Tx
110
:
TRIB.
SIDE
WEST2 :
WEST1 :
EAST2 :
/
EAST1 /
/
/
OH BUS
(AUX)
FROM CRU
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
EQ.
CONTR.
+121,1V
5,3V
+5,3V
CK
CAREM
SYWB
SYNCA
PROT
HWPRx
SELECT
AU4
MSP
SELECT
AU4
FUSES
REMOTE
INVENTORY
ISW
CKA
14
:
+12V
5V
+5V
STRUCT.B
STRUCT.A
PWALM
SYNC
CK
TRIB.
18
:
AGG.O
14
:
AGG.E
14
:
PROT
CKSEL
AIS
PPS SWITCHINGS
CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE
ALARMS
16
PI (SA)
VC4
BEGIN
CHECK
16
PI (SA)
VC4
BEGIN
CHECK
OHBUS
INTERFACE
HPOM
MONITOR
POHVC4
HPA
TU
POINTER
CRU
SELECT.
INTERNAL
UNIT
MANAGEMENT
BYTE J1
INTERFACE
MSPHWP
PROTECTIONS
ISWCB
ISWCA
FROM CRU
A
S
I
C
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
STRUCTURE C ( 140 Mbit/s)
HPT
POHVC4
EXTRACTION
STRUCTURE C (2,34 Mbit/s)
F2
Z1,Z2,Z3
CTYPE
:
03
HPC
AU4
CONNECTION
SELECTION
LPC
TU
CONNECTION
SELECTION
DIALOG
WITH
CARD
CONTROLLER
LPOM
CHECK
BIPPOH
OF VC3
VC12
A
S
I
C
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
PG (SA)
AUOH
POINTER
INSERT
UNIT
TYPE
ACKNOWLEDGE
DIALOG
WITH
ASIC
CONTROLLER
LED AND
SWITCH
COMMANDS
HPT
POHVC4
INSERT.
PHISICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED.
14
:
14
:
WEST2
PROT
OSW
14
:
EAST2
14
:
EAST1
WEST1
HWP
Tx
ISWT
TRIB.
18
:
DIALOG
WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
E14
:
W14
:
ID0
LIECB
TO ALL
UNITS
TRIB.
:
TO Rx TRIB. 110
SIDE
EQ.
CONTR.
PROT
FUTURE
BUS DRIVER

TO Tx AGG. SIDE
Figure 89. Block diagram: Full Matrix
07
225 / 436
3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit
This description is applicable to all the STM4 Aggregate units of this release.
The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependence on optical components used
The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the units front coverplate.
The units identified by DIN or SC denote type of connector used, the other units use FCPC connectors.
The units which operate in the 2nd window are indicated with 4.1, those operating in the third window with
4.2.. For the JE Aggregate some optical interface characteristics are improved.
The STM4 Aggregate unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM4 signal and the AU4
structured signals (Tx/Rx matrixconnected signals and the STM4 aggregates of the opposite side).
The Card Controller subunit belongs to the cited unit and, upon interfacing the Equipment Controller unit
executes management functions, i.e., alarms checks, configuration commands, crossconnections etc..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Transmission
Reception
OH bus
Card Controller
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
226 / 436

Transmission

When using the Connection Card the unit receives:
10 signals (DTT110) from the connection card unit. These signals concern the Tributary units,
including spares
8 signals (DTB14A and DTB14B) from the two STM4 Aggregate units of the opposite side.
These signals are the streams transiting from the opposite Rx side.
Each of the above signals are 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus structured and represent an AU4mapped signal.
The MSPHWP block selects the main or spare Trib. and Aggregate of the opposite side. Since the STM4
signal contains four AU4 structures the HPC circuit selects 4 signals from those available.
When using the Full Matrix the unit receives:
Four signal (DTT 1:4) from Matrix A and four (DTT 6:9) from Matrix B, already selected and
managed by the Full Matrix unit.
The function of MSP is to select between A or B Full Matrix.
The HPC circuit is not used (function performed in the Full Matrix).
Bytes SOH (9 rows and 36 columns) are inserted into circuits MST, RST as shown in Figure 90. on page
231.
The Multiplexing section bytes are inserted into MST, i.e.:
D4D12, K1K2, B2, S1, M1
The Regeneration section bytes are inserted into RST, i.e.:
D1D3, B1, C1
alignment bytes A1, A2.
Circuits MST, RST also contain the SOH bytes of the speech, data, service channels etc., received from
the AUX unit via the 5.2 Mbit/s bus.
The circuits that follow scramble the signal but not the first line of SOH.
At this point the signals are Parallel/Serial converted to obtain the STM4 stream. To do this two
consecutive operations are necessary:
the first obtains eight 77.76 Mbit/s streams from the sixteen 38.88 Mbit/s ones;
the second serializes them at 622.08 Mbit/s (signal D622T).
Note that the four AUG structures are byteinterleaved in the STM4 structure (see Figure 91. on page
232) with fixed phase relationship vs. the same multiple signal.
Serialization takes place through the clock extracted from the 622.08 MHz VCO. The latter is
phaselocked to the 38.88 MHz clock coming from the two Clock Reference 150/600 units
(CKA,B and relevant synchronism SYA,B).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals (CK38T),
The end operation is the electro/optical conversion achieved through the Tx Optical Module, and the
resulting signal can be accessed at connector (4) on the front cover.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) facility is also provided in compliancy with ITUT Rec. G.958
through the Card Controllers software settings and management.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
227 / 436
The unit receives the 622 Mbit/s signal from the optical line. This signal can be accessed at the front cover
connector (3).
The Rx optical module electrically converts the signal (D622R) by regenerating it and extracting the
CK622R clock.
The S/P circuit splits the four streams of the STM4. Each stream is represented by a 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire
bus (16 in all). This operation is achieved by intermediate paralleling a 77.76 Mbit/s 8wire bus.
The CK38R clock is generated through further subdivisions and sent to the two CRU units. The circuit that
follows checks alignment (byte A1, A2) and synchronism.
After Descrambling, circuits RST and MST extract the SOH bytes.
RST
D1D3, C1, B1 Byte extraction from the regeneration section (BIP8 estimate and
comparison with the received bytes)
MST
D4D12, S1, M1, K1K2, B2 Byte extraction from the regeneration section (BIP96
estimate and comparison with the received bytes)
Additionally, the SOH bytes are also extracted from both of the above circuits and sent to the AUX unit via
the 5.2 Mbit/s SOH bus.
The SA circuit synchronizes the extracted timing (CK38R) with the local clock received from the selected
CRU.
Adaptation is through justification of the AU4s pointer (pointer interpretation and generation).
Hence byte B3 is extracted from the POH of each VC4.
When using the Connection Card unit the HPC circuit crossconnects the four AU4s towards the
tributaries and/or towards the Aggregates on the opposite side.
The MSPHWP block selects the tributaries (DRT 110) or aggregate main/spare on the opposite side
(8 transit signals DRBA14 and DRBB14) toward swich information will be sent. Each AU4 is a 38.88
Mbit/s 4row bus structured signals.
When Full Matrix is used the DRT 1:4 and DRT 6:9 connect the signals AU4 towards matrix A and B.
MSP and HPC functions are performed in the Full Matrix.
OH bus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A 4.86 MHz OHBUS stream is generated to achieve bidirectional APS between aggregates and
tributaries. The STM4 Aggregate unit transmits/receives the K1, K2 and S bytes over such stream.
S is a serial stream containing the LOS, LOF, EXBER, MSAIS, MSFERF alarms. tributaries. The
OHBUS is interfaced by the Future Bus Driver.
Bidirectional switching is not operative in this release.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
228 / 436

Reception
Card Controller

The Card Controller subunit carries out the following operations:

Information on setting options, criteria, loop, reset, switching is exchanged with the Equipment
Controller unit through the LIECB and NIECB connection.
Alarms, Configuration, Performance Internal dialog

This dialog permits to transmit/receive the E2PROM stored unit software settings. Alarms and
performance are received from the unit.
The alarms indicating local unit failure activate the red LED (1) (LEDN command). Signals
COSW, added to EXT ALM (sum of external alarms LOS, LOF, MSAIS, MSFERF, EXBER),
generate the OSW switching command.
LED (2) ON denotes that the unit is inservice (command WK CH).
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing
signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection
criteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRUs, namely:
Loop Management
Enables two loop commands on the unit:
L622, line side loop
The STM4 Rx signal (D622R) and relevant clock (CK622R) can be

simultaneously transmitted towards the line and AU4 Rx side.
L77, station side loop
The 77 Mbit/s Tx data (inside the P/S Converter) can be simultaneously

sent back over the Rx side towards the AU4 side and the Tx line side.
DCC Management
Locally interfaces the 192 Kbit/s channels (D1D3) and 576 Kbit/s channels (D4D12) of the
SOHs TMN stream.

Through the CTYPE 03 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is
mounted.
Optical Protection Management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This facility enables the ALS performance as specified by ITUT Rec.G.958, i.e., shuts down
Laser when no optical signal is received.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
229 / 436
manual, Laser ON for 2 secs. every time pushbutton (5) is pressed.

automatic, Laser ON for 2 secs. every 180 secs.
manual for test: Laser ON for 9 secs. every time pushbutton (5) is pressed for more than
12 seconds.
Protection Management
The Protection function is enabled through the ISW commands which cause switching between
regular and spare units.
The ISW commands are received from:
1)
the other Aggregate on the same side (to know the alarm conditions, not operative in this
release)
2)
the two full matrixes (to select the one to use)
3)
the trib. (to select the one to use).

The protection signals (PROT) are generated.
This function is used for APS Tributary protection utilizing the ISW command received from the
aggregates of the same side
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The APS is described in para 3.1.5.4
Simplified Linear APS on page 130.
Through signals ID 04 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the
subrack.
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The voltages are protected through fuses.
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes,
series, date of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller
unit which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly
connected to the Equipment Controller.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
230 / 436

Laser can be reset through the following commands:
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1
K2
D4
D6
D5
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
MSOH
9 Bytes

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 C1 C1 C1 C1
RSOH
36 Bytes
S1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 E2
LEGENDA
A1A2
Alignment word A1=11110110, A2=00101000. Utilizes all slots of the four STM1
C1
Indicates the STM1 stream inside STM4.
B1
BIP8 calculation result on the previous frame (after scrambling). Utilized to assess error
rate between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
E1
EOW operations between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
F1
Available for the user (data from AUX unit). Uses slot of 1st STM1.
D1D3
192 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
B2
Result of BIP4x24 calculation on previous frame exempt of three RSOH rows. Used to
assess error rate between multiplexers. Uses all slots.
K1,K2
For MS Trail Linear Protection indications and MSRDI (FERF), AIS alarms. Uses slot of
1st STM1
D4D12
576 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM1
S1
Indicates synchronism status. Uses slot of 1st STM1. Bits 1:4 set Transmission direction.
Z1,Z2
Spare bytes for function not yet defined. Uses all slots.
E2
For EOW operations between multiplexers. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
M1
Indicates section MSREI (FEBE) STM4. Uses slot of 3rd STM1.
For national use
Bytes not specified for future international use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Media Dependent byte (only two accessible). Not operative

Bytes not scrambled (like the whole first row)

Figure 90. SOH structure of STM4
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
231 / 436
261
261
1...9
261
1...9
261
1...9
AUG4
AUG4
AUG4
AUG4
SOH
123412341234.............
12341234.............
SOH
4x9
4 x 261
STM4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 91. STM4 structure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
232 / 436

1
1...9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
DTT10
DTT1
EQ. CONTR.
POWER
SUPPLY
EQ. CONTR.
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
4
/
ELECTRONIC
FUSE
+12
CK38
FUTURE
BUS
DRIVER
SA
POINTERS
AU4
D4D12
:
K1 K2
B2
S1,M1
5V
+5V
+12V
SYNC
CK 38T
5
PULS
MS AIS
LEDN
D
E
S
C
R
A
M
B
L
E
R
/
LOF
A
L
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
CRU
CRU
SELECTION
DCC
MGMT
LOOP
MGMT
DIALOG WITH
CARD CONTROLLER
DIALOG
FOR ALARMS
CONFIGURATION
PERFORMANCE
:
D4D12
:
D1D3
L77 L622
EQ. CONTR.
CTYPE 0 : 3
EXTALM
P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
O
N
M
G
M
T
>
=1
LOS
PROT
AGGR.
FULL MATRIX/TRIB
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
ALS
RX
OPTICAL
MODULE
L622
STM4
STM4
UNITS
OSW TO ALL
TEMP
LD
TX
OPTICAL
MODULE
LF
CK 622R
D622R
UNIT
TYPE
ACKNOWLED
CK38R
4
DEMUX
/
SERIES/
4 PARALLEL
/
4 CONVERSION
/
L77
MUX
PARALLE/
SERIES
CONVERSION
CONFIGURATIONS
ALARMS
PERFORMANCE
WKCH 2
OPTICAL
PROTECT.
MGMT
ALS
S
C
R
A
M
B
L
E
R
:
STM14
/4
RST
/4
RSOH
4
EXTRACTION
/
4
/
D1D3
:
B1,C1,
A1,A2
RST
RSOH
INSERTION
MST
MSOH
4 EXTRACTION
K1,K2,S
MST
MSOH
INSERTION
OHBUS
INTERFACE
PWALM
SY B
SY A
CK B
CK A
B3
B3 OF
POHVC4
DROP
SOH
INTERFACE
HPC
SELECT. OF
4 AU4
HPC
AU4
CROSS
CONN.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
5.5V
+5.3V
+12.1V
CAREM
PROT
MSP/
HWP
PROT
MSP/
HWP
LIECB
NIECB
* = FROM TRIB (WITH CONNECTION CARD) or FROM

TRIB + AGG. OPPOSITE SIDE (WITH FULL MATRIX)
OH BUS
DTBB14
:
DTBA14
:
DTT10
DTT1
5.2 Mbit/s
DTBB14
:
DTBA14
:
CRU
TO/FROM
ALL
UNITS
FROM
AGG. OF
OPPOSITE
SIDE
(WHEN
CONNECTION
CARD SI
USED)
AUX
FROM
AGG. OF
OPPOSITE
SIDE
(WHEN
CONNECTION
CARD SI
USED)

ISW
ID 0 : 4
ISWCB
ISWCA
Figure 92. Block diagram: STM4 Aggregate
07
233 / 436
3.2.12 STM16 Aggregate unit
The description is applicable to all the STM16 Aggregate units of this release.
The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the units front coverplate. The units which
operate in the second window are indicated with 16.1, those operating in the third window with 16.2.
The units identified by DIN or SC denote type of connector used, the other units use FCPC connectors.
Some Units are marked by the ID or ENH abbreviation or named Enhanced. These items are preset
in order to supply additional ITUT management functions for the future Releases of the 1661SMC
Equipment. In current release these new functions are not operative and all the Aggregates have the same
performances.
The same units cannot work with previous kind of Aggregate placed on the other side of the optical span.
Previous kind of Aggregate (with different optical interface) are no more supplied in this release but can
have been upgraded from previous release.
The units identified by JE (Joint Engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the
dispersion values (see para.4 on page 279). In some cases also the sensitivity value is indicated.
The STM16 Aggregates with 192.3 to 195.7 indication, are used when interfaced with 1686 WDM
equipment.
These sixteen units are independently characterized by different wavelength.
The 1686 WDM equipment must receive up to sixteen different wavelength signals from sixteen different
STM16 Aggregates.
The New Aggregate units contain new generation gatearrays which permit evolution towards new
network features.
The STM16 Aggregate unit bidirectionally interfaces the STM16 signal and the AU4 structured signals:
the Tx/Rx matrixconnected signals multiplexed in a proprietary frame and the STM16 aggregate of the
opposite side are coaxially connected on the front coverplate.
Each unit is made up of:
STM16 Aggregate unit (Main Board)
Expansion subunit
DC/DC converter subunit
O/E converter subunit
E/O converter subunit
Card Controller subunit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Main Board performs the RST, MST, SA, HPC functions.
The Expansion performs an additional HPC function (four x AU4 for tributary subsystem).
The DC/DC converter is used to obtain a 15+V power supply for the O/E and E/O subunits.
The O/E and E/O subunits perform the optical/electrical line conversion and viceversa.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
234 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The Card Controller subunit executes management functions (alarms check, configuration commands,
etc.) when interfacing the Equipment Controller unit.
Transmission
Reception
Card Controller
Power Supply, Remote inventory
Tx and Rx sections describe the functions of the unit and subunits making up the STM16 Aggregate.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
235 / 436
Transmission
4 x 622 Mbit/s signals (direct cabling) from the opposite side Aggregate (passthrough).
10 signals via Matrix units on the Expansion Tx circuit and on the Expansion subunit, always
mounted on the unit.
Each Matrix signal is 38.88 Mbit/s 4wire bus structured and represent an AU4mapped signal.
When using the Connection Card, the 10 signals are connected with tributaries and access the
HWP and HPC circuits.
The HWP block selects the main or spare trib. signals.
The HPC block selects 4 trib. signals from the ones available.
The use of the Full Matrix excludes the HWP and HPC blocks. The same functions are
performed in the Full Matrix connecting each of the 4 Expansion signals. These signals can
contain tributary information or VC12/VC3 passthrough information.
Each Expansion block transmits four AU4 signals to the HPC 24 x 16.
The following is carried out on the four 622 Mb/s coming from the Aggregate of the opposite side:
622 MHz Clock extraction
Demultiplexing, to obtain the 16 STM1
Alignment check on STM16 frame (A1, A2 bytes)
Descrambler
Section Adaptation, to synchronize the extracted clock to the local clock received from the CRU.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In this way further sixteen AU4 are presented to the HPC 24 x 16.
Sixteen AU4 are selected from the HPC block to pass to:
ED
MST: insertion of the Multiplexing SOH byte
RST: insertion of the Regeneration SOH byte

The SOH byte are indicated in Figure 93. on page 240 The SOH byte received from the AUX unit
are interfaced with the OH BUS at 5.2 Mb/s through the FUTURE BUS DRIVER.
Scrambler (except the first SOH line)
Multiplexer: the 2488Mbit/s stream is obtained through parallel/serial conversion. To multiplex,

the 16 signals are byte interleaved in the STM16 (see Figure 94. on page 241).
The CK 2488 MHz clock is obtained through a VCO synchronized to the CK 38T received from
CRU.
Electro/optical conversion, achieved through a subunit always mounted on the Aggregate,

permits to access the resulting signal at the connector(4) on the front converplate.
The E/O Converter is power supplied at +15V, derived from a DC/DC converter subunit
mounted on the Aggregate.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) facility provided through the Card Controller software
setting and management complies with ITUT Rec G.958.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
236 / 436

The unit receives:

Reception
The unit receives the 2488 Mbit/s Signal from the optical line. This signal can be accessed at the front
coverplate connector (3).
The Optical/Electrical subunit converts the signal (D 2488 R) by regenerating it and extracting the
CK 2488 R clock.
The Serial/Parallel circuit demultiplexes the 16 streams of the STM16.
The CK 38 R clock is generated through subdivision and sent to the CRU units.
The circuits that follow are:
Alignment check (A1, A2 bytes)
Descrambler
RST: extraction of the regeneration SOH bytes
MST: extraction of the multiplexer SOH bytes.

The use of the terminated SOH byte is indicated in Figure 93. on page 240. The auxiliary SOH
byte terminated on the AUX units, are transmitted on an SOH BUS at 5.2 Mb/s through a
FUTURE BUS DRIVER.
Section Adaptation to synchronize the extracted timing CK 38 R to the local clock received from
the CRU selected.
Adaptation is through AU4 pointer justification (pointer interpretation and generation).
At this point the AU4s follow different directions, towards the Aggregate opposite side (AU4
PassThrough and the Matrix (for tributaries and VC12/VC3 passthrough).
The following are the circuits towards the opposite side aggregate:
Alignment (A1, A2 bytes insertion)
Scrambler
Multiplexing the 16 streams in four 622 Mb/s.
The 4 x 622 Mb/s are coaxially connected to the opposite side aggregate via the front coverplate.
Towards the Matrix, the HPC 16 x 16 block selects four AU4 max signals to send to the expansion block
circuit and 4 AU4 max. signals to send to the expansion subunit.
On the Expansion, the HWP + HPC chooses the tributaries (10) to which the AU4s will be transmitted via
the Matrices.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This operation is performed on the same Full Matrix unit, therefore the HWP + HPC block is not used.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
237 / 436
Card Controller

Information on setting options, criteria, loop, reset, switching is exchanged with the Equipment
Controller unit through the LIECB and NIEBC connection.
Alarms, Configuration, Performance, Internal dialog

This dialog permits to transmit/receive the E2PROM stored unit software settings. Alarms and
performance are received from the unit.
The alarms indicating local unit failure activates the red LED (1) (LEDN command). Signals
COSW, added to EXT ALM (sum of external alarms LOS, LOF, MSAIS, MSFERF, EXBER),
generate the OSW switching command.
LED (2) ON denotes operating unit (command WK CH).
CRU selection
DCC Management
Allows to locally interface the 192 Kbit/s channels (D1D3) and 576 Kbit/s channels (D4D12)
of the SOHs TMN stream.
Through the CTYPE 03 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is
mounted.
Optical Protection Management

This facility enables the ALS performance as specified by ITUT Rec. G.958, i.e., shuts down
Laser when no optical signal is received.
Laser can be reset through the following commands:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
manual, Laser ON for.2 secs. every time pushbutton (5) is pressed.
automatic, Laser ON for 2 secs. every 180 secs.
manual for test: Laser ON for 9 secs. every time pushbutton (5)is pressed for more than
12 seconds.
Protection Management
The Protection function is enabled through the ISW commands which cause switching between
regular and spare units.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
238 / 436

The Card Controller subunit carries out the following operations:

The ISW commands are received from:

1)
the other Aggregate on the same side (to know the alarm conditions, not operative in this
release).
2)
the two full matrixes (to select the one to use)
3)
the trib. (to select the one to use).

Protection signals (PROT) are generated.
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The voltages are protected through fuses.
As before indicated, a DC/DC converter subunit obtains a +15V to power the E/O and O/E subunits.
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
239 / 436
A1
A2
A2
A2
C1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
B2
B2
B2
D4
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z2
Z2
Z2 M1 Z2
Z2
Z2
C1
RSOH
A1
B1
MSOH
9 Bytes
A1
E2
Z2
LEGENDA
A1A2
Alignment word A1=11110110, A2=00101000. Utilizes all slots of the 16 STM1
C1
Identifies the STM1 stream inside the STMn.
B1
BIP8 calculation result on the previous frame (after scrambling).Utilized to assess error
rate between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
E1
EOW operations between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
F1
Available for the user (data from AUX unit). Uses slot of 1st STM1.
D1D3
192 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
B2
Result of BIP16x24 calculation on previous frame except for three RSOH rows. Used to
assess error rate between multiplexers. Uses all slots.
K1,K2
alarms.
For MS Linear Trail Protection indications (not operative) and MSRDI (FERF), AIS
Uses slot of 1st STM1
D4D12
576 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM1
S1
Indicates synchronism status. Uses slot of 1st STM1. Bits 1:4 set Transmission direction.
Z1,Z2
Spare bytes for function not yet defined. Uses all slots.
E2
For EOW operations between multiplexers. Uses slot of 1st STM1.
M1
Indicates section MSREI (FEBE) STM4. Uses slot of 3rd STM1.
For national use
Bytes not specified for future international use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Media Dependent byte (only two accessible). Used to perform the Bidirectional Working
on Single Fibre.
Bytes not scrambled (like the whole first row)

Figure 93. SOH structure of STM16
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
240 / 436

144 BYTES

261
1...9
261
1...9
261
1...9
261
1...9
16
AUG4
AUG4
AUG4
AUG4
SOH
123456789101111213141516. 12345...........
123....16, 123.... 16.
SOH
16 x 9
16 x 261
STM16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 94. STM16 structure
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
241 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
EQ. CONTR.
EQ. CONTR.
POWER
SUPPLY
CRU
TO AGG.
OPPOSITE
SIDE
TO/FROM
TRIB.
(VIA
MATRIX)
FROM AGG.
OPPOSITE
SIDE
4x622
Mbit/s
10
10
10
10
4x622
Mbit/s
CK A
REMOTE
INVENTORY
+5V
S
C
R
A
M
B
L
E
R
A
L
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
+12V
+5V
SYNC
DC/DC
CONVERTER
SUBUNIT
HPC
16x16
AU4
4 x AU4
4 x AU4
DESCRAMBLER
CK 38T
4 x AU4
4 x AU4
ALIGN.
CK
ELECTRONIC
FUSE
CAREM
+12,1V
5,5V
+5,3V
CK38
SY B
SY A
CK B
MUX
EXPANSION
Tx
HWP+HPC
PROT
Rx
HWP+HPC
EXPANSION
SUBUNIT
Tx
HWP+HPC
EXPANSION
Tx
HWP+HPC
DEMUX
CK
EXTR
+12V
SA
POINTER
AU4
SA
POINTER
AU4
PULS
LEDN
A
L
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
CRU
CRU
SELECTION
2488T
LF
DIALOG WITH
LIECB
NIECB
ALS
M
G
M
T
PROT
STM16
AUX
5,2Mbit/s
STM16
UNITS
OSW TO ALL
AGGR.
FULL MATRIX/TRIB
PHYSICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
O
N
>
=1
SUBUNIT
E/O
Tx
CONVERSION
UNIT
TYPE
ACKNOWLED
ID 0 : 4
ISWCB
ISWCA
Figure 95. Block diagram : STM16 Aggregate
07
242 / 436

EQ. CONTR.
LD
OHBUS
+15V
:
D4D12
:
D1D3
CTYPE 0 : 3
DCC
MGMT
TEMP
SUBUNIT
E/O
Tx
CONVERSION
EXTALM
CK2488R
D2488R
FUTURE BUS
DRIVER
MUX
PARALLE/
SERIAL
CONVERSION
DEMUX
PARALLE/
SERIAL
CONVERSION
CARD CONTROLLER
DIALOG
FOR ALARMS
CONFIGURATION
PERFORMANCE
VCO
2488
MHz
CK2488
CONFIGURATIONS
ALARMS
PERFORMANCE
STM14
WKCH 2
OPTICAL
PROTECT.
MGMT
ALS
RSOH
RST
RSOH
INSERTION
RST
RSOH
EXTRACTION
RSOH
MSOH
MST
MSOH
INSERTION
MST
MSOH
EXTRACTION
MSOH
HPC
24x16
AU4
S
C
R
A
M
B
L
E
R
CK38T
ISW
3.2.13 AUX/EOW Unit


This description is applicable to all the different Auxiliary unit.
The Auxiliary units process all the overhead streams of the 1st STM1 frame of stream STM4/STM16 not
terminated onto the gatearray of the aggregate and tributary units. It is also possible to select both the
aggregates spare to convey to the vocal terminations the dedicated byte (E1).
The streams involved are:
aggregate SOH (side WEST and side EAST)

Tributary SOH
POH of VC3 (not operative)
POH of VC4
Byte transit and termination operations are performed on the above streams.
The streams and bytes being managed depend on the software program (see Operators Manual).
To utilize the terminated bytes the unit makes available:
6 data channels: 3 with 64 Kbit/s codirectional G.703 Interface and 3 with ITUT Rec.
V11 interface (RS422 A)
1 orderwire for selective call, local operators telephone set and hybrid circuit
1 analog EOW extension (for the SL/SM AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit only) to set up external
telephone connections.
Speech connection differentiates the units:
The AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit realizes the analog speech bypass between the two aggregate
sides, and establishes a connection with an external telephone set.
The external connection is realized through the Voice channel connector on the front cover of the
Auxiliary Access Module (see Figure 22. on page 66 ).
The SL/SM AUX/EOW unit allows digital speech bybass and can be used on wide networks.
ORDER WIRE CHANNEL

A user can establish three types of connections:
call another ADM

call a Line Terminal
setting up a conference call (omnibus)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When establishing a call the two users must take account of:
ED
the green LED (7) : indicating free line

the yellow LED (6) : glowing indicates busy line; flashing indicates incoming selective call
the yellow LED (5) : indicating incoming conference call
key J (4) : line seizure
Key R (3) : line reset
Socket (2) for telephone handset connection
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
243 / 436
The connection between two subscribers is established through dialling i.e., the calling party dials the
number identifying the called subscriber.
The identification number consists of two digits within 10 and 99 and is DTMF encoded.
The called subscriber identifies the incoming call through the lighting up (flashing) of the relevant LED and
the activation of the buzzer. The call starts when the called party lifts the handset. This operation will inhibit
the buzzer.
The conversation in progress is private, i.e., upon lifting the telephone handset, all the other connected
subscribers receive the busy tone. A third subscriber can cut in by pressing key J (4).
Subscriber presence is indicated through an inclusion tone.
Moreover any subscriber can set up a conferencecall by dialling the number 00. In this case all the
connected subscribers can hear the conversation and can intervene by keeping key J (4) pressed.
The back call tonality is not received.
If You want to silence the buzzer of people who are not interested on the conference call and have not
answered, You have to select number 0.
The call terminates when the calling or called party hangs up the telephone handset thus releasing the
line. Should the line continue to be engaged because the telephone handsets of both subscribers have
not been positioned correctly, the subscriber will send the RESET (R) command (3) to release it.
When calling a Terminal Line from an ADM , the two users must take account of these two differences :
key * on the telephone keyboard: line seizure
key # on the telephone keyboard: line reset
the omnibus call is not supported
a third Terminal line can not intervene into a private conversation
N.B.
Be careful that if You push the # key on the telephone keyboard , You will reset the line even
if You are calling another ADM .
For details on the behavior of the Line Terminal refer to the proper Manual.
The Hybrid circuit section connects the selective call circuits and the local operators set to the COMBO
to encode the speech channel.
At this point the signals are exchanged between the AUX and MATASSA gate arrays.
Data Channels
The 64 Kbit/s and V11 data channels transit through the Interface circuits to be then sequentially
connected to the AUX and MATASSA Gate Arrays.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Gate Array AUX

The AUX gate array multiplexes and demultiplexes the local overheads to/from the MATASSA gate array
(multiplexing/demultiplexing circuits) and arranges them in the required order.
If properly programmed it can transmit the 64Kbit/s bytes in a codirectional or contradirectional mode
through the G703, V11 and COMBO interfaces.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
244 / 436

Before starting a call the user checks the state of the line, inserts the telephone handset into socket (2).
Presses key J (4) to seize the line and dials the subscriber number.

Gate Array MATASSA

The MATASSA gate array interfaces the SL/SM AUX/EOW unit with the aggregates, matrices and
tributaries.
The gate array processes the 5.2Mbit/s frames connected with aggregate A and B and the frame of the
4.86Mbit/s overhead bus (OHB) connected with the tributary and matrix unit.
Therefore the gate array can be considered as a component which branches signals over four bidirectional
ports:
Aggregate A
Aggregate B
OH BUS (tributaries and matrices)
Local (data and voice accesses)
This function is performed through matrices.

Since all the incoming signals have to be synchronized before being processed through the local clock,
a 5.184MHz PLL must be utilized to synchronize the local clock to the incoming 38.88MHz clock.
Moreover the Gate array MATASSA interfaces, as master, the AUX gate array with its synchronism and
clock.
Bytes A1 and A2, B1, B2 and the AU pointer are not handled by the unit (see Figure 6.53 on page 146,
and Figure 6.59 on page 188).
All crossconnected bytes can be addressed, starting from any incoming frame, towards any outgoing
one.
Selection is referred in the Operators Handbook.
Futurebus driver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Futurebus driver is an electrical interface which increases the rate and integrity of the data processed
by the gate array MATASSA with OH BUS.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
245 / 436
Card Controller
CRU selection
Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through the
LIECB and NIECB connections.
Internal dialog for Alarms, Configuration and Performance
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive the unit SW settings stored through the EEPROM, define
all the OH bytes and define the matrices for POH and SOH bytes routing (to this purpose the interface
processes the switching signals ISW received from the units). Alarm and performance criteria are
received from the local unit.
The local unit alarms light up red LED (1).
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The contents of the Remote Inventory is fully described in para 4.1 on page 279.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
246 / 436

The Card Controller subunit carries out the following functions:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
POWER
SUPPLY
EQ. CONTR.
Module
Access
Module
Access
5.5V
+5.3V
+12V
CAREM
BUZZER
V11RN/P3
V11RN/P2
V11RN/P1
D64RN/P3
D64RN/P2
D64RN/P1
V11TM/P3
V11TN/P2
V11TN/P1
D64TN/P3
D64TN/P2
D64TN/P1
SZ
ELECTRONIC
FUSE
SELECTIVE
CALL
LOCAL
OP. SET
V11
Tx
INTERFACE
V11
Tx
INTERFACE
PARTY
LINE
LINE
STATUS
CHECK
COMBO
+5V
5V
PW ALM.
G.703
Tx
INTERFACE
G.703
Tx
INTERFACE
DEMUX
OH
GATE
ARRAY AUX
MUX
OH
SY38
CHFAIL
PWALM
CONFIG.
CTYPE 0 : 3
UNIT TYPE
ACKNOW
CRU
SELECTION
ISW 1E
SYNC
ISWCB
ISWCA
SYNCB
SYNCA
CKB
CKA
OHBUS
ISW 2W
ISW 2E
ISW 2E
CK
ANALOG EOW
EXTENSION
REMOTE
INVENTORY
DCKS 5.2R2W
DCKS 5.2R1W
DCKS 5.2R2E
DCKS 5.2R1E
FUTUREBUS
DRIVER
DCKS 5.2T2W
DCKS 5.2T1W
DCKS 5.2T2E
PHYSICAL
POSITION ACKNOW
PLL
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER

ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
GATE ARRAY MATASSA
MATRIX
POH/SOH
CK38
TIME
GENERATION
POH/SOH
BYTE
MATRIX
DCKS 5.2T1E
IECB
CRU
ID 0 : 4
FROM
AGGREGATES
Access Module
EQ. CONTR.
FROM/TO
UNIT

Figure 96. Block diagram: SL/SM AUX/EOW
07
247 / 436
3.2.14 Clock Reference Unit
The clock reference unit (CRU) is supplied in the Enhanced versions, distinguished by the compliance
with ITUT Rec.G81s. and by different holdover stability.
In this release the following Clock Reference units are available:
Enhanced CRU
Enhanced CRU 0,37 ppm.
The first have a stability in Hold over mode of 1 ppm / day and and the second of 0,37 ppm / day.
The CRU delivers synch. signals to all units of the equipment (T0). and to the external source to
synchronize other equipment (T4).
For this purpose the CRU unit is able to:
select the reference involved
change the reference (or mode) when loosing synchronism locking another reference available
or the local oscillator.
operate in a HoldOver/Free Running mode.
A max. of 16 references are available at the input:
ten references received from the 21x2Mbit/s Units (2.048MHz) as T2, or STM1 Tributary Units
as T1 (38.88MHz).
four references received from the 38.88MHz Aggregate units (T1)
two 2.048 MHz external synchronism references received from connector M150 (T3).
Operation
The 16 input references are named:
RCKT15 A and B received from the 10 tributary units
RCK381, 2 E RCK381,2 W received from the four aggregate units
CKIN A,B received from the external source
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A 16.364MHz CK16R clock can be received from a Local Oscillator mounted on the card or from one of
the VCOs utilized in the PLLs (SETG). Loss of clock generates the CK16ALL alarm.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
248 / 436


All the references received from the aggregate and tributary units are associated to:
a signal indicating integrity
a reference command or mode switch (ISWi)
Afterwards the duplicated signals are sent to the inputs of two different selection circuits (SELA, SELB).
This condition creates two independent paths:
the 2MHz path towards the outside of the equipment (T4)
the 38MHz path to send to all the units of the equipment (T0)
Different references and/or operating modes can be selected for each path.
The Equipment Controller configures the CRU to use twelve of the input signals, arranged in any
combination, as synch. signals, i.e., up to six for the internal reference (38.88 MHz), and up to six for the
external reference (2.048 MHz).
The selected reference (REF) is processed by SETG and digitally compared with the 38.88 and 2048 MHz
clocks (generated by the relative VCOs).
The LOS and DRIFT 16 alarm roots are detected on those reference signals configured by E.C.
Synch. reference selection is principally based on quality (byte S1) and also on the priorities assigned
through the CT.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Having to select among signals with the same quality level, the one with the highest priority will be
chosen. The selection algorithm relates the alarms to the inputs (LOS, LOF AIS, BER and DRIFT).
The use of the SSM is fully described in the Configuration Application of the Operators Manual.
LOCKED
the SETG output is frequencylocked to the reference

selected through the algorithm among those chosen by the
operator.
HOLD OVER/FREE RUNNING
These operating modes are enabled if the references selected

are absent. If a previous reference has been selected and has
worked for at least half an hour, the unit will work in the
holdover operating mode.
In the holdover mode this stored reference lasts for an
unlimited period of time.
The freerunning operating mode is determined by absence
of reference or the impossibility of using the Holdover
mode.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
249 / 436
Loss of the above signals generates the MFSALL and CK38ALL alarm roots.
The CKOUT synchronism clock (2048 MHz) is generated on the 2MHz path by SETG and sent to the
external source through the G703 interface.
The 2MHz clock is enabled by the SWCKMN signal received from the Equipment Controller.
SELC is preset through the CT/OS when wanting to obtain T4 for the selection of the T1 inputs, or directly
from the T0 criteria.
Squelch Criteria
Two CT/OS configured squelch functions are available at the output:
T4 = T1 can select only the SQ threshold
T4 = T0 can enable/disable the SQ, and selects a SQ threshold. Output T4 can be squelched through
CT/OS.
Card Controller
The Card Controller subunit carries out the following functions:
Internal dialog for Alarms, Configuration, Performance
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive the SW settings stored through the EEPROM; receive alarm
and performance criteria from the unit.
The LEDN (loss of +5) and SWALL (unit alarm) alarms are also generated, and their ORing with the
CK16ALL, MFS ALL and CK38ALL alarms activates the red alarm LED (1) and the OSWC switch criteria.
The OSWC criteria is then sent to all the equipment units.
References and operations are SW settable.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through the
LIEC, NIECB connections.
Unit Type acknowledgment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Through the CTYPE signal 03 the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
250 / 436

A CK38i reference clock (38.88MHz) and the S38i multiframe synchronism (2kHz) are generated on the
38 MHz path by SETG and sent to all the equipment units.

+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The PWALM alarm is generated following malfunction or failure of the 5V voltage.
of construction)
The CAREM CR Tx signal indicates the presence of the unit (ground contact) and it is directly connected
to the Clock Reference unit and the Equipment Controller.
The equipment can be provided with two Clock Reference units.
The CAREM CR Rx signal indicates if the other Clock Reference unit is present (or not).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Both units deliver the SYNCHRONISM signal and the relative INTEGRITY (or SWITCH) signal (OSWC).
CRU selection depends on the OSWC signal.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
251 / 436
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
+12,1V
5.5V
+5.3V
CAREMCR Tx
ISWi
VC12V
DET
CK16
CK16R
INT
G.703
INT
G.703
&
&
&
&
ELECTRONIC
FUSE
CKOUT
CAREMCR RX
16,384MHz
CKINB
CAREMCRRX
CKINA
RCK 38 NE/W
ISWi
RCK38 1E/W
ISWi
RCK TNA/B
ISWi
RCK T1A
ISWi
VC5V
VC5V
PWALM
LOS
DRIFT B
LOS
DRIFT A
LOS
DRIFT N
LOS
DRIFT 1
LOS
DRIFT N
LOS
DRIFT 1
SELB
REF
SELB
REF
PWALM
CONFIGURATIONS
T1 T4
ID 0 : 4
Figure 97. Block diagram: Clock Reference
07
252 / 436
LIECB NIECB
DIALOG WITH
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
PWALM
MFSALL
CK38ALL
SWALL
LEDN
CK16ALL
SEL
<
=1
INT
G703
CK OUT
OSWC
TO ALL
OTHER UNITS
EQ. CONTR.
SWCKMN
(T4)
2048KHz
TO EXT
M150
(TO)
CK38I/SY38
TO ALL UNITS
SY38i

CTYPE 0 : 3
PHYSICAL
UNIT TYPE
POSITION
ACKNOWLED
ACKNOWLED.
CARD CONTROLLER

ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS PERFORMANCE
ALARMS
T0 T4
SQUELC
SQUELC
PERFORMANCE
CK16ALL
CKOUT
CK38 ALL
RIV
CK38
SETG
PWALM MFSALL
LOS : 16
RIV
MFS
SETG
MFS ALL
POWER
SUPPLY
EQ. CONTR.
2048KHz or
38880KHz
FROM TRIBS.
ISWi
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
3.2.15 Equipment Controller SMEC

(See Figure 98. on page 259.)

The Equipment Controller SMEC must manage:
dialog with the units housed in the subrack through interface S0 relevant to alarm collection,
performance monitoring, execution and check of the software presettings.
equipment alarm interfacing through interface A and P with:
front cover LED

Remote alarms
alarm criteria towards the rack lamps
parallel contacts to/from external source
As well as interfacing for:
unit type and presence checks

protection management
ANDOR management (on Alarm interface subunit)
Power supply alarms processing
Remote Inventory
local dialog with a personal computer through interface F
dialog with the Operation System for Network Management operations through Interface Q3
dialog with the external equipment for Network Management operations through Interface Q2
(Mediation Device function. )
The interfaces and relevant functions are mainly carried out through:
Microprocessor with Control BUS logic
Memories
Interface S0
As previously mentioned this interface manages dialog between the Equipment Controller and the Card
Controller subunits inside the various equipment units.
The
ALARM
COLLECTION,
PERFORMANCE
CONFIGURATION operations are dialogued.
MONITORING,
SOFTWARE
SETTING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Interface S consists of two serial buses defined as INTRA EQUIPMENT CONTROL BUS (IECB):
LIECB, CKL
this channel represents the message exchange link between the Equipment
Controller and the Card Controllers for the information flow pertaining to the
internal equipment control operation (local).
NIECB, CKN
this channel is used by the equipment controller and the card controller as a
dedicated path to TMN messages that require access to the DCC channels
(network).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
253 / 436
This interface manages dialog between the Equipment Controller and the DropShelf units (external
equipment).
The function realized are the same of the S0 interface, using in this case the L1IECB, Ck1L, N1IECB,
CK1N signals.
Interfaces A and P
Interfaces A and P permit to activate the equipment alarm signalling (i.e. parallel contacts, remote alarms,
LEDs) by processing the unit alarm indications
Additionally, they carry out management and switching operations.
Interface A mainly supports the following features:
Led and access point of the unit front coverplate
alarm signalling
Interface P mainly Supports
Protection Switching
Card presence and Card type
Remote Inventory
The detail of the features is presented in next points.

The following generated remote alarms can be accessed at the relevant terminal tagblock:
INT : indicates the internal alarm condition
URG : indicates the urgent alarm condition
NURG : indicates the not urgent alarm condition
IND : indicates the indicative alarm condition
EXT: indicates the external aggregate alarm condition
TORC : indicates that one of the Power supply units is faulty or absent. It is the ORing of PFAIL
1, 2, 3 alarm
TANC : indicates the faulty condition of two or all the Power supply units through a relay contact
LOSQ2 :indicates that there is no connection with the TMN system, interface Q3
TUP : indicates the alarm of the Equipment Controller unit through a relay contact.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The alarm condition is indicated with ground contact except for the TUP (open contact).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
254 / 436

Interface S1

The following are the alarms utilized to activate the rack LEDs:
RURG indicates the urgent alarm condition and lights up the relative rack red LED
RNURG indicates the not urgent alarm condition and lights up the relative rack red LED
M indicates the storing status of the RURG+RNURG alarms and lights up the rack yellow LED
and yellow ATTD LED (5) on the front coverplate.
C is the storing command of the alarms activated by pressing pushbutton (10) on the unit front
coverplate
The C command is also sent to the Alarm interface access module (ANDOR circuit) together with:
CAND indicates the faulty condition of all POWER SUPPLY units through a relay contact
(usually open)
UP indicates the alarm of the Equipment Controller through a relay contact (usually open)
The EUA contact is used to inform the Alarm interface subunit on the presence/absence of the unit
involved.
Moreover, the LED Processing circuit activates the following LEDs of the unit:
red LED (7) URG indicates the presence of an urgent alarm. When it is ON together with the
red LED (1), it indicates unit reset activation.
red LED (6) NURG indicates the presence of a not urgent alarm
yellow LED (4) ABN indicates the Abnormal condition (type: active loopbacks, forcing units
into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS)
yellow LED (3) IND indicates the presence of an indicative alarm
red INT LED (1) indicates the presence of an alarm inside the unit or, when red LED (7) is ON
too, it indicates the activation of the unit reset
yellow ATTD LED (5) indicates the URG/NURG alarm storing status when pressing
pushbutton (10) on the units front coverplate or when sending a command from the Craft
Terminal or Operation System, or through the Remote Alarms Connection .
green LED (2) indicates in Service Unit. Always on.
By pressing pushbutton (11) on the units front coverplate ( LAMPTEST ) the operator checks if all the
LEDs light up (except the LEDs on the AUX/EOW unit and Power Supply) without having to generate
alarms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Parallel Contacts Management circuit supplies six configurable alarms criteria (CP013 and
CPO57) to external sources (not operative in this release). The circuit also receives 8 criteria (CPI18)
from the external source to be used for the Housekeeping criteria 3 of witch (CPI13) are available for
any kind of purpose and the remaining 5 (CPI48) are fixed as follows:
ED
SSU FAIL Fault on the external Synchronous Supply Unit

OFA URG Urgent Alarm on external OFA (Optical Fibre Amplifier)
OFA ABN Abnormal Condition indication on external OFA
OFA NURG Not Urgent Alarm on on external OFA
AND BATT EXT OFA Station Battery Alarm ( or Batt. Alarm of Drop Shelf extension
equipment)
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
255 / 436
PWANDOR indicates failure or absence of Alarm interface module and Service Battery
absence.
ORALIM Battery ORing indicating failure or absence of one of the two station batteries.
The Power Supply unit is managed through the PFAIL1/2/3 alarms.

The Interface analyzes the units status, and provides protection through switchings inside the equipment.
The operating Clock Reference unit is selected by analyzing the OSWCA/B signals which represent the
operating status of the two units, and by generating the SWCKMN selection command, used in the CRU
to transmit the 2MHz clock to the external source.
The OSW 110 signal are received from the tributaries. This criteria generates the MSW 18 command
(sent to the Access modules ) to activate tributaries EPS Switching.
The Detection circuit:
checks the presence/absence of the units through the CAREM 126 command.
checks the type of unit Matrices.
checks the type of presetting on the SWITCH unit.
The Remote Inventory circuits dialogs with the units and Bus termination subunit of the equipment to
receive the inventory data respectively of units and equipment.
From the Bus termination is also received the Equipment Mac Address.
The Inventory data (also that of Equipment Controller itself) can be accessed from local Craft Terminal
(interface F) or Operation system (interface QB3)
The Clock/Calendar circuit provides to the Equipment Controller unit the following features:
full time/data features : seconds, minutes, hours
dayofweek, month, years, autoleap year.
This is permitted by an internal oscillator at 32.768 KHz.

The circuit maintain correct time/date updating for at least 24 hours during power loss.
Interface D
This interface is used for debugging purposes
To access this interface dedicated 8 pin RJ 45 is present (8)
Only for internal factory use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Interface I (Not operative in this release)

This interface is interface to manage the signal of a second Equipment Controller, when a protected 1+1
configuration is present.
The purpose is to provide the information exchange in order to define the active/standby unit and decide
the relevant command toward the alarm interface.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
256 / 436

The Interface also processes the following alarms coming from the Alarm Interface module:

Interface F
Interface F connects the equipment to a personal computer through the front panel connector (9).
This connection allows a local operator to softwarehandle the equipment.
Specifically:
display the current and stored alarms and status of the equipment units,
send operative command (example: alarm attention, restant equipment, loop backs etc.
performance monitoring
display and configure software settings
administrative selections (password and operator profile)
download the equipment software for installation and updating following the equipment
evolution.
These operations are fully described in the Operators Manual.

Interface Q2
Interface Q2/RQ2 implements a standard RS485 serial channel suitable for multipoint link synchronous
(Q2) or asynchronous (RQ2) communication at a max. speed of 64K baud.
The interface is accessed through the relevant terminal tagblock on the QX & Sync access panel.
It permits to establish a connection between external equipment (nonSDH Alcatel equipment, max. 32)
and the TMN.
In this manner the Equipment Controller executes a Mediation Device function.
Interface Q3
Interface Q3 connects the equipment to an Operation System of local networks as specified by IEEE802.3
Standards.
Connection to the network is established via the QX & SYNC access module that permits the connection
to the thin Ethernet cable (10 base 2 ) or to 10 BT interface.
Other equipment can be connected via the DCC channels provided by the SOH bytes of the synchronous
frame (D1D12).
In this manner management operations can be carried out from a Center (Operation System) towards
several and different configured equipment. This facilitates initial turnon and maintenance operations on
the network equipment (see the functions of interface F).
The operations are detailed in the Operation System Handbook.
RECT Remote network management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the RECT Craft Terminal SW Package has been loaded it is possible to perform a remote management
on up to 31 NEs trough the F interface . The Management operations are those carried out from an OS,
exception made for the SW Download.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
257 / 436
This operation is carried out by a microprocessor (CPU) which acquires data and makes it available to all
the interfaces. To carry out these functions CPU acts also as a BUS CONTROL LOGIC and use
MEMORIES.
CPU use a 2MHz clock internally generated .
The Bus Control Logic handles the data exchange modes between the unit devices. It also handles the
RESET logic of the unit devices (CPU included). The Reset logic is enabled:
by pressing pushbutton (12)
after software command from Craft Terminal or Operation System
after having turned on the equipment
when unit power decrease below a fixed threshold
when unit internal alarm is detected.
The local alarm lights up the red alarm indicating LED (1).
The reset command activates LEDs (1) and (7).
Various types of memories reside on the unit:
Boot Memories , 1 Mbytes FEPROM
Pluggable Memories, 16 Mbytes FEPROM, 8 Mbytes RAM
Connectors are also provided to install the MEMORY EXPANSION modules.

The FLASH (FEPROM) memories are used to load software during the installation, operation and
maintenance phases. In this manner the equipments software release is updated in accordance with
product evolution.
The power supply present at the input (+5.3V, 5.5V, +12.1V) are protected by fuses.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The +V and V distributed to the internal circuit are controlled and when decrease below the threshold,
the detection contribute to generate the internal Local alarm.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
258 / 436

Unit Management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 98. Block diagram : Equipment Controller SMEC 2A8R + 16F
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
259 / 436
TO/FROM
UNITS AND
BUS
TERMINATION
RACK LAMPS
CAND
UP
ALARM INT.
REMOTE ALARM
INTERF. I/O
FROM UNIT
FROM
ALARM INT.
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
TO/FROM
CRU
NOT OPERATIVE
FROM/TRIB.
TO SWITCH
MODULES
AND UNITS
TO/FROM
UNITS AND
FUTUREBUS
TERMINATION
ALARM INT.
C
RURG
RNURG
M
C
URG
INT
NURG
IND
TORC
TANC
TUP
CPO 8
CPO13
CPI 18
CTYPEM 12
CTYPES 13
CAREMi 126
ALIMI
PWANDOR
PFAIL13
OSWCA
OSWCB
SWCKMN
MSWi 18
OSWi 110
SPICPEACT
CKOL
NOIECB
CKON
OIECB
CK1L
N1IECB
CK1N
L1IECB
EUA
CLOCK / CALENDAR
REMOTE INVENTORY
RACK LED ALARMS
REMOTE
ALARMS
P C
STATIONS ALARMS A O
GATHERING
R N
A T
L R
SENDING
L A
ALARM
E C
SIGNALLING
L T
PRESENCE
OF UNITS
TYPE OF
MATRIXES
TYPE OF
SWITCHING
ALARM INTERFACE
MANAGEMENT
POWER SUPPLY
MANAGEMENT
CRU SWITCH
MANAGEMENT
TRIBUTARIES SWITCH
MANAGEMENT
INTERFACE
EQUIPMENT SO
UNITS
DIALOG
INTERFACE
S1
DROPSHELF
DIALOG
H
A
N
D
L
I
N
G
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
S
P
R
O
T
E
C
T
PLUGGABLE
MEMORIES
16Mbyte FEPROM
8Mbytes RAM
INTERFACE
I
1+1 SMEC
LED
INTERFACE
A/P
INTERFACE
D
DEBUGGER
10
11
MANAGEMENT
BOOT
MEMORIE
1Mbytes FEPROM
IND
ABN
ATTD
NURG
URG
CPU WITH
BUS CONTROL
LOGIC
25MHz
+V
INTERNAL
LOCAL
ALARM
FUSES
INTERFACE
Q3
OPERATION
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
Q2
MEDIATION
DEVICE
F
LOCAL
TERMINAL
INTERFACE
RESET
RESET
CLOCK SOURCE
12
GND
5.5V
+5.3V
+12.1V
+V
RESET
SUPPLY
POWER
QX & SYNC
QX & SYNC
(NOT OPERATIVE)

3.2.16 Power Supply unit
The Power supply unit converts the voltage received from a 48/60 Vdc battery into three Vdc +5.3V,
5.5V and 12.1 V voltages (stabilized and galvanically isolated from the battery).
There are two decoupler of the Battery inputs (BATT1 and BATT2), thus permitting a standby power
supply.
The following access points can be accessed on the power supply units front coverplate:
ON/OFF switch (2)
green LED indicating the regular operation of the unit (1)
As shown in Figure 6.59 on page 188, the ORed and fuseprotected battery voltages are applied to the
input filter through the ON/OFF switch.
This filter must protect the power supply unit against abrupt variations or battery noise.
The voltage present after the ON/OFF switch is utilized as auxiliary power supply for the Pulse Width
Modulation circuit during the circuit switchON phase.
When the circuit is at steady state, the power supply is obtained after the power switch.
A voltage comparator inhibits the circuit operation if the input voltage value drops below an established
threshold.
The Pulse Width Modulation circuit establishes the conduction time of two power transistors thus
modulating the power sent to the outputs.
Modulation occurs through regulation loops detecting the two currents and voltages I1, I2, V1 and V2 at
outputs 5.5 and +5.3V.
The voltages are then rectified, filtered and output. The 12.1V voltage transits through the series
regulator which maintains the voltages and currents at the established output value.
The three voltages output are delivered decoupled and stabilized. This solution permits to parallel several
units without causing interferences.
During regular operating conditions, green LED is ON and a +5V voltage is present at the PFAIL
output pin.
If one of the voltages drops below an established threshold, a command is generated which reversibly
switchoff the unit. Moreover the green LED goes off and the PFAIL alarm arises (PFAIL output open).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
An excessive increase of one of the output voltages generates the V3, or V4, or V5 commands. The latter
cause the irreversible protection circuit to intervene.
This condition:
ED
irreversibly blocks the unit operation
switches off the green LED
transmits the PFAIL alarm.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
260 / 436

(See Figure 99. on page 261 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
BATTERY
Figure 99. Block Diagram: Power Supply Unit
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
261 / 436
+BATT2
+BATT1
BATT2
BATT1
DECOUPLER
DECOUPLER
I1
I2
V1
V2
REGULATION
LOOP
SELF
POWER SUPPLY
AUXILIARY
POWER SUPPLY
V4
V5
EQ. CONTR.
REMOTE
INVENTORY
V3
IRREVERSIBLE
PROTECTION
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATION
I1
V5
V4
I2
SERIES
REGULATOR
V3
V2
V1
DECOUPLER
STABILIZER
DECOUPLER
STABILIZER
> 1
=
DECOUPLER
STABILIZER
PFAIL
5,5V
+12,1V
+5,3V

EQ.
CONTR.
TO
ALL
UNITS
3.2.17 DS Futurebus Termination subunit
This subunit adapts the levels on the LIECB and NIECB channels and the relevant CKL and CKN clocks
concerned with informative data exchanged between the Equipment Controller unit and the Card
Controller subunit mounted on the various units of the equipment.
Level adaptation is also carried out on the OHBUS streams exchanged between the units.
A serial EPROM is available for the Remote Inventory containing equipment inventory data (P/N., serial
number, construction date).
The subunit stores the MAC Address of the equipment utilized for the TMN configuration.
Furthermore the Unit allows the transit of the LIECB channel that flows between SMEC unit and the
DROP SHELF 2 Mbit/s Tributaries.
SCKL
CKL
FROM
SDL
DL
SMEC
SCKN
CKN
SDN
DN
TO DROP SHELF
OHBUS 5
TO VARIOUS UNITS
OHBUS 1
LIECB
+5V
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
+2V
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
CKL
TO ALL UNITS
NIECB
CKN
OHBUS 5
TO VARIOUS UNITS
OHBUS 1
LIECB
F
+2V
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
CKL
TO ALL UNITS
NIECB
CKN
TO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
REMOTE
INVENTORY
Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
262 / 436

(See Figure 100. ).
3.2.18 Alarm Interface Access Module


This Alarm Interface Access Module unit includes:
AND/OR circuit.
Future Bus Termination ( not used in this release).
Remote Inventory. ( not used in this release).
MAC Address function ( not used in this release).
R.A.B. interface towards Rack Lamps.
Remote alarms interface.
Parallel Input/Serial Output MFAIL Alarms ( not used in this release).
AND/OR circuit.
The function of this unit is of detecting power supply failures on the station batteries or on the assemblies,
and of processing the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller.
These alarm statuses control the generation of the rack lamps command and remote alarms criteria.
The unit is powered from a Service Battery.Through setting options it can be adapted to the
48 or 60 V voltages.
In case of faulty of the Service Battery that feeds this unit in which is housed the ANDOR function, the
PWANDOR criteria is generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unit to light up LED (6) NURG see
Figure 30. on page 89. and to light up the alarm LB (Battery Control Failure / Missing) on the Operator
Manual A.S. & Control application.
The alarm generated following station battery failure is due to a voltage drop of approx. 20% vs. nominal
value.
The alarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, less the allowed tolerances.
The failure of both station batteries generates an AND criteria and the TAND remote alarm.
Moreover, the AND criteria is ORed with the CAND criteria received from the Equipment Controller unit.
The failure of only one battery generates the OR criteria which, upon being inhibited by the AND criteria,
delivers the TOR remote alarm and the ORALIM criteria to the Equipment Controller unit that lights up the
alarm LF (Battery Fuse/ Broken alarm) on the Operator Manual A.S. & Control application.
The UP criteria is received from the Equipment Controller unit and when ORed with EUA, Equipment
Controller presence (settable) generates the AU signal.
The AND, OR and AU criteria are each stored in an appropriate memory circuit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The rack lamps receive the RNURG and RURG output commands. The RURG command is the sum of
the power supply AND and AU criteria, and both are accessed at output A of the memory which
corresponds to the nonstored output.
The alarm statuses can be memorized through the C command activated through pushbutton (10) on
the Equipment Controller unit.
In this case the output A of the store is deactivated thus causing the RURG and/or RNURG criteria to
disappear, while output M is activated thus concurring to the formation of the M criteria.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
263 / 436
The RURG, RNURG, M alarms operate like the alarms of the Equipment Controller towards the top rack
LEDs.
Remote inventory ( not used in this release).
This function manages the Equipment data.

This function is performed by a serial EEPROM that stores the management data of the Equipment.
For this circuit is implemented a protection against short circuit by means of fuse resistors.
MAC Address ( not used in this release).
This function manages the Equipment LAN address.

This function is performed by a serial EEPROM that stores the Lan Address of the Equipment.
For this circuit is implemented a protection against short circuit by means of fuse resistors.
R/M interface
This function provides the necessary criteria to manage Rack Lamps.
Remote Alarms
This function provides the necessary informations towards a 15 contacts connector to manage remote
alarms.
Parallel input / Serial output module fail alarms ( not used in this release).
This function provides the alarm faults of all Access Module towards Equipment Controller.
Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module Presetting
The same Craft Terminal SW packet can be used for both Equipment 1651 SM Old Practice that foresee
the Switch Unit (that is used for the EPS N+1 for the 34/45 or 140/155 electrical Trib) and for the New
Practice version of the same Equipment that doesnt house the former unit but however performs the
same protection functions by means the dedicated Access Module sub units. On the Craft Terminal the
same slot that allows to SW equip the Switch Unit is used to equip the type of Alarm Int. Acc. Module to
be used. This slot on the Craft Terminal becomes active only if an Hw setting has been made on
the Alarm Interface Access Module Unit .
Doing the HW presetting for the Alarm Interface Access Module unit as indicated in the Hardware setting
Section of this Technical Handbook the Subrack SW Configuration selection about the Switch Unit/Alarm
Interface Access Module slot on the Craft Terminal, is enabled and the User can choose if the EPS is to
be performed or not.
The HW presetting on the Alarm Interface Access Module Unit must be made when the EPS
1+N protection for the 34/45 or 140/155 electrical Tributaries is to be performed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This unit is compliant with IEC950 norms on electrical safety.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
264 / 436

If the alarm disappears all the criteria and remote alarms that might be active are automatically
deactivated.

+5V
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
OHBUS
LIECB
CKL
NIECB
+2V
CKN
(not used)
+5V
TO AGGREGATES
TO ALL
UNITS
OHBUS
LIECB
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
+2V
CKL
NIECB
CKN
TO ALL
UNITS
URG
NURG
INT
IND
LOS Q3
FROM
EQ
CONTR.
TORC
TANC
TUP
C
&
BATT1
AND
<1
=
< 1 RURG
=
RM
INTERF.
CONNECTOR
RNURG
POWER
ACCESS
MODULE
A
&
<1
=
OR
<1
=
BATT2
TOR
TOR
CAND
TAND
REMOTE
ALARMS
CONNECTOR
ORALIMI
C
EUA
TO
EQ
CONTR.
AND
<1
=
A
AU
UP
M
MFAIL
FROM
ACCESS
MODULE
PWANDOR
PISO
(not used)
VSERV
TO / FROM
EQ
CONTR.
5V
RM
+VSERV
INTERF.
5V
CONNECTOR
GND
MAC ADDRESS
REMOTE INVENTORY
TO / FROM
EQ
CONTR.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(not used)
Figure 101. Block diagram: Alarm Interface Access Module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
265 / 436
3.2.19 Qx & Synchronism Access Module
This subunit is available in three versions:

Qx & Synch. 120 Access Module
Qx & Synch. 120 ohm or 1.0/2.3 interface
Qx & Synch. T43
The above modules are functionally identical except for the type of connector used for synchronism
signals connection.
The Qx & SYNCH. ACCESS MODULE makes the functionality of three different circuits:
QB3* interface (10B2)
Synch. interface (SYNC)
Q2LTS interface (Q INT)
Another circuit, named CARD FAIL ALARM that has the purpose of monitoring the functionality of the card,
is foreseen.
QB3* interface (10B2)
The purpose of the QB3* interface is to convert the signals present on the back panel connectors to the
10Base2 option for LAN interfaces. The implementation is compliant with the IEE 802.3 standard for
CSMA/CD type of local area networks.
The ADM uses this module when the plant requires to connect a LAN cable to reach the centralized
Operation System: they can be directly connected to the same office LAN or can be reached through an
intermediate gateway equipment.
BNC thinwire connectors constitutes the LAN side of QX module. They are compliant with the standard
10base2 electrical characteristics and can be directly attached to the LAN coax cable. The B2 connectors
are located on the front cover of the unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The QB3* Interface connects the equipment to the Telecommunication Management Network by means
the Thin Ethernet (10 base 2) cable through a BNC female connector.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
266 / 436


The Qx Interface consists of the following functional circuits:

1)
DC/DC Converter and isolation transformers. They establish an electric isolation between the
coaxial cable and the transceiver cable.
2)
Transceiver: it carries out the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard
(Ethernet):
a)
Transmit: the data received from the equipment (DOA, DOB differential signals) are
level adapted in compliancy with the coaxial cables utilized.
b)
Receive: the data transiting over the coaxial cable are sent to the equipment (DIA, DIB
differential signals)
c)
Collision detection: should two or more stations collide (following two or more stations
simultaneously transmitting) then the transmission of the CIA and CIB signals will fail.
d)
Check length of the transmitted packets: a jabber timer interrupts transmission should the
length of the data packets exceed the maximum allowed standard. Failure of CI signal
transmission is detected.
The Controlout signal (CO), specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard to enable/disable transmission, is not
utilized and the module is always enabled (see Standard should signal fail).
Synchronism interface
This interface is realized by connectors that allow the connections between external synchronism and the
internal synchronisms according to ITUT G.703 for 2 MHz signals , towards and from CRUs.
As already specified the connectors are of the following type:
One 120 ohms connectors mounted on the Qx & Synch. 120 Acc. Mod. (see Figure 102. on page268 ).
Three 1.0/2.3 75 ohms connectors mounted on the Qx & Synch. 1.0/2.3 Acc. Mod.
Three Type 43 75 ohms connectors mounted on the Qx & Synch. T43 Acc. mod.
Q2LTS Interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Q2LTS interface is a RS 485 interface that allows the dialogue from EC to a mediation device utilized for
network management operation (transfer and receive configuration data, alarm status and so on).
SeeFigure 102. on page 268.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
267 / 436

TX A
RX A
CK A
TX B
TO EQUIPMENT
RX B
Q2 LTS
CONTROLLER
CKB
INTERFACE
TX SH
RX SH
GND
DOA
DOB
DIA
COAXIAL
CABLE
TRANSCEIVER
DIB
THIN
ETHERNET
QB3*
CIA
TO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
CIB
COA
COB
+12V
+9V
CKA IN P
CKA IN N
CK OUT P
TO CRU
SYNCHRONISM
CK OUT N
I /O
CKB IN P
CKB IN N
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 102. Block diagram: Qx & Synch. Access Module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
268 / 436
3.2.20 Qx 10 BT & Synchronism Access Module


This unit is available in three versions:
Qx 10 BT & Synch. 120 Access Module
Qx 10 BT & Synch. 1.0/2.3
Qx 10 BT & Synch. T43
The above modules are functionally identical except for the type of connector used for synchronism
signals connection.
The Qx 10 BT & SYNCH. ACCESS MODULE makes the functionality of three different circuits:
10 BT interface
Synch. 120 ohm / 1.02.3 interface (SYNC)
Q2LTS interface (Q int)
Another circuit, named Card Fail Alarm that has the purpose of monitoring the functionality of the card,
is foreseen.
10 BT interface
The10 BT function provides the electrical and functional interface between the IEEE 802.3 standard
Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) present on the back panel and the Twisted Pair cable.
This interface implements the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) function for the Twisted pair Medium
as specified by the supplement to the IEEE 802.3 standard ( type 10 base T ).
The ADM uses this module when the plant requires to connect a LAN cable to reach the centralized
Operation System: they can be directly connected to the same office LAN or can be reached through
an intermediate gateway equipment.
The Twisted Pair side ( BT connector) of the Qx 10BT & Synch access module is constituted by
an 8 pins RJ45 connector. It is compliant to the electrical characteristics of the 10 base T standard
and can be directly connected to the Twisted Pair cable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Qx Interface consists of the following functional circuits:
ED
1)
A specialized signal transformer provides electrical isolation between the I/O differential pair of
the Twisted Pair and the Twisted Pair Interface (TPI) internal circuits . Moreover it provides a
lowpass filter block on the TPI side signals.
2)
Card fail alarm : it monitors the output voltage of he DC/DC converter. In case of fault of the
DC/DC converter the circuit provides an alarm (MFAIL) towards ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS
MODULE (not operative).
3)
Power supply controller : interrupts the transceiver power voltage if the Equipment Controller
is extracted
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
269 / 436
Transceiver: it carries out the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard (10
Base T):
a)
Transmitter: it accepts data streams from the AUI interface and transmits it towards the
Twisted Pair cable.
b)
Receiver: it receives data stream from the Twieted Pair cable and sends it to the AUI
interface.
c)
Collision detection:it indicates to the AUI interface if there is a collision on the Twisted Pair
cable
d)
The transceiver provides a number of features including transmit digital predistorsion,

receiver squelch, link status indication with automatic Twisted Pair receive polarity
detedction /correction and SQE test.
Synchronism interface
This interface is realized by a 9 pin SUBD connector (cod. 040.655.101) that allows the connections
between external synchronism and the internal synchronisms according to ITUT G.703 for 2 MHz
signals with 120 ohm impedance, towards and from CRU.
Three 1.0/2.3 75 ohms connectors mounted on the Qx & Synch. 1.0/2.3 Acc. Mod.
Three Type 43 75 ohms connectors mounted on the Qx & Synch. T43 Acc. mod.
Q2LTS Interface (not operative in this release)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Q2LTS interface is a RS 485 interface that allows the dialogue from EC to a mediation device utilized
for network management operation (transfer and receive configuration data, alarm status and so on).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
270 / 436

4)

TX A
RX A
CK A
TX B
TX SH
RX B
TO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
Q2
INTERFACE
RX SH
CKB
GND
DOA
TPTXP
DOB
TWISTED
DIA
PAIR
DIB
CIA
TO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
TPTXN
TPRXP
INTERFACE
CIB
+5V
FROM EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
TPRXN
+5V
+12 V
CKA IN P/N
CKB IN P/N
CK OUT P/N
TO CRU
SYNCHRONISM
I /O
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 103. Block diagram: Qx 10BT & Synch. Access Module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
271 / 436
This module provides an external access for the Equipment Controller ( Houskeeping contacts) and the
power supply for the DC/DC converters. See Figure 104.
The module houses:
Battery access
Connectors (1) on the front panel delivers the station voltage to the Power Supply units.
Two E.M.C. filters are placed between the battery voltage and ground.
Housekeeping contacts
Front panel connector (2) provides connections for the parallel contacts (housekeeping).
Two criteria are sent to the Alarm Interface to activate the AND/OR function.
CPI 1
CPI 2
CPI 3
CPI 4
CPI 5
CPI 6
CPI 7
CPI 8
CPO 1
CPO 2
CPO 3
CPO 4
CPO 5
CPO 6
CPO 7
2
TO/FROM
STATION
TO/FROM
EQ. CONTROLLER
+ BATT1
EMC
BATT1 FILTERS
TO POWER SUPPLY
TO ANDOR
1
FROM
STATION
BATTERIES
+ BATT2
BATT2
EMC
FILTERS
TO POWER SUPPLY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO ANDOR
Figure 104. Power Access Module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
272 / 436

3.2.21 Power and Housekeeping Access Module
3.2.22 Power and Housekeeping Access Module/2

(See Figure 105. on page 273 )

The module houses:
Battery access
Connectors (1) on the front panel deliver the station voltage to the Power Supply units.
Two E.M.C. filters are placed between the battery voltage and ground.
Housekeeping contacts
Front panel connector (2) provide connection for the parallel contacts (housekeeping).
When using this module the AND/OR function is available by strapping.
CPI 1
CPI 2
CPI 3
CPI 4
CPI 5
CPI 6
CPI 7
CPI 8
CPO 1
CPO 2
CPO 3
CPO 4
CPO 5
CPO 6
CPO 7
2
TO/FROM
STATION
TO/FROM
EQ. CONTROLLER
+ BATT1
BATT1
TO ANDOR
SZ
1
FROM
STATION
BATTERIES
TO POWER SUPPLY
EMC
FILTERS
+ BATT2
BATT2
TO POWER SUPPLY
EMC
FILTERS
TO ANDOR
SZ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 105. Power Access Module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
273 / 436
3.2.23 Auxiliary Access Module
Three interfaces are present :
64 Kbit connections
V11 connections
EOW extension
3.2.24 Tributary Access Module subunit

The subunits connect the tributary signals to the relevant units and switche onto the standby tributary
unit following switching command.
The type of subunits used depend on the bitrate of the tributary signal, on the impedance, on the
connectors and on the K20 standard protection.
3.2.24.1 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Access Module

(See Figure 106. on page 275 ).
The description is applicable to the following kind of physical connection:
2 Mbit/s coax. connectors (75 ohm)
With Micro Siemens connectors 1.0 /2.3
2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm K20
120 ohm modules with SubD connectors

and K20 protection
2 Mbit/s T43 (75 ohm)
75 ohm module with Type T43 connector
2 Mbit/s 120 ohm
120 ohm module with SubD connector
This subunit is available in two versions:

21x2 Mb/s Protected Access Module 120 ohm
21x2 Mb/s Unprotected Access Module 120 ohm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 21x2 Mb/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm is a unit that makes the connection from the 2 Mb/s Back
Panel signals to the external signals in accordance with ITUT G.703 for 120 ohm impedance.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
274 / 436

This module provides an external access for the AUX/EOW unit.

The blocks of the switch module are:
2 Mb/s Analog interface (120 or 75 ohm) towards Tx and Rx physical connector access.
K20 protection against lightning (only for Subunit with K20 indication)
The 1+N EPS protection is SW set
EPS switches, both for Tx and Rx side.

The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller, selects the connection with the
working or with the spare tributary unit.
Power failure detection and alarm generation. The Switch circuit have power protection, made
by fuse resistors with power failure detection and alarm generation. When power failure occurs
a alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE unit.
The 21x2 Mb/s UNPROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm is a unit that makes the connection from the 2 Mb/s Back
Panel signals to the external signals in accordance with ITUT G.703 for 120 ohm impedance. It uses
the same pcb of the 21x2 Mb/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm with jumping resistors mounted instead of
relays when a unprotected configuration is foreseen.
The CARD FAIL ALARM and the SWITCH DRIVER circuits are not implemented on this unit.
D2E TO WORKING TRIB.

2 Mbit/s #1 IN
ANALOG
INTERFACE
D2ESPTO SPARE TRIB.

EPS
D2U FROM WORKING TRIB.
2 Mbit/s #1 OUT
TO ALARM
INT.
ACCESS
MODULE
D2USPFROM SPARE TRIB.
MFAIL
MSW FROM EQUIPMENT

ALARM
DETEC.
CONTROLLER
+5,3V
+5V
FUSES
5V
POWER SUPPLY
5,5V
Figure 106. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module block diagram (one of the 21 switch functions performed)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
21x2 Mbit/s Access Module (120 Ohm and 120 Ohm K20 type) can be used for 21x1.5 Mbit/s
Tributary connection too.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
275 / 436
3.2.24.2 TRMUX + 5x2 Mbit/s Access Module
The description is applicable to the following kind of physical connection :

TRMUX & 5x2 Mbit/s Prot. Acc. Mod.120 Ohm
With SUBD connectors for 2 Mbit/s signals

and Siemens connector for 34 Mbit/s signal
TRMUX & 5x2 Mbit/s Prot. Acc. Mod. 75 Ohm
With Siemens connectors
The functional blocks of each module are :
34 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx coaxial connectors

2 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx SUBD connectors / coaxial connectors.
The 1+N EPS protection is SW set.
EPS switches, for both Tx and Rx sides.
Two relays, one for Tx side an the other for Rx side , switch the I/O signals towards working or
spare tributary.
The MSW command sets the relay contacts to + 5 V for main tributary, to 0 V for protection and
high impedance to have no switching action.
Power failure detection and alarm generation.
The access module has power protection, made by fuse resistors. A power failure detection
circuit and an alarm generation circuit are present. When power failure occurs an alarm
condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.
2 Mbit/s #1 IN
D2E
TO WORKING TRIB.
D2ESP TO SPARE TRIB.

EPS
D2U
2 Mbit/s #1 OUT
FROM WORKING TRIB.
D2USP FROM SPARE TRIB.
SW
SWITCH
MSW
DRIVER
D34E1Ti ( 34 Mb IN TO WORK. TRIB)

D34E1SNi ( 34 Mb IN SPARE N+1)
D34E1Si (34 Mb IN SPARE 1+1)
EPS
34 IN
ANALOG
INTERFACE
D34U1Ti ( 34 Mb OUT FROM WORK. TRIB

D34U1SNi ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)
D34U1Si ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)
34 OUT
TO ALARM
INT.
ACCESS
MODULE
FROM EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SW
ALARM
DETEC
MFAIL
+5V
+5,3V
FUSES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5V
5,5V
Figure 107. TRMUX +5x2 Mbit/s block diagram
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
276 / 436

(See Figure 107. )
3.2.24.3 34/45 Mbit/s Access Module

(See Figure 108. ).

The description is applicable to:
3x34 Mbit/s Access Module T43
With type 43 connector
3x34 Mbit/s Access Module E
With Micro Siemens connectors 1.0/2.3
The switch module operates on 3x34 Mbit/s and 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. The blocks of each function switch
are:
34 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx coaxial connectors

The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller, selects the connection with the
working or with the spare tributary unit.
In 1+1 EPS the Main trib is connected with the spare and in N+1 EPS up to four working
tributaries are connected with the spare trib through the Access Module.
The default factory EPS setting is to allow the N+1 protection.
The kind of EPS to activate besides the SW selection carried out by means the Craft
Terminal, must be hardware set on this subunit (see the Hardware setting Section,
Table 26. on page 428).
In order to activate this protection the User must define the consistent Hardware setting
also for the Alarm Interface Access Module. (see the Hardware setting Section, Table 26. on
page 428).
a alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.
The MSW command, coming from Equipment Controller unit, sets the relay contacts. This command is
set to + 5 V for main tributary, to 0 V for protection and high impedance to have no switching action.
34 IN
D34E1Ti ( 34 Mb IN TO WORK. TRIB)

D34E1SNi ( 34 Mb IN SPARE N+1)
EPS
SETTING
ANALOG
INTERFACE
EPS
34 OUT
D34U1Ti ( 34 Mb OUT FROM WORK. TRIB

D34U1SNi ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)
D34U1Si ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)
MSW (FROM EC)
TO ALARM
INT.
ACCESS
MODULE
MFAIL
ALARM
DETEC
+5V
+5,3V
FUSES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5V
5,5V
Figure 108. 34 Mbit/s Access Module Switch block diagram (one of three switch function performed)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
277 / 436
3.2.24.4 140 Mbit/s Access Module
The description is applicable to:

Access Module 140 Mbit/s K20
With Siemens Connections and K20 protection
With type 43 connections
Access Module 140 Mbit/s T43
140 Mbit/s Access Module
With all microsiemens connectors
The Access module operates: on 140 Mbit/s and STM1 electrical tributary.
The blocks of the switch module are:
140 Mb/s interface towards the Rx and Tx coaxial connectors

K20 protection against lightning (only for subunit with K20 indication)
The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller selects the connection with the
working or the spare tributary unit.
In 1+1 EPS the spare trib is connected through the spare Unit and in N+1 EPS the spare trib.
is connected with the working tributaries through the Access Module.
The default factory EPS setting is to allow the N+1 protection.
The kind of EPS to activate besides the SW selection carried out by means the Craft
Terminal, must be hardware set on this subunit (see the Hardware setting Section,
Table 26. on page 428).
In order to activate this protection the User must define the consistent Hardware setting
also for the Alarm Interface Access Module. (see the Hardware setting Section, Table 26. on
page 428).
a alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.
The +5V and 5.5V input power supply are fuseprotected.
K20
PROTEC.
D140ETi (140 Mb IN)

D140ESNi (140 Mb IN SPARE N+1)
J1
140 IN
EPS
ANALOG
INTERFACE
J6
140 OUT
SETTING
EPS
G703
CMI
REGEN.
D140UTi (140 Mb OUT)

D140USNi (140 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)
D34U1Si (140 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)
MSW
TO ALARM
INT.
ACCESS
MODULE
MFAIL
FROM EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
ALARM
DETEC
+5V
+5,3V
FUSES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5V
5,5V
Figure 109. 140 Mbit/s Access Module Switch block diagram
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
278 / 436

(See Figure 109. ).
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values

Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values
4.1 General Characteristics
Optical Line bit rate (aggregates)
622 Mbit/s (STM4) or 2488 Mbit/s (STM16)
Optical tributaries bit rate
155 Mbit/s (STM1)
Electrical tributaries bit rate
140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s software settable,

34 Mbit/s,45 Mbit/s, 2 Mbit/s, 1.5 Mbit/s
Type of optical fiber
Singlemode, Rec.G.652 / G.653 compliant
Aggregates Wavelength
(Central, nominal)
1310 nm (2nd window) and 1550 nm (3rd window)
Application code for Aggregate Interfaces

(see Table 15. on page 284 up to Table 16.
on page 286).
S4.1, L4.1, L4.2 , L4.1 JE, L4.2 JE S16.1, L16.1,

L16.2, L16.2 JE.
Coloured Aggregates Wavelength (WDM

applications)
1531.90 1533.47 1535.04 1536.61 1538.19

1539.77 1541.35 1542.94 (nm)
1547.72 1549.32 1550.92 1552.52 1554.13
1555.75 1557.36 1558.98 (nm)
Application codes for Aggregate Interfaces

(Table 1/G.957)
S 16.1, L 16.1, L 16.2, L16.2 JE1 (1900 ps/nm.), L16.2

JE1.1, L16.2 JE2 (3000 ps/nm), L16.3 JE3 (4000
ps/nm)
L16.2 JE WDM (6400 ps/nm)
L16.2 JE WDM (12800 ps/nm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Standard applied:
Electrical Interfaces
Rec. G.703
SDH frame and multiplexing structure
Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709
Equipment function
Recs. G.782, G.783, G.784
Optical Interfaces
Recs. G.957, G.958, G.653
Transmission quality
Rec. G.784, G.826
System management functions (SW)
Recs. X.733, X.734, X.736
Jitter and wander
Recs. G.783, G.823, G.825
MS SPRING Protection
Recs. G.841
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
279 / 436
140 Mbit/s, DVB, 155 Mbit/s Tributaries
8
34, 45 Mbit/s Tributaries
24
2 Mbit/s Tributaries
63 in the Line Shelf and further 3x63 2Mbit/s Tribs

supplied by 1641SMD Drop Shelf
Tributari 1.5 Mbit/s
63
Crossconnection
Level VC4
Aggregate to Aggregate (only with Full Matrix)

Aggregate to Tributary
Tributary to Tributary (only with Full Matrix)
Level VC3 and VC12
With Full Matrix

In four VC4 of East Aggregate, four VC4 of the West
Aggregate (N.B.) eight Tributaries VC4s.
Aggregate to Aggregate
Between VC in one side Aggregate.
Tributaries to Tributary
Aggregate to Tributary
N.B. With STM16 Aggregate, also 8 distributed VC4
on the aggregate sides.
Worst transfer delay
<100sec. per traffic pathway ( aggregate to tributary)
Protections
1651 SM / 1661 SMC ; 1641SMD (as for as

applicable)
SLAPS. Simplified linear APS for 1+1 unidirectional
line protection for aggregate and STM1 optical and
electrical tributary. Not revertive.
2 MS SPRING. Only for 1661SMC, using 8 High
priority AU4.
1+1 EPS for CRU (not revertive) and FULL MATRIX
(revertive or not revertive) units
SNCP Unidirectional Subnetwork Connection
Protection on 2 fibers in ring networks (TU and AU4).
Revertive or not revertive
TRIBUTARIES EPS:
2/1.5 Mb/s:
1+N (3 max.) revertive. 1615SM/1661SMC
1+N (9 max.) revertive. 1641SMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
34 Mb/s or 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical:
2 benchs with 1+N (4 max), revertive .And/or:
2 benchs with 1+1 EPS ,revertive .
2+1 power supply LINE SHELF protection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
280 / 436

DropInsert capacity
1+1 power supply DROP SHELF protection

DVB Tribs are not EPS protected.
Management Interface
Local:
Remote:
Craft Interface
(Personal Computer)
RS232
9pin D, PC compatible 9600 B/S
Remote Craft Interface

(Personal Computer)
IRS232 9pin D, PC compatible 9600 B/S it handles up to

other 31 NEs via DCC.
Transmission
Management Network
(TMN) Interface
Qx G.773 QB3 10 base 2 and base T, QECC G.784
Protocol Stack/
Information Model
messages
In this release QB3*/QECC* proprietary

(Alcatel 7.1 7.2 layers are adopted)
Dual addressing to O.S.:
Local and Remote Management

Interfaces functions
It allows O.S redundancy
Alarms status checks, equipment, connection and TMN

configurations, administrative function for security
(password and operator profile), maintenance memory for
all the equipment events, monitoring on performance.
Equipment software download on nonvolatile memories
without traffic interruption.
Unit and Equipment acknowledgement
Through Remote Inventory

(Company id, Unit Type, Unit Part Number, Serial Part
Number, Software Part Number, CLEI code,
Manufacturing Plant Date identifier, Date).
For detail refer to Operator Handbook .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unit substitution characteristics

Tributary unit
without interfering on other channels
Spare unit
without interfering on traffic
Output Housekeeping signals and

Remote Alarms
outputs CPO, not operative in this release + remote

alarms.
Max. guaranteed current with closed

condition
50 mA
Max. allowed voltage with open condition
72 V
Voltage drop vs. ground with closed

condition
2 V 0 V
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
281 / 436
Max. guaranteed current with closed

condition
8 inputs CPI (only three available for the customer)

3mA
Max. allowed voltage with open condition
72 V
Voltage drop vs. ground with closed

condition
2 V 0 V
4.1.1 Electrical and optical safety

Protection against lightning surges
K20 (optional)
Optical Safety
According to IEC 825 and ITUT Rec. G.958 regarding

ALS. WARNING: Booster +17 dBm is a Class 3B
LASER. All Other Optical Interfaces are Class 3A
LASERS (Rec. IEC825).
Electrical Safety
Safety status of the connections with other
equipment
TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remote

alarms, Housekeeping (CPO,CPI) , Rack lamp (RM)
and for Tributary connections if K20 protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
282 / 436

Input Housekeeping signals
4.2 Unit Characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The following specification are in addition to those specified in para. 4.1 on page 279.
4.2.1 STM4 Aggregate units

Types of optical interfaces
S4.1, L4.1, L4.2 or L4.2JE. Characteristics are given in

Table 15.
Optical connectors
FC/PC, DIN or SC/PC.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
283 / 436
CHARACTERISTICS
UNIT
VALUES
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Nominal bit rate
STM4 according to G.707 and G.958

Kbit/s
Application code (table 1 / G.957)
622.080
S4.1
L4.1
L4.2
L4.2 JE
12741356
12801335
14801580
15301560
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
nm
nm
dB
2.5
1
30
1
30
0,8
30
dBm
dBm
8
15
+2
3
+2
3
+2
3
dB
8.2
10
10
10
dB
012
1027
1024
1028
ps/nm
84
300
1900
2400
Minimum optical return loss of cable plant at S, including any

connectors
dB
14
20
24
24
Maximum discrete reflectance

between S and R
dB
20
25
27
27
InGaAs PIN
InGaAs PIN
InGaAs PIN
InGaAs PIN
dB
dBm
dBm
28
8
31
8
28
8
32
8
Maximum optical path penalty
dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver

measured at R
dB
20
20
27
27
Operating wavelength range

TRANSMITTER AT REFERENCE POINT S
Source type
Special characteristics:
maximum RMS width

maximum 20 dB width
minimum side mode suppression ratio
Mean launched power:
maximum
minimum
Minimum extinction ratio

OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S AND R
Attenuation range
Maximum dispersion
RECEIVER AT REFERENCE POINT R

Type of detector
Mean received power @ BER=1E 10:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
minimum (sensitivity)
maximum (overload)
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
284 / 436

Table 15. Parameters specified for STM4 Optical Interfaces
4.2.2 STM16 Aggregate units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

S16.1, L16.1, L162 L162 JE 1,2 and 3.

The single channel optical interface characteristics are given in
Table 16.
L16.2 JE WDM multi channel characteristics are given in Table 17.
on page 287
Optical connectors
ED
FC/PC, DIN or SC/PC.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
285 / 436
CHARACTERISTICS
UNIT
VALUES
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Nominal bit rate
Kbit/s
2 488 320
S16.1
L16.1
L16.2
L16.2JE1
NB1
L16.2 JE2 L16.2 JE3

NB2
NB3
12701360
12801335
15001580
15301560
15501560
15501560
SLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
SLMIM
SLMIM
nm
nm
dB
1
30
1
30
1
30
0.5
30
0.2
30
0.2
30
dBm
dBm
0
5
+2
2
+2
2
+4
+1
1
3
1
3
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
dB
ps/nm
012
100
1024
250
1024
1600
1328
1900
NB2
3200
NB3
4000
Minimum optical return loss of cable

plant at S, including any connectors
dB
24
24
24
24
24
24

between S and R
dB
27
27
27
27
27
27
InGaAs
PIN
InGaAs
APD
InGaAs
APD
InGaAs
APD
InGaAs
APD
InGaAs
APD
dBm
dBm
18
0
27
8
28
8
29
9
29
9
NB3
9
dB

measured at R
dB
27
27
27
27
27
27

Source type
Special characteristics:
maximum RMS width

maximum 20 dB width
minimum side m\ode
suppression ratio
maximum
minimum

Attenuation range
Maximum dispersion

Type of detector
Mean
received
BER=1E10:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
maximum (overload)
NB1
NB2
NB3
ED
power
To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) up to +15 dBm on G.653 fiber or in stand alone configuration
To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) on G.652 fiber; attenuation range according to output power of the Booster
To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) in conjunction with the 1664 OA Preamplifier on G.652 and G.653 fiber;
attenuation range according to Booster and Preamplifier power budget. Sensitivity value measured on Preamplifier.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
286 / 436

Table 16. Parameters specified for STM16 Optical Interfaces (Single Channel).

Table 17. Parameters specified for STM16 Optical Interfaces (Multi Channel)
CHARACTERISTICS
UNIT
VALUES
STM16 according to G.707
and G.958
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Nominal bit rate
kbit/s
2 488 320
Application code (Table 1/G.957)
L16.2 JE WDM 6400

Central operating wavelength
nm
NB1
Source type
ILM
Spectral characteristics :
maximum RMS width
nm
nm
dB
0.2
30
maximum
dBm
+2
minimum
dBm
dB
8.2
Max loss budget
dB
NB2
Loss limited distance
Km
NB2
ps/nm
6400
Dispersion limited distance
Km
320
Minimum optical return loss at S, including any

connectors
dB
24
Total average PMD (1th order)
ps
40
nm
15301561
maximum 20 dB width

Maximum chromatic dispersion

Type of detector
OSNR
InGaAs APD
dB/0.1nm
17 (NB3)
dBm
dBm
23
10
dB
27
Mean received power @ BER=1E12 with fiber:

maximum (overload)
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R
NOTES:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB1
Trasmitters used up to 16 wavelenght Wdm system. The 16 wavelenght are (nm):

1547.72, 1549.32, 1550.92, 1552.52, 1554.13, 1555.75, 1557.36, 1558.98 (red)
1531.90, 1533.47, 1535.04, 1536.61, 1538.19, 1539.77, 1541.35, 1542.94 (blue)
Attenuation range and relevant limited distance depend on WDM system specs.
For NOT Enhanced 6400 ps/nm Aggregate units is 19 dB/0.1nm.
NB2
NB3
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
287 / 436
Booster (on 1664OA)
Aggregate
STM16
Aggregate
STM16
min 6dBm
max 4dBm
Booster
Input
15dBm
17dBm
29dBm
9dBm
SPECIFICATIONS
3200 (ps/nm)
Optical fiber used
G.652
fiber attenuation
0.25 dB/km
chromatic dispersion of the fiber
18 ps/nm/km
penalty
1 dB
Attenuation range
min = +17(9)
max = +15 (29)1
26 dB
43 dB
Minimum span length (26dB/0.25)
104 Km
Maximum span length

due to the attenuation (sensitivity) 43/0.25=172
172 Km
Following there are the formulas to calculate the minimum and maximum span length. The maximum
length can be limited by the receiver sensitivity or by the maximum chromatic dispersion, whichever is
most restrictive; the minimum length is limited by the receiver overload.
The optical interface characteristics are deduced from Table 16. and Table 17. depending on the type
of interface.
The optical fiber characteristics are reported in rec. ITUT G.957.
Span attenuation range:
Min Atten.= (max Tx Power)(min. Rx Overload)=+17(9)=26dB
Max Atten.= (minTx Power)(min. Rx Sensitivity)(penalty)=+15(29)1=43 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Minimum span length for overload = (Min Att.)/(fiber att.)=26/0.25=104 Km

Maximum span length for attenuation (sensitivity) = (Max Att.)/(fiber att.)=43/0.25=172 Km
Maximum span length for dispersion = (Max dispers.)/(fiber disp.)=3200/18=177.7 Km
Thus the maximum fiber span length is limited for attenuation (sensitivity): 172 Km,
while the minimum span to avoid overload problems should be 104 Km.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
288 / 436

4.2.2.1 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L16.2 JE2 Aggregate and a 15
dBm Booster

4.2.3 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L16.2 JE3 Aggregate , a 15 dBm
Booster and a Preamplifier unit.
Booster
(on the 1664OA)
Preamplifier
(on the 1664OA)
Aggregate
STM16
Booster
Input
min 6dBm
max 4dBm
Aggregate
STM16
15dBm
17dBm
37dBm
18dBm
Preamplifier
Output
15.5dBm
12.5dBm
SPECIFICATIONS
4000 (ps/nm)
Optical fiber used
G.652
fiber attenuation
0.25 dB/km
chromatic dispersion of the fiber
18 ps/nm/km
penalty
1 dB
Attenuation range
min = +17(18)
max = +15 (37)1
35 dB
51 dB
Minimum span length (35dB/0.25)
140 Km
Maximum span length

(due to attenuation: 51dB/0.25)
204 Km
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note (*): Preamplifier Optical characteristics are reported in 1664OA Technical Handbook.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
289 / 436
S1.1, L1.1, L1.2 . Characteristics are given in Table 18.
Optical connectors
FC/PC, SC/PC
Table 18. Parameters specified for STM1 Optical Interfaces
CHARACTERISTICS
UNIT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Nominal bit rate
VALUES
Kbit/s
155 520
S1.1
L1.1
L1.2
12611360
12801335
14801580
MLM
MLM
SLM
nm
nm
dB
7.7
1
30
dBm
dBm
8
15
0
5
0
5
dB
8.2
10
10
dB
012
1028
1028
ps/nm
100
250
1900
Minimum optical return loss of cable plant at S, including any connectors
dB
NA
NA
20

between S and R
dB
NA
NA
25
InGaAs PIN
InGaAs PIN
InGaAs PIN
dBm
dBm
28
8
34
10
34
10
dB

measured at R
dB
14
14
25

Source type
Spectral characteristics:
maximum RMS width

maximum 20 dB width
maximum
minimum

Attenuation range
Maximum dispersion

Type of detector
Mean received power @ BER= 1E10:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
maximum (overload)
Note :
NA = Not Applicable
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
290 / 436

4.2.4 Optical Tributary units

4.2.5 140/STM1 Switch Tributary

Selection between 140 Mbit/s and STM1
Through SW setting
Type of Interface
Electrical, ITUT Rec. G.703 compliant
Bit rate
139264 Kbit/s 15 ppm, or 155 520Kbit/s 20ppm
Code
CMI
Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal
012 dB at 70MHz with law f.

012.7 dB at 78MHz with law f.
Return loss
15dB at 7210 MHz 15dB at 8240 MHz
Pulse shape
G.703, Fig.19, 20
G.703, Fig.24, 25
4.2.6 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB.

Type of interface
Electrical, according to ITUT Rec. G703
Bit Rate
34368 Kbit/s 20 ppm
No. of tributaries
Code
HDB3
Signal amplitude
1Vp/75ohms
012dB at 17.184kHz with law f
Return loss
12 dB 8601720 kHz

18 dB 172034368 kHz
14 dB 3436851550 kHz
Pulse shape
as per Fig.17 of ITUT Rec. G.703
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.2.7 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB.

Type of interface
Electrical, according to ITUT Rec. G703 and to

ANSI TS 102 Rec.
Bit rate
44.736 Kbit/s 20ppm
No. of tributaries
Code
B3ZS
Signal amplitude
According to ITUT Rec. G.703 par.5.8 and ANSI

T1 102 Rec, Tab.5
According to ANSI T1 102, Annex A2.5
Pulse shape
as per Fig.14 of ITUT Rec.G.703 or per Fig.14 of

ANSI T1 102 Rec.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
291 / 436
Type of interface
Electrical, according to EN 500839
Bit rate
270 Mbit/s
No. of tributaries
Code
8B /10B code
Signal amplitude
0.8 Vp/75 ohms
Managed bit rate
1.44 to 38.9 Mbit/s

4.2.8 DVB TRIB.
4.2.9 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.

Type of interface
Bit rate
2048Kbit/s 50ppm
No. of tributaries
21
Code
HDB3
Signal amplitude
3Vp/120ohms, or 2.37/75ohms (bal/unbal.)
06dB at 1024kHz with law f.
Return loss
12 dB 51102 kHz

18 dB 1022048 kHz
14 dB 20483072 kHz
Pulse shape
as per Fig.15 of ITUT Rec.G.703
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.2.10 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB.

Type of interface
Bit rate
1544 Kbit/s 50 ppm
No. of tributaries
21
Code
B8ZS
Signal amplitude
3Vp/100 ohms
Pulse shape
as per Fig.15 of ITUT Rec.G.703
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
292 / 436

4.2.11 Clock Reference Units

Selectable input reference clock
2048 Kbit/s Tributaries,

Aggregates, STM1 Tributaries and 2048 kHz
external clock 2
Number of selected clock (normal mode)
6 max Internal and 6 max external reference
Output clock (to external)
2048 kHz
Other local frequencies
Freerun mode 4.6 ppm (CRU PLL without

reference)
Holdover mode drift 1.0 ppm max./day (CRU PLL
with stored frequency for more than half an hour, in
absence of selected input reference)
The Enhanced CRU version has an holdover
stability of 0.37ppm max./day and complies with
ITUT G.814.
Accepted drift
10 ppm
Switch free run/normal mode
< 4 sec.
Time for which the holdover is maintained
Permanent
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
External Clock characteristics

Frequency
2048 kHz 50 ppm
Pulse shape
as per Fig.21 or ITUT Rec. G.703
Input/output impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
293 / 436
Speech Channel Interface
Frontpanel telephone jack / external access with

Extension AUX EOW Unit
Impedance
600 ohms
Operating current
8 mA
Tx level
0 dBr
Rx level
4 dBr
Code
DTMF compliant with ITUT Rec. Q.23

selective call=10 99
conference call=00
Analog EOW Extension (with AUX/EOW Extension unit only)

Impedance
600 ohms
Bandwidth
3003400 Hz
Tx level
0 dBr 0.5 dB
Rx level
0 dBr 0.5 dB
Externally accessible data channel.
3x64 Kbit/s, G.703 codirectional

3x9600 baud, V11 contradirectional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
64 Kbit/s Codirectional Interface

Bit rate
64 Kbit/s 100 ppm
Timing signals
64 Kbit/s and 8 kHz transmitted in a codirectional

manner together with the informative signal
Tx bearer
Two balanced pairs (120 ohms): one per route
Code Conversion rules
CCITT Rec. G.703
Outgoing symbol rate
256 Kbaud
Outgoing pulse shape
as per Fig.5 of CCITT Rec.G.703
Output Interface characteristics
As per CCITT Rec. G.703, Table 1.
Incoming Interface characteristics
as per the outgoing interface but modified by the

characteristics of the interconnection pair.
The input circuit can accept an 0 3 dB attenuated
signal at 128 kHz.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
294 / 436

4.2.12 AUX/EOW units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

64Kbit/s oversampled 9600baud contradirectional interface

Type
electrical, according to CCITT Rec. V11 (X.27
Input Receivers impedance
< 6Kohms
Rx Receivers levels
1 or OFF < 0.3V

0 or ON > +0.3V
The receives are provided with a settable 120ohms line termination resistance
Differential drivers output
2v (Min)
Max DTEDCE distance
1000m
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
295 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
No. of power supply units
2+1 standby
Input voltage
48/60Vdc. Allowed variations:

3857 Vdc, 5072 Vdc
Power drained by load
220W
(1651SM equipped with three 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.
units, and four 140/155 Mbit/s Trib. units)
Power supply units output voltages
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1 3%
ED

4.3 Power Supply Characteristics
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
296 / 436

4.4 Alarm Characteristics

Each unit of the equipment (excluding the DC/DC converter) is provided with a red LED on the front
coverplate. This LED glows to indicate a failure inside the unit; the green LED on the DC/DC converter
darkens to indicate failure.
The green LED on the Aggregate unit and the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary glows to indicate regular
operation.
All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the Equipment Controller unit which will deliver
centralized optical indications. Specifically:
Red LED (7) : detection of an urgent alarm

Red LED (6) : detection of a not urgent alarm
Yellow LED (4) : detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks,
forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
Yellow LED (3) : detection of an indication alarm
The generation of the RNURG and RURG commands on behalf of the Equipment Controller and
ANDOR function housed in the Alarm & Service Access Module subunit depends on the type of alarm
detected. The commands light up the relative general red alarm LEDs at the top of the rack housing the
equipment.
The detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (10). This operation will turn OFF the
general red LEDs and light up the yellow LED on the rack and yellow LED (5) on the Equipment Controller
unit.
The detected alarm can be automatically stored, when one or both station batteries fail.
The Equipment Controller unit delivers remote alarms.
Refer to para 5.3.4.1 on page 345 for the detailed list.
The ANDOR function housed in the Alarm & Service Access Module subunit delivers the following remote
alarms:
TOR : Failure or loss of one station battery
TAND : Failure or loss of both station batteries
The alarm condition is GROUND contact, except for the TUP (open contact)
Eight (the first three available to the customer ) incoming contacts CPI, and the outgoing contacts CPO,
are used for alarm indication (CPO are not operative in this release).
Characteristics of the cited remote alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are inserted
in Chapter 4.1 on page 279.
The Equipment Controller unit has been designed to dialogue with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to
service, activate and troubleshoot the equipment.
All these function are described in the Operators handbook, detailing the alarms of each card and relevant
indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Connection with the PC is achieved through connector (9) available on the unit.
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
The characteristics of the management interfaces are specified in para 4.1 on page 279 .
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
297 / 436
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

The characteristics of the management interfaces are specified in para 4.1 on page 279 .
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
298 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.5 Mechanical Characteristics

Mechanical compatibility
ETSI ETS/EE3, S9
Dimensions
483 Wx280 Dx788 H mm
Weight
4045 Kg. depending on configuration
Cooling
Natural
Wiring
accessible from the front
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
299 / 436
4.6 Environmental conditions

4.6.1 Climatic for operating conditions

The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans.
The functionality of the 1651SM Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with :
ETS 300 01913 :1992 , class 3.2.
Class 3.2 :
Partly temperaturecontrolled locations.
This class applies to a closed location having neither temperature nor humidity control.
(see climatogram on Figure 110. on page 301)
When STM16 aggregates is used, the system is in compliance with:
ETS 300 01913 : 1992, class 3.1
Class 3.1
Temperaturecontrolled locations.
4.6.1.1 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations

This applies to locations:
where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open
windows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitation;
where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to negligible vibrations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The conditions of this class may be found in :
entrances and staircases of buildings;
garages;
cellars;
certain workshops;
buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
unattended equipment stations;
certain telecommunication buildings;
ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, ect.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
300 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

29
ED
955.100.562 K
95
Figure 110. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
07
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
301 / 436
4.6.1.2 Class 3.1:Temperaturecontrolled locations
This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not
controlled. The climatogram is shown in Figure 111.
50
45
40
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
35
30
20
10
5
0
5
25
20
10
1.5
1.0
20
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
60
30
40
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Exceptional climatic limits.
Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits

have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
Values outside this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
72130 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 111. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations

Heating. cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used as necessary to maintain the required
conditions especially where there is a significant difference between the room environment and the
external high or low temperatures are prevented.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
302 / 436

This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 72133 [3].
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This class applies to locations:
where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected
to condensed water, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing;
without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product
design, or installations at locations of such construction that module growth and attacks by animals,
etc. are not probable;
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
proximity to sources of sand or dust;
with insignificant vibration and shock.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);
offices;
shops;
workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;
telecommunication centers;
storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
303 / 436
4.6.2 Storage
ETS 300 01911 : 1992, class 1.2

Class 1.2 : weatherprotected, not temper. controlled storage location.
This class applies to weatherprotected storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Figure 112. on page 305.
This class applies to storage locations :
where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They may
also be subjected to limited winddriven precipitation including snow;
where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The conditions of this class may occur in :
unattended buildings ;
some entrances of buildings ;
some garages and shacks.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
304 / 436

The 1651SM /1661SMC and 1641SMD equipment meet the following requirements Vs. Storage :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

29
Figure 112. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
305 / 436
4.6.3 Transportation
ETS 300 01912 : 1992, class 2.2
Class 2.2 : Careful transportation (see Table 19. on page 307 ).

This class applies to transportation where special cars has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with welldeveloped road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shockreducing buffers. Manual
loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.
Extension of extreme low temperature during transportation is permitted for the 1651SM/1661SMC
equipment in its standard packing :
AT 40 C for 72 Hours maximum
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
without damaging the Optical interfaces.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
306 / 436

The 1641SM equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :

Table 19. Transportation climatic
Environmental parameter
(A) low temperature air
in
Unit
2.1 and 2.2
2.3
25
40
(B)
high temperature, air

enclosures (NOTE 1)
unventilated
+ 70
+ 70
(C)
high temperature, air in ventilated enclosures

or outdoor air (NOTE 2)
+ 40
+ 40
25 / +30
40 / +30
+40 / +5
+40 / +5
relative humidity, not combined with rapid

temperature changes
%
C
95
+40
95
+45
relative humidity, combined with rapid

(G) temperature changes air/air, at high relative
humidity (NOTE 3 , 6)
95
95
25 / +30
40 / +30
absolute humidity, combined with rapid

(H) temperature changes : air/air at high water
content (NOTE 4)
s/m3
60
60
+70 / +15
+70 / +15
(I)
low air pressure
KPa
70
70
(J)
change of air pressure
KPa/min
no
no
m/s
20
20
mm/min
6 (NOTE 7)
(M) radiation, solar
W/m2
1120
1120
(N) radiation, heat
W/m2
600
600
m/s
1 (NOTE 7)
(D) change of temperature air/air
(NOTE 3)
(E) change of temperature air/water

(F)
(NOTE 3)
(K) movement of the surrounding medium, air

(L)
precipitation rain
(O) water from sources other than rain (NOTE 5)

(P) wetness
none
conditions of wet surfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Notes on next page.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
307 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE 1 :
The high temperature of the surfaces of a product may be influenced by both the
surrounding air temperature, given here, and the solar radiation through a window or
another opening.
NOTE 2 :
The high temperature of the surface of a product is influenced by the surrounding air
temperature, given here, and the solar radiation defined below.
NOTE 3 :
A direct transfer of the product between the two given temperature is presumed.
NOTE 4 :
The product is assumed to be subjected to a rapid decrease of temperature only (no

rapid increase). The figures of water content apply to temperatures down to the
dewpoint; at lower temperatures the relative humidity is assumed to be approximately
100 %.
NOTE 5 :
The figure indicates the velocity of water and not the height of water accumulated.
NOTE 6 :
Occurrence of condensation.
NOTE 7 :
For short duration only.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
308 / 436

Notes to Table 19. :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSTALLATION
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
309 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
310 / 436
5 INSTALLATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
4.1.1 on page 31.
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front panel labels prior working on optical connections
while the equipment is inservice.
N.B.
ED
A multilingual ( Italian, Spanish, French, German) Safety label is included in the STMN
Optical Units prepacking. The user can substitute the default English label with one of the
available.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
311 / 436
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during

movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds
50 Kg. Use material-handling equipment to lift equipment.
5.1.1 General
The following procedures have been issued and must be observed when unpacking the equipment.
The reciprocal operation must be done for repacking. In such case it is recommended to use the original
packing material.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following sturdy outer packing material is utilized in order to protect the equipment against mechanical
and climatic stresses to which they are subjected:
wooden crates
for transport by ship, air, on road for periods longer than 60 days
plywood crates
for transport by ship, air, on road for periods of 30 to 60 days
cardboard boxes
for transport by air or on road for periods of less than 30 days
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
312 / 436

5.1 Unpacking and Warehousing
5.1.2 Unpacking

PRELIMINARY CHECKS
The following information should be printed on the outer crate:
International symbols
side up :
keep dry
fragile
trade mark/address of the manufacturing company;

labels (or templated marks) indicating information on the contract and destination site of
the product;
an envelope holding among others the packing list
Upon receipt check:
that the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label;
that no damage was made to the cases

Report any shipping damages to the Companys representative or the Shipping Agent.
UNPACKING
When having to unpack proceed as follows:
symbol
Make sure that the paking has been properly positioned, refer to the
open the case;
remove the shockproof material;
remove the goods from the case;
remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection;
remove the plastic bags cellotaped to the rack and containing accessories;
remove the dehydrating bags;
ascertain that the goods are not damaged and that they correspond to those indicated on the
packing list enclosed in the envelope. Conversely, contact the agencys representative.
N.B.
When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might be reused for packing
again if it must be reshipped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5.1.3 Warehousing
If having to store the packed material, the following requirements must be met:
the cardboard boxes must be placed indoors in airy rooms;
the wooden or plywood cases can be placed outdoors, provided they are protected against rain
and direct sunlight.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
313 / 436
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during

movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds
50 Kg. Use material-handling equipment to lift equipment.
5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack
The subracks can be inserted into the 19 standard racks or in the 21 N3LC, S9 and Optinex rack.
The paragraphs that follow illustrate the procedure adopted for all.
5.2.1.1 19 racks
Insert the subrack into the position assigned to it.
Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (7) into the holes on the joint plates (8)
and screw them fasting to the corresponding holes on the brackets (1) of the rack.
5.2.1.2 21 rack (N3LC, S9 and Optinex)
SAFETY RULES
Subrack fastening to the rack ensures ground protection in that the rack is
wireconnected to the station protection ground.
S9 Rack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Screw (7) fasten the 19/21 adaptors (9) to the subrack joint plate (8).
Insert the retainer nuts (2) into the four holes on the brackets (1).
NOTE to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (11) to
the rack by means of additional retainer nuts (2) set next to one of the two internal holes on the
19/21 adaptor (9).
Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (11)
Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (10) into the holes on the 19/21 adaptors
(9) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes (with retainer nuts) on the brackets (1)
of the rack.
Remove the special screws (11)

07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
314 / 436

5.2 Mechanical Installation

N3LC Rack
Locate the four holes on the bracket (1) used to fasten the subrack.
Carry out the following operations only on the two upper fastening holes ( see detail on
Figure 113. ):
Insert the retainer nuts (2) into the square (3) and into the bracket (1).
Fasten the square (3) to the bracket by inserting the screw (4) into the hole (5) and tighten
it into the corresponding hole (6).
N.B. to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (11) to the
rack by means of additional retainer nuts (2) set next to one of the two internal holes on the
19/21 adaptor (9).
Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (11).
Insert the other two retainer nuts into the two lower fastening holes.
Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (10) into the holes on the 19/21 adaptors
(9) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes (with retainer nuts) on the brackets (1)
of the rack.
Remove the special screws (11).
1
11
2
8
3
4
6
10
7
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FOR N3LC RACK ONLY
Figure 113. Subrack insertion into the rack
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
315 / 436
Optinex Rack
N.B. to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (4) to the
rack set next to one of the two internal holes on the 19/21 adaptor (2).
Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (4)
Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (5) into the holes on the 19/21
adaptors (2) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes on the brackets (6) of the rack.
Remove the special screws (4).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 114. Subrack insertion into Optinex rack
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
316 / 436

5.2.2 Mounting the Union Duct for the fiberguide duct

(See Figure 115. ).

The subrack is supplied with the fiberguide cable duct already mounted.
As regards mounting the right and left union duct it is enough to remove the cableduct cover and fasten
the union duct as indicated in the figure.
The union duct are inserted in the various Installation Set (see Table 21. on page 324).
The figure only refer to an S9 type rack, the N3 rack is inserted like S9 but concavity is different.
1
COVER
2
LEFT UNION DUCT
3
RIGHT
UNION DUCT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 115. Mounting the union duct for the fiberguide duct
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
317 / 436
The subrack is fitted with particular mechanical devices which permit to obtain functions in compliancy
with the International Norms associated to EMC.
Some of these devices are illustrated and crossreferred to in Figure 116. The relative reference numbers
are within brackets [ ].
The subrack consists of:
Mechanical structure consisting of two side walls (8) joined by six plates (4)
Rear p.c.b. (2) utilized for the subrack wiring
The front part of space (9) and that of the subrack base can accommodate a cable duct for the optical
fibers connected to the units front panels.
Rear cover (1) for the protection of the rear p.c.b. (2)
Cellular protection shields [3] to protect the equipment against interferences and at the same
time permitting air to circulate inside
Guides (7) facilitating unit (13) vertical insertion. Special mechanical devices are provided to
prevent the unit from being inserted upside down
Lugs (5) provided with holes (6) into which the fixing screws are inserted.
Guides (14) facilitating access modules vertical insertion.
To withdraw one unit (13) first unscrew (10), grip the levers (11) and then pull out the unit.
The unit is provided with a finger [12] which guarantees continuity to the ground connections between the
unit and the subrack. Another way to guarantee continuity to the ground connections is to tighten the
screws (10) on all the unit front cover panels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To withdraw an access module , first unscrew (15) , grip the lever (16) and then pull out the unit.
With regard to sub equipped subracks, the empty spaces are covered with dummy plates.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
318 / 436

5.2.3 Mechanical Structure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

15
ED
955.100.562 K
16
1
14
3
9
5
8
4
10
11
12
13
Figure 116. Mechanical structure of the subrack
07
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
319 / 436
SAFETY RULES
The whole installation must be executed without powering the equipment.
Protection ground connection must be the first operation.
Power Supply connection must be the last to be executed.
FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK
The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) into
the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
WARNING FOR STM-16 AGGREGATES
Locking and unlocking the coaxial cables carrying out the pass-through function on STM-16
aggregates must be done using the special tool P/N 1AD 02412 0001 (Factory P/N
245.701.833R).
Carrying out this operation with different tools may result in cable damage.
HANDLING OPTICAL FIBERS
When handling optical fibers, there is a possibility of equipment damage. Observe the following
warnings:
Avoid twisting or crossing one cable over another.
Do not bend or dress cables at less than 1-inch bend radius.
Avoid excess cable length in breakout area.
Avoid bunching cables in a tight clump with cable clamp or tie strap.
Place excess fiber-optic cable into fiber storage. Optical fibers located inside optical
modules are delicate and can easily be damaged. Use extreme care when handling optical
fibers.
ESD PROTECTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The equipment is supplied with several connectors (services, alarms, housekeeping, etc)
covered by protection cups (ESD protection). The installer must respect the ESD precaution
presented at para.4.2 on page 33. At the end of the installation phase all the previous
connectors not used for cabling must be covered with the relevant protection cups.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
320 / 436

5.3 Electrical and Optical Installation

The installation wiring is connected at the top of the subrack through the terminal tagblocks and connectors
mounted on Access Modules subunits inserted on the subracks backpanel. The optical connections,
those of the aggregate and those of the STM1 optical tributary are directly wired on the units. Also the
STM16 Aggregate passthrough connection are directly wired on the units.
Figure 117. on page 322 illustrates all the connection points on the equipment.
Table 20. on page 323 reports the connection points number for each function, and the paragraph where
it is described.
Each paragraph also indicates:
pin assignment table
information on the adaptors/connectors supplied with the equipment to mount on the relevant
Access Module.
Connections are established through the connectors situated on the Access Modules front coverplate.
The Access Modules are inserted into the slots assigned to them and in compliancy with the configuration
of the tributaries to connect.
The relationship between Tributaries and Access Module Slots are illustrated in Figure 119. on page 329.
Table 21. on page 324 shows the parts making up the installation sets.
Table 22. on page 327 shows the cables suggested to setup the connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The tables associated to each terminal connector also refer to these cables.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
321 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WITH STM16 AGG
WITH OPTICAL STM1 TRIBUTARY

or DVB TRIB
ED
955.100.562 K
G
G
G
H
I
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
WITH STM4 AGGREGATE
L M
SLOT
SLOT
Figure 117. Connection points for installation
07
322 / 436

Table 20. Numbering, functions and paragraphs referred to the Connection Points
ACCESS
MODULE
SLOT OR
ACCESS
POINT
CONNECTOR
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
PARA
Ground Connection
5.3.1
21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary

G
21x2 Mbit/s Tributary

34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm Conn.
5.3.2
3x34/45 Mbit/s
H
140/155 Mbit/s
Q INT
QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod. Q2 Interface
SYNC
QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod. Synch. Interf.
10B2 / 10BT
QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod. QB3 Interf.
RA
Alarm Interf. Acc. Mod. Remote Alarm
R/M
Alarm Interf. Acc. Mod. RM int. (Rack Lamps)
5.3.4
Auxiliary Data Channel Connection
64 K
Auxiliary Data Channel Connection
5.3.5
(3), (4)
DVB Tributaries Connections
5.3.6
(1), (2),
(3), (4)
STM4 Aggregate and STM1 tributary Optical

Connections
5.3.7
(5), (6)
STM16 Aggregate Optical Connections
5.3.8
(7)
STM16 Aggregate passthrough electrical connections
(8)
IECB electrical connection to/from DROP SHELF
5.3.9
(9)
Interface F connection for local P.C.
5.3.10
M
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Voice Channel
V11
HK
ED
5.3.3
5.3.8.2
Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. Housekeeping
BATT 1
Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. Station Battery 1
BATT 2
Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. Station Battery 2
5.3.11
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
323 / 436
NAME
S9 Installation set
Made up of:
Max.
Q.ty
299.701.454 U
(3AL 34259 AA)
SUB.D15P fixed male connector
040.311.550 T
(1AB 00311 0022)
Connector holder
040.395.140 V
(1AB 00603 0063)
Cord, plug, Alarms (S9)
041.931.011 R
(3AL 34289 AA)
Cord, plug, Alim/2 (S9)
041.931.031 M
(3AL 37789 AA)
232.790.019 L
(1AD 00292 0016)
Special screws
231.901.051 F
(3AN 41257 AA)
Right Union for Duct
209.001.111 Q
(3AN 42967 AA)
Left Union for Duct
209001112 R
(3AN 42968 AA)
ETSI Installation set

Made up of:
299.701.475 Z
(3AL 34258 AA)
Retainer Nut M6 S = 1.7/2.7
040.311.550 T
(1AB 00311 0022)
NC 3p.SUBD female connector
040.300.923 X
(1AB 04097 0009)
H.P. female contact
040.325.550 Z
(1AB 05009 0003)
H.P. male contact
040.315.551 L
(1AB 05009 0002)
Connector holder
040.395.140 V
(1AB 00603 0063)
041.710.004 R
(3AL 34964 AA)
Retainer Nut M6 S=1.7/2.5
232.790.016 H
(1AD 00292 0002)
Special screws
231.901.051 F
(3AN41257AA)
Cord, alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PART No.
(continues)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
324 / 436

Table 21. Parts making up the installation set
PART No.
Max.
Q.ty
GND cord
041.991.609K
(3AL37409AA)
209001113 J
(3AN 43233 AA)
Left Union for Duct
209001114 D
(3AN 43234 AA)
Optinex installation kit

Made up of:
299.701.598 V
(3AL37982AA)
040.311.550 T
(1AB003110022)
Connector holder
040.395.140 V
(1AB006030063)
Cord, Alarms
041.710.004 R
(3AL34964AA)
Cord plug, Alim/2 S9
041.931.031 M
(3AL37789AA)
Special screws
231.901.051 F
(3AN41257AA)
209.001.111 Q
(3AN 42967 AA)
Left Union for Duct
209001112 R
(3AN 42968 AA)

NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(continues)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
325 / 436
Max.
Q.ty
543.159.606 Z
(3AL 34257 AA)
Male connector 9ways
040.310.952 V
(1AB 00311 0045)
Sub.D9P metal holder
040.395.141 J
(1AB 00603 0062)
299.701.407W
(3AL 34521 AA)
23
Male connector 15ways
040.311.550 T
(1AB 003110022)
Sub.D15P metal holder
040.395.140 V
(1AB 00603 0063)
1.5/5.6 male coax. connector 8.5 mm
040.142.080 P
(1AB 00987 0005)
51
1.5/5.6 male coax. connector 5.9 mm
040.142.067 M
(1AB 00987 0004)
51
1.0/2.3 (3 mm) male coax. connector
040.144.001 N
(1AB 06122 0003)
177
1.0/2.3 (6 mm) male coax. connector
040.144.002 P
(1AB 06122 0004)
177
15m. long SM 1A FC / PC single fiber splice
041.897.045 S
(1AB 07983 0001)
24
SM JUMPER FC/PC ( 20m. fiber splice )
041.897.043 Y
(1AB 07984 0001)
24
10m. single fiber splice with FC/PC connector
041.897.012 R
(1AB 07984 0002)
24
16A Circuit Breaker
001.700.121 J
(1AB 02438 0012)
Circuit Breaker 15A 72 Vdc
001.791.356 L
(1AB 16271 0006)
Hook/Unhook Tool
245.701.833 R
(1AD 02412 0001)
CONNECTORS FOR TRIBS. and SYNCH

120 ohm connector kit (9 pins)
Made up of:
120 ohm connector kit (15 pins)

Made up of:
coax.connector:
OPTICAL CONNECTIONS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OTHER PARTS
end table
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
326 / 436

PART No.
NAME

Table 22. Suggested cabling
REF
CABLE TYPE
CONNECTION TYPE
DIA (mm) or SECT.

(mm2)
INT.
EXT.
TELETTRA P/N.
(NV / PN)
NOTE
Coax. 75 Ohm
3mm
solder/crimp
3.1 max.
049.475.400 Y
(1AC 00110 0013)
Coax. 75 Ohm
6mm
solder/crimp
5.9 max.
049.475.406 J
(1AC 00788 0001)
8pair shielded
wire wrap
0.4
7.5 max.
049.720.406 T
(1AC014910008)
Shielded power
cable pair
solder
1.5
6 max.
049.613.400 S
(1AC011900001)
1,2
8pair shielded
wire wrap
wire wrap
0.6
9.5 max.
049.722.400 X
(1AC014260004)
1,2
Coax. 75 Ohm
solder/crimp
0.5
4.8 max.
049.475.403P
Coax. cable
crimp
2.8 max.
049.450.407 W
(1AC009310001)
0.5
1AC003450001
2pair twisted
shield
Crimp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE :
1 = terminate with connectors supplied
2 = connect shield to holder
3 = terminate with RJ45 shielded connector ( 1AB074610007 )
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
327 / 436
SAFETY RULES
This connections has priority over all the others.

N3LC racks
(see Figure 118. )
Connect the yellow/green ground cord (1) to screw (2) and the rack ground bar (3)
The ground cord (041.991.609 K) is comprised in ETSI installation set (see Table 21. on page 324.)
Other rack types
Ground protection is ensured by the subracks mechanical fastening.
See para 5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack on page 314.
2
3
FRONT VIEW
LEFT SIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 118. Protection ground connections for N3 LC racks
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
328 / 436

5.3.1 Protection ground connections
5.3.2 Electrical Tributary connections

F
TRIB. TYPE
TRIBUTARY
SLOT
11
12
13
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY SPARE 2
ACCESS MODULE
RELEVANT SLOT
21x2/1.5 Mbit/s o
Tmux 5 x 2 Mbit/s
first G
(120 or 75
With 1.0/2.3 or T.43 Connection)
second G
third G
S
L
O
T
E
DC DC CONVERTER
10
TRIBUTARY
NOT USED
9
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
FULL MATRIX SPARE
NOT USED
NOT USED
5
FULL MATRIX MAIN
TRIBUTARY SPARE 1
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
S
L
O
T
TRIBUTARY
NOT USED

NOTE
When the Access Module

slots G are utilised
to house 21x2MB Access
Module, the first tree H
slots have not to be used.
Slot 6 is used
for N+1 Spare
34 / 45, 140/155 Mb/s

(75 With 1.0/2.3 or T.43 or
1.6/5.6 Connection )
2 to 5 & 9 to12
(*)
H (*)
Slot 6 and 13 are used

for N+1 Spare
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(*) The TRIB Slots and the relevant Access Module Slots are univocally determined: Slot 2 connected to the first Slot H .. Slot 12
connected to the last Slot H.
Figure 119. Tributary units and Access Module subunits relationship
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
329 / 436
Mount the Access Module onto the slots involved as indicated on Figure 117. on page 322 .
Wire the tributaries onto module using the SUBD 15pole.
Close the connector into the relevant holder.

The SUBD 15pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (see Table 21. on
page 324).
Insert the male SUBD connectors into the female ones .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 120. on page 331, provides data on modules and pins.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
330 / 436

5.3.2.1 1.5 Mbit/s (100 ohms) Tributary Connection

PIN
Tx
Rx
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PIN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FUNCTION (NB1)
GND
TRIBUTARY 7 , NEGATIVE SIDE
TRIBUTARY 7 , POSITIVE SIDE
FUNCTION (NB1)
GND
TRIBUTARY 14, NEGATIVE SIDE
FUNCTION (NB1)
GND
TRIBUTARY18 , POSITIVE SIDE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
Figure 120. 1.5 Mbit/s (100 Ohm) Tributary Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
331 / 436
5.3.2.2 2 Mbit/s Tributary Connection
The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributaries can be connected through the Access Modules carrying the following
connector type:
Coax 75 OHM
Balanced 120 OHM conn.
5.3.2.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributary Connection 75 OHM

See :Figure 121.
Mount the Access Module onto the G slot involved.
Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either:
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (see Table 21. on page 324.)
the coax. T43 connector cable
Figure 121. , shows data on modules and pins.

NOTE:
For type 43 module no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.

2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
8
1
16
PIN
J1
J21
15
7
21
8
1
16
J1
FUNCTION (NB1)
J1
TRIBUTARY 1
J2
TRIBUTARY 2
J3
TRIBUTARY 3
J4
TRIBUTARY 4
J5
TRIBUTARY 5
J6
TRIBUTARY 6
J7
TRIBUTARY 7
J8
TRIBUTARY 8
J9
TRIBUTARY 9
J10
TRIBUTARY 10
J11
TRIBUTARY 11
J12
TRIBUTARY 12
J13
TRIBUTARY 13
J14
TRIBUTARY 14
J15
TRIBUTARY 15
J16
TRIBUTARY 16
J17
TRIBUTARY 17
J18
TRIBUTARY 18
J19
TRIBUTARY 19
J20
TRIBUTARY 20
J21
TRIBUTARY 21
NB 1: TX AND RX TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
CABLE (*)
1 or 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE: (*) the cable number is referred to Table 22. on page 327.
Figure 121. 2 Mbit/s (75 ohms) Tributary Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
332 / 436

Refer to the Chapter 2 Configuration on page 65.
5.3.2.2.2 2 Mbit/s (120 ohms) Tributary Connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See:Figure 122. on page 334.
Wire the tributaries onto module using the SUBD 15pole for the 21x 2 Mbit/s

The SUBD 15pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (seeTable 21. on
page 324.
Insert the male sub D connector into the female one.
Figure 122. on page 334, provides data on modules and pins.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
333 / 436
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PIN
14
14
15
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
FUNCTION (NB1)
GND
TRIBUTARY 14, NEGATIVE SIDE
CABLE (*)
CABLE (*)
21
21
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FUNCTION (NB1)

PIN
FUNCTION (NB1)
GND
TRIBUTARY18 , POSITIVE SIDE
CABLE (*)
Figure 122. 2 Mbit/s (120 Ohm) Tributary Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
334 / 436
5.3.2.3 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Connections

Refer to the Chapter 2 on page 65.

The Trans Mux Tributaries can be connected through the Access Modules carrying the following
connector type:
Coax 75 OHM
Balanced 120 OHM conn.
5.3.2.3.1 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm
Mount the Access Module onto G slot involved.

The type of module depends on the type of connector.
Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either:
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (seeTable 21. on page 324).
For type 43 module, no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.
5.3.2.3.2 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm

See :Figure 123. on page 336
Wire the 2 Mbit/s channel onto the first module using the SUBD 15pole.

The SUBD 15pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (seeTable 21. on
page 324).
Wire the 34 Mbit/s stream onto the modules utilizing either:
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (seeTable 21. on page 324).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 123. on page 336 shows data on modules and pins for both 2 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s streams.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
335 / 436
34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FUNCTION (NB1)
CABLE (*)
GND
GND
GND
GND
PIN
FUNCTION (NB1)
CABLE (*)
J1
TRIBUTARY 6 TO 34 Mbit/s
1 or 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 123. 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary connections 120 Ohm.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
336 / 436

PIN
5.3.2.4 3x34/45 Mbit/s, 140 and STM1 Tributary Connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See :Figure 124. on page 338.
Mount the Access Module onto the terminal tagblock assigned to the H slot involved.
The type of module depends on the frequency of the tributary and on the type of connector.
Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either (seeTable 21. on page 324).:
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 6mm. cable
the 1.6/5.6 75 ohms male coax. connector for 4,8mm. cable
Figure 124. on page 338 and Figure 125. on page 338 provide data on modules and pins.
For type 43 module, no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
337 / 436

34/45 Mbit/s TRIBUTAYR CONNECTION

J1
PIN
J2
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J3
J4
FUNCTION (NB1)
CABLE (*)
TRIBUTARY 1 Tx
TRIBUTARY 2 Tx
TRIBUTARY 3 Tx
TRIBUTARY 1 Rx
TRIBUTARY 2 Rx
TRIBUTARY 3 Rx
1 or 2
J5
J6
Figure 124. 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tributary connections
J1
140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Connection

PIN
J4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
J1
J4
FUNCTION
CABLE (*)
TRIBUTARY 1 Tx
TRIBUTARY 1 Rx
1 or 2
Figure 125. 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
338 / 436
5.3.3 Qx & Synch. Interface Access Module

(Refer to Figure 126. and to Figure 127. on page 340 )

Qx and Synchronism signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the Access
Module inserted into slot I.
The subunit P/Ns are given in the Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections are given in para 5.3.3.1 on page 341, 5.3.3.2 on page 342,
5.3.3.3 on page 343, 5.3.3.3.1 on page 343 and para 5.3.3.3.2 on page 343.
There are two alternative subunits according to connector type housed on the Access Module to connect
the Synchronism signals (3), (4) with reference with the Figure 126.
As shown in Figure 126. on page 339, ref. (1), (2) and Figure 127. on page 340, ref (1) the The Qx &
Synch. and Qx 10 BT & Synch. access modules differ by the connector type of the interface towards the
TMN ( 10 base 2 or 10 Base T respectively) .
S
L
O
T
I
Q INT
Q INT
5
SYNC
I1
SYNC
I2
3
OUT
2
10B2
10B2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD MODULE 75

1.0/2.3 OR TYPE 43
MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD

MODULE 120
Figure 126. Management of Qx & Sync Access Module Connectors
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
339 / 436

SLOT I
MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD MODULE 75

1.0/2.3 OR TYPE 43
MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD

MODULE 120
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 127. Management of Access Module Connectors Qx 10 BT & Synch
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
340 / 436
5.3.3.1 Q2 Interface Connections

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339 . and to Figure 128. )

These connections are possible through the use of terminal tagblock (5) and the relevant 15p. male
connector and suitable long cable.
(Refer toTable 21. on page 324).
CONN. ACRONYM
Q INT
15
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
GND
Ground
TxA
19.2 Kbit/s data Tx, A
RxA
19.2 Kbit/s data Rx, A
CkA
Clock A
TxB
19.2 Kbit/s data Tx, B
10
TxSH
11
RxB
12
RxSH
13
CkB
Clock B
14
GND
Ground
CABLE(*)
3
9
FRONT VIEW
Input data shield

19.2 Kbit/s data Rx, B
Output data shield
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 128. Q2 Interface connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
341 / 436
5.3.3.2 Synchronism Interface
Wireconnect synch. onto the modules utilizing either:
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector and the 3mm. cable.
the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector and the 6mm. cable.
the coax Type 43 connector.
the subd9p. fixed male connector available in the 120 ohms Connector (9pin) kit
(see Table 21. on page 324).
Figure 129. provides data on modules and pins.

NOTE As regards Type 43 modules, no type of connectors are supplied for synch. wiring.
75 ohms SYNCHRONISMS CONNECTION
CONN. ACRONYM
SYNC
PIN
I1
I1
I2
I2
OUT
OUT
FUNCTION
CABLE(*)
Incoming Synchronism A
1 or 6
Incoming synchronism B
Outgoing Synchronism
120 ohms SYNCHRONISMS CONNECTION

CONN. ACRONYM
SYNC
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
CKOUTC
GND
CKINCB
Positive input clock B
CKINCA
Positive input clock A
GND
CKOUTF
GND
CKINFB
Negative input clock B
CKINFA
Negative input clock A
CABLE(*)
Positive output clock

Ground
1
6
FRONT VIEW
Ground
Negative output clock

Ground
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 129. Synchronism Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
342 / 436

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339 )
5.3.3.3 QB3 Interface Connection

5.3.3.3.1 10 base 2 Interface Connection

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339)
Connect the BNC connectorterminated coax. cable (10 base 2, thin ethernet cable (7) ) onto
connectors (1) and (2).
5.3.3.3.2 10BT interface connection

Connect the twisted pair cable with male connector RJ45 to the female connector 10BT of the Qx 10 BT
& Synch. access module as shown below:
CONN. ACRONYM
10BT
PIN
ACRONYM
TPTXP
TPTXN
TPRXP
TPRXN
VC
FUNCTION
CABLE(*)
Differential pair for data TX (towards the

Twisted Pair cable)
Differential pair for data RX ( from Twisted
pair cable)
Ground
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 130. 10 BT connection.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
343 / 436
5.3.4 Alarm Interface Access Module Connections
Remote Alarm and Rack Lamp signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the
Access Module inserted into slot L .
Details are given in Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections is given in para.5.3.4.1 on page 345, 5.3.4.2 on page 346,
RA
R/M
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 131. Management of Alarm Interface access module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
344 / 436

(Refer to Figure 131. )
5.3.4.1 Remote Alarm Connections

(Refer to Figure 131. on page 344 and to Figure 132. on page 345 )
The connector and holder are inserted in the N3 ETSI Installation set, or in the S9 Installation set, or in
the Optinex Installation kit, depending on the type of rack utilized.
Wireconnect the remote alarms onto the SUB.D15P fixed male connectors.
Close the connector into its holder.
Insert the male connector into the female one (5).
CONN. ACRONYM
RA
15
FRONT VIEW
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
CABLE(*)
INT
NURG
URG
ORing of all unit Urgent alarms
EXT
External remote alarm
IND
LOSQ2
TOR
ORing of all units local alarms

ORing of all units not Urgent alarms
ORing of all indicative alarms

No connection with the TMN (Interf.Q3)
Remote alarm indicating one station Battery
failure
Remote alarm indicating two station Batteries failure
TAND
10
11
12
13
TUP
14
TORC
ORing of both subracks power supply fail

alarms
15
TANC
Both subracks power supply fail all ANDing.
Alarm storing command

Equipment Controller internal alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 132. Remote Alarms Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
345 / 436
5.3.4.2 R/M Interface connections (Rack lamps)
The connections are established between the modules connector (4) and the terminal tagblock at the top
of the rack (see rack documentation).
A connectorterminated cable is utilized with:
N3 rack
Cord alarms , terminated with SUB.D9P female connector (module side) and with
SUB.D9P male connector (rack side)
Contained in the N3 installation set.
S9 rack
S9 cord plug, alarms terminated with SUB.D25P female connector on the module side,
and with SUB.D25P fixed male connector on the rack side.
Material is inside the S9 installation set.
Optinex rack Cord alarms (P/N.041.710.004 R) terminated with SUB.D9P female connector side
on the M102 side, and with SUB.D9P fixed male connector on the rack side.
Material is inside the Optinex installation kit.
Each connector is provided with a metal holder for the 9pin one, and for the 25pin one.
ACRONYM
TAGBLOCK (4)
R / M
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
VSERVP
Alarm storing command
Yellow storing LED switchon command
RURG
RNURG
Red not urgent LED switchon command
VSERVN
Negative of service battery
CH
TOR
OR of battery source
GND
Ground
Positive of service battery
Red urgent LED switchon command
FRONT VIEW
Green LED switchon command, call received from auxiliary

channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 133. RAB Rack Lamps Interface connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
346 / 436

(Refer to Figure 131. on page 344 and to Figure 133. )
5.3.5 Auxiliary Data Channel Connections


Auxiliary Data Channel signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the Access
Module inserted into slot F.
Details are given in Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections are given in para. 5.3.5.1 on page 348 , 5.3.5.2 on page 349,
3
V11
64K
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 134. Management of Auxiliary Data Channel Access module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
347 / 436
5.3.5.1 EOW Extension Voice Channel connections
Wireconnect EOW extension channels onto the 120 ohm connector (9pins).
Close each connector inside the metal holder (for SUBD 9pin).
Insert the connector into the (3) of Figure 134. one.
CONNECTOR
(3)
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
EFEP
Analog extension positive input
EFUP
Analog extension positive output

3
1
6
FRONT VIEW
CABLE(*)
GND
Ground
EFEN
Analog extension negative Input
EFUN
Analog extension negative output
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 135. EOW extension connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
348 / 436

(Refer to Figure 134. and to Figure 135. on page 348)

5.3.5.2 Auxiliary Data Connections (V11 & 64 Kb)

(Refer to Figure 134. on page 347 and to Figure 136. )
The SUBD15p. fixed male connectors and holders are inside the 120ohms Connection (15p) set
(Refer toTable 21. on page 324).
Wireconnect the Data channels onto the two SUBD15 pin fixed male connectors (15 pins)
respectively for V11 (see Figure 136. ) and 64 K data connections (see Figure 137. on page
350 ).
Close each connector inside its holder .
Insert the connectors into tagblock (2) and (1) with reference to the unit front cover shown in
Figure 31. on page 90..
Insert the male connector into the female one (2) with the acronym V11 or female connector (1)
with the acronym 64 K .
CONN. (2) ACRONYM V11
15
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
CABLE(*)
V11EP1
POS. V11 Tx data input
V11UP1
POS. V11 Rx data output
V11EP2
V11UP2
V11 EP3
V11UP3
GND
V11EN1
NEG. V11 Tx data input
10
V11UN1
NEG. V11 Rx data output
11
V11EN2
NEG. V11 Tx data
12
V11UN2
13
V11EN3
NEG. V11 Tx data input
14
V11UN3
15
FRONT VIEW
Ground
input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 136. V11 auxiliary channels connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
349 / 436
15
FRONT VIEW
PIN
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
D64EP1
POS. 64 Tx data input
D64UP1
POS. 64 Rx data output
D64EP2
D64UP2
D64EP3
D64UP3
D64EN1
NEG. 64 Tx data input
10
D64UN1
NEG. 64 Rx data output
11
D64EN2
NEG. 64 Tx data
12
D64UN2
13
D64EN3
NEG. 64 Tx data input
14
D64UN3
15
CABLE(*)
Ground

CONN. (1) ACRONYM

64 K
input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 137. 64 KBit/s auxiliary channels connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
350 / 436

5.3.6 DVB Tributaries Connections

The connections are made directly on the units which are provided with electrical BNC connector in the
following manner:
Insert the DVB units into the assigned positions as indicated in Chapter 2 on page 65
Connect the cables (Tx side or Rx side for each channell) terminated with a BNC 90 male
coax. connectors onto the connectors on the units front coverplate (see Figure 138. )
Channel input, Tx side

Channel output , Rx side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 138. DVB Tributary Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
351 / 436
5.3.7 STM4, STM1 Optical Connections
The connections are made directly on the units provided with optical interface in the following manner:
Insert the units with optical interfaces into the assigned positions as indicated in Chapter 2
CONFIGURATION on page 65.
The units can either be the Aggregates (at the bottom) or the STM1 optical tributaries
(at the top).
Loosen screw (2) to remove the optical splice protection (1) from the unit.
This protection not only mechanically protects the optical connectors, but acts as a protective
shield against EMI.
Remove the cover from the optical fiber duct. The fiber ducts are both at the top of the structure
(for optical tributary connections) and at the bottom (for the optical aggregate connections).
Figure 139. on page 353 illustrates a typical fiber duct used at the top.
Lay the Tx/Rx single fiber splices into the ducts. The optical fiber splices are specified on
Table 21. on page 324
Pull the single fiber splices out from the holes situated next to the units to which they will be
connected.
Insert the single fiber splice connector onto the corresponding one on the units front coverplate
1)
Aggregate, Input Rx side
2)
Aggregate, Output Tx side
3)
Tributary, Input Tx side
4)
Tributary, Output Rx side
Place the optical splice protection (1) back onto the unit as follows:
Insert the bottom part (3) of the optical splice protection (1) into the slot on the units front
coverplate.
Insert the screw (2) into the hole (4) on th units front coverplate.
WARNING !
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
when carrying out this operation make sure that the single fiber splices are
properly situated in slot (5)
Tighten screw (2) so as to obtain a good mechanical contact between the optical splice
protection and the units front cover.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
352 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CABLE DUCT COVER
Figure 139. STM4 Optical connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
353 / 436

Figure 140. illustrates the max. allowed optical connector dimensions (fiber side) that can be utilized for
the optical connections.
max. 0/ 10,3 mm.
max. 39 mm.
max. 7,8 mm.
max. 32,5mm
max. 0/ 7,3 mm.
max. 46 mm.
max. 40 mm.
max. 60 mm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LEGENDA
1
SCPC
FCPC
DIN
Figure 140. ETSI Optical Connector dimensions
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
354 / 436

5.3.7.1 ETSI Optical Connector dimensions
5.3.8 STM16 Optical Connections and passthrough connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(Refer to Figure 141. on page 356).
5.3.8.1 STM16 Optical Connections

The connections are made directly on the units in the following manner:
ED
Insert the STM16 Aggregate units into the assigned positions as indicated in Chapter 2
CONFIGURATION on page 65.
Loosen screws (2) to remove the optical splice protection (1) from the unit. This protection
mechanically protects the optical connectors.
Remove the cover from the optical fiber duct at the bottom of the structure.
Lay the Tx/Rx single fiber splices into the duct. The optical fiber splices are specified on
Table 21. on page 324
Pull the single fiber splices out from the holes situated next to the Aggregate units to which
they will be connected.
Insert the single fiber splice connector onto the corresponding one (Tx/Rx) on the Aggregate
units front coverplate (see Figure 117. on page 322).
Place the optical splice protection (1) back onto the unit as follows:
Insert the optical splice protection (1) on the units front coverplate making run the left side
under the handle.
WARNING
when carrying out this operation make sure that the single fiber splices are
properly situated under the protection.
Tighten screw (2) so as to obtain a good mechanical contact between the optical splice
protection and the units front cover.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
355 / 436
These Passthrough connections are mandatories and they have to be done by means the Coaxial
Jumper Kit which Part Number is cited on Chapter 2 Physical Configuration on page 65, Table 8. Main
Part List.
In order to do the passthrough connections for the STM16 Aggregates see the Figure 141. on page 356.
and only for HM1 Aggregate PassThrough, refer to the Figure 142. on page 357.
Make the passthrough Tx and Rx cables run through the cooling wings and under the handle
as indicated in Figure 141. and in Figure 142. on page 357.
The cables are connected and protected against erroneous extraction. To disconnect the
passthrough connections use the relevant extractor (Unhook Tool, see Chapter Equipment Part List
Table 10. on page 77). If not available, use a screwdriver to lever off the ring nut from the passthrough
cables connector.
EAST
WEST
Rx1
Rx2
Rx2
Rx3
Rx3
Rx4
Rx4
Rx1
Tx1
Tx2
Tx2
Tx3
Tx3
Tx4
Tx1
Tx4
CABLE DUCT COVER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 141. STM16 Optical Connection and passthrough
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
356 / 436

5.3.8.2 PassThrough connections STM16 AGGREGATE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

EAST
ED
WEST
Rx1
A
Rx1
Rx2
B
Rx2
F
Rx3
C
Rx3
G
Rx4
D
Rx4
H
Tx1
E
Tx1
A
Tx2
F
Tx2
B
Tx3
G
Tx3
C
Tx4
H
Tx4
D
ON
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
ON
Figure 142. HM1 STM16 passthrough
07
357 / 436
5.3.9 IECB connection to/from DROP SHELF
The connection is made on the front plate of the DS Future Bus Termination unit inserted in the slot A
by means of four 50 OHM coaxial connectors (Refer to the Figure 29. on page 88, in Chapter 2
CONFIGURATION on page 65 and to the Figure 143. ) devoted to the IECBs bus interfacement with
the DROP SHELF FUTUREBUS TERMINATION MODULE. ( see Figure 117. on page 322)
Wire the IECB connection as indicated in Figure 143. using the cable suggested in Table 22. on
page 327 and the connector supplied with the DROP SHELF equipment and inserted in the DROP
SHELF S9/N3 Connection kit.
TAGBLOCK
(1 4)
CKL
DL
CKN
DN
PIN
ACRONYM
CKL
CKL
DL
DL
CKN
CKN
DN
DN
FUNCTION
CABLE(*)
LOCAL BUS CLOCK

LOCAL BUS DATA
NETWORK BUS CLOCK

NETWORK BUS DATA
Figure 143. IECBS BUS Connections.
5.3.10 Interface F connections for local P.C.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The connection is made on the front plate of the Equipment Controller unit (9) of Figure 117. on page 322)
with the 9pin male connectorterminated cable supplied with the Personal Computer.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
358 / 436

(Refer to Figure 117. on page 322 and Figure 143. )

5.3.11 Power and Housekeeping Access Module Connections

Battery and Housekeeping signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the
Access Module inserted into slot M.
Details are given in Figure 144. and in Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections is given in para. 5.3.11.1 on page 360 and para.5.3.11.2 on page
361.
HK
BATT1
7
BATT2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 144. Management of Battery & Houskeeping Access Module
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
359 / 436
5.3.11.1 Housekeeping connections
The connector and holder are inside the N3 installation set, or the installation set S9, or in the Optinex
Installation kit, depending on the type of rack utilized.
Wire connect the Housekeeping alarms onto SUB.D15P fixed male connectors
Close the connector into its holder
Insert the connector into the modules (8) with the acronym HK.
NB 1)
CPI 5, 6, 7 are assigned to the alarms of the Optical Amplifier eventually connected to the 1651
SM Equipment; CPI 4 is dedicated to an eventual SSU Eq. and CPI 8 is reserved to the DROP
SHELF AND BATTERY alarm.
NB 2)
The CPI inputs are enabled to receive ground contacts.

The open/close Housekeeping signals coming from other equipment, like Optical
Amplifier for example, must be changed into ground criteria.
NB 3)
CP0 are not operative.
CONN. ACRONYM
HK
15
ACRONYM
FUNCTION
CPI1
Parallel contact input
CPI2
CPI3
SSUFAIL
OR of alarms of Synchronisation Supply Unit
OFAURG
Urgent alarm of external OFA
OFAABN
Abnormal condition on external OFA
OFANURG
AND BATT
EXT
CPO1
Parallel contact output
10
CPO2
11
CPO3
12
CPO4
13
CKOFA
14
CPO6
15
CPO7
CABLE(*)
Not urgent alarm on external OFA

Station power supply alarm on external OFA
FRONT VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PIN
Figure 145. Housekeeping Connections
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
360 / 436

5.3.11.2 Power Connections

SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc. Ensure battery power cables are not connected to office battery
power.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals
(See Figure 144. on page 359, Figure 146. on page 361, Table 21. on page 324. and Table 22. on page
327. )
POWER SUPPLY
CONN. ACRONYM BATT1
PIN
3
CONN. ACRONYM BATT2
ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)
VC BATT 1
+ Battery
NC
Not
connected
VS BATT 1
Battery
PIN
ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)
VC BATT 2
+ Battery
NC
Not
connected
VS BATT 2
Battery
2
1
Figure 146. Power Supply Connections
With ETSI rack:
The contacts and the connector body are inside the N3 Installation Set; see Table 21. on page 324.
Connect the power supply cable coming from the station batteries onto the H.P. Female
contacts.
Insert the above cited contacts onto the NC 3p. SUB D female connector.
Unsheathe the cable braid (for a max length of 12 mm) and fasten it with the cable holder of the
Connector Holder in order to electrically connect them.
Do not connect the braid to the pins of the connector.
Close the connector into its holder.
Plugin the connector into the module terminal tagblocks (6), (7) with the acronym BATT1,
BATT2 of the Figure 144. on page 359 .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
For external subrack protection (upstream power station distribution frame) two
16A circuit breakers (main battery) and 1A circuit breakers (service battery) are
suggested.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
361 / 436
With S9 rack:
If instead, the equipment is housed in an S9 rack then insert the Power supply cord plug alim./2 (S9)
directly onto terminal tagblock (6), (7). The power supply cord plug is inside the S9 Installation Set.
SAFETY RULES
16A Circuit Breaker
This device constitutes the protection breaking point for the station power
supply. Two circuit breakers are supplied with the subrack and are mounted at
the top of the rack S9 (see the relevant documentation).
With Optinex rack
The components are listed in Table 21. page 324.
Insert the Power supply cord plug alim./2 (S9) directly onto terminal tagblock (6), (7). The power supply
cord plug is inside the Optinex Installation kit .
SAFETY RULES
15A Circuit Breaker
This device constitutes the protection breaking point for the station power
supply. Two circuit breakers are supplied with the subrack and are mounted at
the Top Rack Unit of the Optinex rack (see the relevant documentation).
IN GENERAL:
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Due to possible very high currents in case of shortcircuit at the battery power
input, it is essential that the battery power distribution line shall be provided with
a short circuit backup protection with adequate breaking capacity.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
362 / 436

The components are listed in Table 21. on page 324.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TURNON, TEST AND OPERATION
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
363 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
364 / 436
6 INITIAL TURNON, TESTS AND OPERATION

ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATES IN PARA.
4.1.2 ON PAGE 32
6.1 General safety rules

The Safety Rules stated in para.3.2 on page 23 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on
optical connections while the equipment is inservice.
SAFETY RULES
48 V dc.
terminals.
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
365 / 436
6.2 General
Hardware settings
Unit insertion into the subrack

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Check on protection ground connection and optical connection
Power supply tests
Installation in the P.C. of:
Equipment management Craft Terminal SW kits
Equipment software kit
Equipment SW download ( only if not updated).
Software settings
Local tests
Checks on the link
It might occur that when testing use is made of setting options that are not compliant with the plant
settings. These setting options are defined everytime a test is executed.
Moreover before operating, the equipment must be preset according to the plant requirements.
To reduce time for test and avoid wrong SW configuration due to tests it is important to:
Perform each test only on the part of equipment (circuits, units) dedicated to that function
(ie.: not operate passthrough test on TU used in Drop/insert)
Dont modify the plant SW configuration. Save and Send NEW Configuration files for tests and
Delete them after use.
Information is given on the conditions present and on the operations to carry out during regular equipment
operations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

245.701.833R).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
366 / 436

The following operations are required to activate the equipment:
6.3 Setting Options

The setting options are of the hardware (HW) and software (SW) type.
With regard to the HW setting options refer to the HARDWARE SETTING section.
With regard to the SW setting options refer to the P.C. Operators Handbook. Anyway, before executing
the software setting options,perform the power supply tests described at para 6.5.2 on page 370
To perform the setting options proceed as follows:
Define the equipments station configuration

Compare the equipments station configuration with the list of settable units
( see Unit Documentation section ) and choose the ones required.
Compare the equipments plant specifications with the tables indicated in the unit circuit
schematics and define the functions to preset.
Execute all the hardware setting options
Install the units into the subracks in the assigned positions
Install the Switch Module subunits in the upper part of the subrack (access panel)
A label is present on the 34 and 140Mbit/s/STM1 electrical Switch Modules indicating the setting
made. Settings 1+1 MAIN and 1+1 SPARE are given.
When 1+N setting is performed, do not insert any indication (factory setting).
Check the protection ground connection and the optical connection as specified in para 6.5.1
on page 369.
Power supply the equipment as specified in Power supply checks para 6.5.2 on page 370.
Install the management SW applicatives of the Craft terminal onto the P.C..
Install the Equipment software of the relevant release onto the P.C.
Download the Equipment software on the equipment and activate it.
(This operation is carried out only if the equipment release is not updated).
SW configure with the P.C.
PC local operations can be remotely executed with the Operation System.

The installation, loading and software configuration procedures are described in the Operators Manual.
The Part number of the disks to be used are indicated in Chapter 2 on page 65.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ATTENTION: Save the operative software configuration in a disk / diskette.

This is important for maintenance purposes (example : Equipment Controller substitution
with a spare).
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
367 / 436
6.4 Instruments and Accessories
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
REF.
INSTRUMENT
CHARACTERISTICS
(A)
Pattern Generator/Error Detector
Signals available:
64Kbit/s codirectional
1544Kbit/s code B8ZS (100 ohms)
2048Kbit/s code HDB3 (120/75 ohms)
34368Kbit/s code HDB3
139264Kbit/s code CMI
G.957 compliant STM1 electrical/optical
(B)
Optical power tester (radiometer)
2nd window
3rd window
(C)
Singlemode variable optical

attenuator
Variable attenuator within the 050dB, 2nd

and 3rd window
(D)
Digital multimeter
(E)
Craft terminal
(Personal Computer)
(F)
Data Tester
See the operators handbook.

It can be supplied by ALCATEL.
1
Tx rate up to 19200 baud

CCITT interface V11
(G)
Coaxial Cables
terminations:
instrument side depending on (A)
equipment side depending on type

of tributary
(H)
Singlemode singlefiber splices
Terminations dependent on unit

connectors, radiometer and attenuator
(I)
Shielded pair
termination:
instrument (F)/(A)
SUB.D 15pin male connector
(L)
shielded pair
termination:
instrument (A)
SUB.D 9pin male connector
(M)
Distribution frame cables
termination:
instrument (A)
Tributary distribution frame
(N)
Frequency counter
10 MHz 1 hz
(O)
Cables for synchronism
termination:
instrument (N)
Synchronism termination
(120 or 75 ohm)
(P)
8 Twisted shiekded pairs
The same type used for installation
(S)
MPEG2 ASI Generator
(T)
MPEG2 ASI Measurement

Decoder
(Z)
ED
Q.TY
Lamp
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
368 / 436

Table 23. Instruments and Accessories

6.5 Local Checks

The test which follow describe the procedures relative to the initial turnon of the units housed in the
mechanical structure.
The test circuits shows standard equipment.
To configure the test circuits, the equipment must be preset through Craft terminal.
The test are carried out through direct wiring to the equipment. These connections can be also made on
the station distribution frames.
The loop connections indicated in the following test are realized by means wiring. It is possible to activate
them with SW command, using the Alarms, Status and Remote Control application of the Craft Terminal.
NOTE
To test properly, refer to Chapter 2 on page 65, as regard to references to unit, numbering (n),
and to Chapter 5 on page 311. for the connections to make.
6.5.1 Check on Protection Ground Connections and Optical Connection
SAFETY RULES
Check in the ETSI rack that the subrack and rack have been grounded.
For all types of racks, verify that subrack has been screw fastened to rack.
The latter operation guarantees protection ground connection (on the rack).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Check that the optical connection on the equipment are correctly made, as
indicated at para 5.3.7 on page 352 and at para 5.3.8.1 on page 355 .
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
369 / 436
1)
Check if all the units and subunits have been removed from the subrack with the exception of
the Power supply unit.
2)
Switch on the unit through switch (2)
3)
Check if green LED (1) is ON. If the LED does not light up, check if the battery voltage is present
and if necessary replace the unit.
4)
Repeat the above tests on the other power supply unit.
5)
Repeat all the tests described above after having inserted again all the units
.If green LED (1) does not light up, it indicates that either the power supply units are faulty or
one of the inserted units causes a shortcircuit on the power supply outputs.
6.5.3 Lamp Test
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The efficiency of the equipment LEDs can also be checked. By pressing pushbutton (11) on the
Equipment Controller unit the LEDs must light up, except for LEDs (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW unit, and
Power Supply LED (1). If otherwise, replace the relevant unit.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
370 / 436

6.5.2 Power supply checks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
371 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Test circuit of Figure 147. on page 373
Instruments and accessories to utilize (see Table 23. on page 368)
Radiometer (B)
Singlefiber splices (H)
Personal Computer (E)
1)
Set up the test circuit.

Insert the units involved.
Connect the Aggregate units Tx optical connector (4) to the Radiometer through the
Singlefiber splice (H).
2)
By means of P.C. (E) set the ALS optical protection to be able to carry out manual for test
operation
3)
Press pushbutton (5) on the unit for more than 12 secs.

The operator has 90 secs. available to carry out the test.
4)
Switch on the radiometer and check if the Tx optical power value is within the range indicated
in para 4.2. on page 283.
It otherwise replace the aggregate unit.
5)
Repeat this test for each of the Aggregate units.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
372 / 436

6.5.4 Aggregate Tx optical power check
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
POWER
METER
ED
5
4
9
AGGREGATE
CRU
955.100.562 K
POWER SUPPLY
Figure 147. Tx optical power check
07
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
373 / 436

Set up the test circuit of Figure 148. on page 375.

Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368
Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A)

Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L)
Variable optical attenuators (C)
1)
Set up the test circuit. Use P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations (tributary in
Drop/Insert).
A typical connection is shown between the tributary and the Pattern Generator/Error Detector
through cables (G) (for 75 ohms connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohms connections).
The aggregate is looped utilizing fiber splices (H) and the Variable Optical Attenuator (C)
(preset with a 10dB attenuation).
The units inserted are specified in the Figure 148. on page 375
2)
Preset the instrument to transmit a signal (depending on the type of tributary used) with the
following requirements:
Bit rate
1544 Kbit/s 50 ppm
Code
or 2048 Kbit/s 50 ppm
B8ZS
Sequence
Level
Bit rate
215
1 pseudorandom
Level
HDB3
215
HDB3
215
1 pseudorandom
1 pseudorandom
3Vp (100ohms)
2.3Vp/75ohms or3Vp (120ohms)
1Vp (75ohms)
or 44736Kbit/s 20 ppm
or 155 520 Kbit/s
B3ZS
CMI
Code/Interface CMI
215 1 pseudorandom
223 1 pseudorandom
0.85Vp (75ohms)
1Vpp (75ohms)
Code
Sequence
Type
STM1 electrical
3)
Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on the
units concerned.
In case of errors/alarms, troubleshoot with the Personal Computer to detect the type of alarm
and eventually replace the Tributary, Matrices, Aggregates, Switch module, CRU units.
N.B.
All the tributaries can be simultaneously checked by loop cascading the tributaries.
To this concern use the relevant cables.
Disconnect the Pattern Generator output from the tributary input and check if the AIS signal
(all ONES) is present (sent from the Tx side of the tributary involved to the Error Detector).
If this condition is not detected, replace the TRIB unit of the tributary involved.
Connect again the Pattern Generator output to the tributary input and disconnect the multiple
loop (H). Check on the Error detector the presence of the AIS signal (all ONES) received from
the Rx side.
Reset the link at multiple level and repeat the checks on all the other tributaries.
4)
5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6)
NOTE:
ED
This test can also check tributaries with Crossconnection configurations (Tribto trib).
In this case the optical loop connection is not important.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
374 / 436

6.5.5 Multidemultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries

PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
G or L
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
4
H
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 148. Test on multidemultiplexing and AIS for electrical tributaries
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
375 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Set up the test circuit of Figure 149. on page 377 .
Instruments and accessories to utilize (see Table 23. on page 368 ) :
MPEG2 ASI Generator (S)
MPEG2 ASI Measurement Decoder (T)
Variable optical attenuators (C)
Personal computer (E)
1)

Two DVB tributaries are necessary to perform the test, one working as Tx and the other working
as Rx. To that purpose preset the tributaries as described in the Hardware setting section.
(preset with a 10dB attenuation).
The units inserted are specified in Figure 149. on page 377.
2)
Preset the instrument to transmit a video signal
Bite Rate
Managed bit rate
Code
8B/10B
Level
800 mVpp/75ohms
270 Mbit/s
2 to 40 Mbit/s
3)
Check that the MPEG2 ASI Measurement Decoder has read no errors and that there are no
alarm indications on the units involved.
In case of errors/alarms, troubleshoot with the Personal Computer to detect the type of alarm
and eventually replace the Tributary, Aggregates, CRU units.
4)
With the MPEG2 ASI Generator go out of the managed range and check if the AIS signal
(all ONES) is present on the Measurement Detector. If this condition is not detected, replace
the DVB working as Rx and perform the test again.
If the AIS condition is no more revealed , substitute the DVB card working as TX.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
376 / 436

6.5.6 Multidemultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the DVB Tributaries

S
MPEG2 ASI
GENERATOR
MPEG2 ASI
MEASUREMENT
DECODER
E
DVB TRIBUTARY
3
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
4
H
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 149. Test on multidemultiplexing and AIS for DVB tributary
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
377 / 436
Test circuit of Figure 150. on page 379
Radiometer (B)
Variable optical attenuator (C)
Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L) (not required when using the optical tributary).
1)
By means of the P.C. (E) preset the optical protection (ALS) to carry out manual for test
operations.
2)

through cables (G) (for 75 ohms connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohms connections).
With regard to the STM1 optical tributary the above cables are substituted with two other
optical fiber splices (H).The aggregates are looped through the optical fiber splices and the
variable optical attenuator (C).
3)
Set the instrument in accordance with the type of tributary involved and with the characteristics
specified in para. Multidemultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries
on page 321.
4)
The optical attenuator must attenuate 10dB
5)
Check that the Error Detector reads no errors.
6)
Gradually increase the attenuation of the Optical attenuator until a 1x1010 BER is read on the
Error Detector.
7)
Disconnect the singlefiber splice from the Rx unit optical connector (3) and connect it to the
radiometer (detail 1 of the Figure 150. on page 379)
8)

The operator has 90 secs. available to carry out the test.
9)
Check if the Rx optical power level on the Radiometer is within the sensitivity level indicated
in par. 4.2 on page 283.
If otherwise replace the Aggregate unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
10 ) Repeat the test for each of the Aggregate units.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
378 / 436

6.5.7 Check on the receiver sensitivity

PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
G or
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
DETAIL 1
POWER
METER
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
4
7
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 150. Receiver sensitivity check
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
379 / 436
Set up the test circuit of Figure 150. on page 379
Radiometer (B)
Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L). Not required when utilizing the optical tributary.
1)
2)
Set the attenuation of the variable optical attenuator to approx. 10dB.
3)
Refer to the P.C. (E) applications operators handbook and check if the automatic and manual
optical protections of the Aggregate unit are inserted. If not proceed to program them.
4)
Disconnect the singlefiber splice (H) ( connected to the Tx optical connector (4) ) from the
optical attenuator and connect it to the radiometer so as to measure the transmitted optical
power.
This condition causes red LED (6) on the Equipment Controller unit to light up, and the AIS
criteria to be received on the Error Detector.
5)
Check that the LASER power is null. Moreover check if a power reset is attempted after approx.
180 secs.. This condition must last approx. 2secs.
If these conditions do not occur, replace the Aggregate unit
6)
Reset the test circuit by connecting again the attenuator
7)
Repeat what stated at point 5; disconnect the attenuator and connect the radiometer.
8)
Check if the Tx optical power is null. Press pushbutton (5) on the Aggregate units front
coverplate and check that a power reset is attempted for approx. 2 secs.
If otherwise replace the unit.
9)
Press pushbutton (5) for more than 12 secs again and check if an optical power reset is
attempted for approx. 90 secs. (MANUAL FORTEST function).
If otherwise replace the unit.
10 ) Repeat the test for each of the Aggregate units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ATTENTION
The optical protection provided to the optical tributaries is tested in a similar manner and
with relevant connections.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
380 / 436

6.5.8 Check on the efficiency of the optical protection (ALS)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
381 / 436

Instruments and accessories to utilize (Table 23. on page 368)
Variable Optical Attenuator (C)
Radiometer (B)
1)

Insert the units involved.
Connect the TRIB. units optical connector (5) to the Radiometer through the Singlefiber
splice (H).
2)
By means of P.C. (E) set the ALS optical protection to be able to carry out manual for test
operation.
3)
4)
Switch on the radiometer and check if the Tx optical power value is within the range indicated
in para 4.2 on page 283.
If otherwise replace the optical tributary unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5)
ED
Repeat the test for each of the Optical Tributaries.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
382 / 436

6.5.9 Test on Tx optical power transmitted by the Optical 155Mbit/s Tributary

5
B
POWER
METER
H
E
3
STM1 OPTICAL
TRIBUTARY
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 151. Check on the optical power transmitted by the Optical Tributary
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
383 / 436
1)
Set up the test circuit and insert the relevant units. Specifically, connect the Pattern Generator
output to the input optical connector (4) and the error detector to the output optical connector
(5) on the optical tributary unit through the singlefiber splices (H).
Loop the Tx (4) and Rx (3) optical connectors of the Aggregate unit through the singlefiber
splices (H) and the variable optical attenuator (C) set to 10dB. Use the P.C. (E) to set up the
required configurations (Tributary in drop/insert).
2)
Preset the instrument to transmit a signal with the following requirements:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
155.52 Mbit/s
Interface
S1.1 or L1.1
Type
SDH (STM1) optical
3)
Check that no error is read on the Error Detector.

If errors are detected, troubleshoot the electrical connections or replace the TRIB unit or
Aggregate unit.
4)
Disconnect the Pattern Generator from the optical connector (4) of the Optical Trib., and
check that the AIS signal (all ONES) is present on the Error Detector.
If this condition is not detected, replace the TRIB unit.
5)
Connect again the Pattern Generator output to the optical connector (4) and disconnect
the multiple loop.
Check if the AIS signal (all ONES) is present on the Error Detector.
6)
Reset the connection at 155Mbit/s level and repeat all the checks on all the other 155 Mbit/s
optical tributaries (if any).
7)
Repeat the test for each of the Optical Tributaries.
NOTE:
ED
Bit rate
This test and also check tributaries with Crossconnection configurations (trib to trib).
In this case the optical aggregate loop connection is not important.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
384 / 436

6.5.10 Multidemultiplexing and AIS tests on the optical 155Mbit/s tributary

A
MATRIX
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
E
4
STM1 OPTICAL
TRIBUTARY
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 152. Test on multidemultiplexing and AIS for optical tributaries
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
385 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1)
ED
Pattern generator/Error detector (A)
Shielded pair (I)
Set the test circuit.
Through shielded pairs (I) connect the Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A) to the
connector 64 Kbit/s of the Auxiliary access module.
Connect the singlefiber splices (H) to the Tx and Rx optical connectors (3) and (4)
of the Aggregate unit.
Connect the other ends of the singlefiber splices to the variable optical attenuator
(C) set to 10dB.
Use the P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations
2)
Transmit a 64Kbit/s signal with G703 interface through the Pattern generator.
3)
Check if no error is present on the Error detector. If errors are detected, troubleshoot the
electrical connections or replace one at a time the AUX unit and the Aggregate unit.
4)
Disconnect the Pattern Generator from the 64Kbit/s connector and check if the AIS signal (all
ONES) is on the Error Detector. If this condition is not detected, replace the AUX unit.
5)
Repeat the checks on all the other 64Kbit/s channels.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
386 / 436

6.5.11 Check on the 64 Kbit/s auxiliary channels

PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
3
AUX
POWER SUPPLY
AGGREGATE
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
387 / 436
1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Data Tester (F)
Shielded pair (I)
Set the test circuit
2)
ED
Through shielded pairs (I) connect the Data Tester (F) to the V11 Auxiliary Access
Module
Connect the singlefiber splices (H) to the Tx and Rx optical connectors (3) and (4)
of the Aggregate unit.
Connect the other ends of the singlefiber splices to the 10dB variable optical
attenuator.
Use the P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations
Transmit the V11 signal through the Data Tester (I) with the following value:
PRBS signal
bitrate 9600 baud
code NRZ
pattern 291
clock source INTERNAL
3)
Check that no error is present on the Data Tester (I)

If otherwise, replace the AUX/EOW unit or the Aggregate unit.
4)
Disconnect the Data tester transmission from the input of the connector and check if the AIS
signal (all ONES) is received.
If otherwise, replace the AUX/EOW unit.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
388 / 436

6.5.12 Check on the V11 auxiliary channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
i
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
C
IN
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
9
OUT
H
955.100.562 K
4
AUX
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
Figure 154. V11 auxiliary channels check
07
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
389 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368:
Coaxial cable (G) or shielded pair (L)
Singlefilter splices (H)
1)
Set up the test circuit

Two Aggregates of the same side are looped (with attenuator fixed or variable, 10 dB) by
means fiber splices (H)
Use P.C (E) to set up the required configurations.
The units inserted are specified in the Figure 155. on page 391.
2)
Preset the instrument to transmit a signal according the tributary requirements (as for the
previous chapters)
3)
Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on
the unit concerned.
4)
Disconnect the Loop on the Aggregate in service
5)
After a transient condition (with AIS indication) verify that no error are present on the Error
Detector
6)
Repeat the test on the other Aggregate.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
390 / 436

6.5.13 STM4 Aggregate APS Protection check

F
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
AGGREGATE
LOOP
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 155. Test on Aggregate Protection (APS)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
391 / 436
6.5.14 Tributary EPS Protection Check
Figure 156. on page 393
For Trib 21x2 Mbit/s EPS N+1

The example shows the connection with 2 Mb/s Trib. 1 of unit 1 (slot 2).
For Trib 3x34 Mbit/s or 3x45 Mbit/s or 140/STM1 electrical EPS N+1
The example shows the connection with 140 Mb/s Trib. 1 (slot 2).
Therefore, SPARE 1 is the standby one.
For Trib 3x34 Mbit/s or 3x45 Mbit/s or 140/STM1 electrical EPS 1+1
The example shows the 140 Mb/s 1+1 switch on the first two units
(slots 2 and 3).
The connections required on the switch modules are indicated.
Instruments and accessories shown on Table 23. on page 368
1)
Coaxial cables (G) or shielded cables (L)
Fiber splices (H)

Aggregate looping is obtained through the Optical Attenuator (C) (set to a 10 dB attenuation)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Configure as required using the PC (E) (Drop/Insert tributaries)

The Switch Modules too must be set according to the EPS configuration.
The units concerned are specified on the figure.
ED
2)
Set instrument (A) to send a signal compliant with the Tributary concerned.
3)
Check that the Error Detector reads no errors and that there is no alarm indication on the unit
involved.
4)
Remove the inservice Tributary unit and check, after a transient condition, that no errors are
read by the error detector (the standby unit is now operating).
5)
Place back the Tributary unit and then remove the standby Tributary unit (now in service).
Check after a transient condition that no errors are read by the Error Detector.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
392 / 436

The following Test Circuits are indicated for each type of protection involved.

A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
G or
21x2Mbit/s
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
21x2Mbit/s
SPARE
TRIBUTARY
IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
4
H
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 156. Test on 21 x 2 Mbit/s trib. N+1 EPS protection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
393 / 436

A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
34Mbit/s or
140/ STM1 el
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
3x34MbitS or
140/STM1 el SPARE
TRIBUTARIES
S
P
A
R
E
1
SWITCH
UNITS
S
P
A
R
E
2
IN
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 157. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. N+1 EPS protection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
394 / 436

A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
34Mbit/s or
140/ STM1 el
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
IN
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 158. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. 1+1 EPS protection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
395 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1)
ED
Frequency Counter (N)
Cable for synchronism (O)

6.5.15 CRUs EPS Protection check
Use cable (O) to connect to the outgoing synch. point (CK OUT) on M150
Configure the 1+1 protected CRU and the other correct selections the P.C.
2)
Check for presence of output synch. frequency
3)
Remove the CRU configured to operate as Main
4)
Check for the presence of a output synch. frequency after a transient condition
5)
Reinsert the Main CRU
6)
Remove the Spare CRU
7)
Check for the presence of the output synch. frequency after a transient condition.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
396 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

AGGREGATE
ED
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
CRU
POWER SUPPLY
Figure 159. Test on CRU EPS protection
07
397 / 436
Instrument and accessories of Table 23. on page 368
1)
Coaxial Cable (G) or Shielded pair (L)

through cables (G) (for 75 ohm connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohm connections).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(present with a 10 dB attenuation).
Use PC (E) to set up the required configurations.
The units inserted are specified in Figure 160. on page 399
ED
2)
Preset the instrument to transmit a signal according the tributary requirements.
3)
Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on
the unit concerned.
4)
Remove the Main Full Matrix
5)
After a transient condition (with AIS indication) verify that no error are present on the Error
Detector.
6)
Reinsert the Main Full Matrix
7)
Remove the Spare Full Matrix
8)
Verify that, after a transient condition, no errors are present on the Error Detector.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
398 / 436

6.5.16 Full Matrix EPS protection check

A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
G or L
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
MATRICES
IN
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 160. Test on Full Matrix EPS protection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
399 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Frequency counter (N)
Personal computer (E)
Cable for synchronism (O)
1)
Through cable (O) connect the CKOUT synchronism of M150 to the frequency counter
Use the P.C. (E) to work in the free running mode in the Equipment configurations.
2)
Check the free running frequency at 2048 KHz 4.6 ppm (from 2047990.58 to 2048009.42
Hz).
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
400 / 436

6.5.17 Check on External free running synchronism
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
CRU
POWER SUPPLY
Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism
07
401 / 436
N.B.
Optical Attenuator (C)

Digital Multimeter (D)
Coaxial Cables (G) or shielded pair (L)
Single fiber splice (H)
Lamp (Z), that could be consisting of a LED, connected to a Vtest voltage generator
whose ground is common with the equipment, and a series resistance Rs, whose value
is given by: Rs=(Vtest)/10 mA.
Vtest must not exceed 72V, and the output current from the pin must not exceed 50 mA, further
the used LED should bear a 10 mA current.
1)

The Aggregate is looped and connected to the variable attenuator preset at 10 dB.
2)
Preset the Pattern Generator to transmit a signal according to the tributary requirements
(as for the previous chapters).Check on (A) that no errors or alarms are detected.
3)
Connect the lamp (Z) to the pin to be tested on the RA tagblock on the Alarm Interface Access
Module and, operating as for Table 24. on page 402. Verify that the relevant alarm is present,
by observing that the lamp (Z) turns ON and by checking that the voltage measured on the
Digital Multimeter (D) is in the range 0V 2V. Note: this latter voltage must be measured
between the pin and the equipment ground. Test all the other remote alarms by proceeding in
the same way.
Table 24. Remote Alarms activation
Simulation
Remote Alarms
INT
URG + EXT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NURG
Disconnect the Aggregate Loop

Increase the attenuation with the optical attenuator
IND
Transmit all 1 with the Pattern Generator
TOR
Disconnect one station battery(the Alarm Interface Access Module

performing the AND/OR function must be equipped)
TAND
Disconnect two station batteries(the Alarm Interface Access Module

performing the AND/OR function must be equipped)
TORC
Turn off one Power supply unit
TANC
Turn off two Power Supply units
LOS Q2
ED
Extract one unit (in service)
Disconnect the QB3 LAN from the Qx & Sync access module
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
402 / 436

6.5.18 Remote Alarms check
Vtest
Rs

LED
Z
DIGITAL
MULTIMETER
A
P
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
G or L
TRIBUTARIES
IN
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR
OUT
AGGREGATE
POWER SUPPLY
CRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 162. Test on remote alarms
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
403 / 436
N.B.
To test correctly refer to Chapter 2 on page 65 as regards to references made to positions (P)
and numbering (n), and to Chapter 5 on page 311 as regards to wiring.
6.6.1 Multidemultiplexing check on the link
Distribution frame cabling (M)
The check must be made on all the tributary streams which do not transit through the equipment
involved, i.e., all the tributaries in terminalconfigurations, and the drop/insert tributaries in adddrop
configurations.
Further on the test can also be made to check Crossconnection aggregate configurations.
In this case the Equipment is stations (2) will be SW configured to cross connect TU or AU4 within the
same side Aggregate.
Tributary loop are not important.
The functional block is indicated with * in the Figure 163. on page 405.
The example of the Figure 163. on page 405 is applicable (functionwise) to all tributaries.
1)

The tributaries are looped on the station distribution frame (2).
Connect the Pattern Generator output to the input of the 1st tributary and the input of the Error
Detector to the output of the latter using cables (M).
2)
Check if the level of the connected tributary signals is coherent. If otherwise preset it.
3)
Adjust the rate and level of the (A) instrument with the tributary involved.
4)
Check that no optical alarm indications are present on the equipment nor errors are read on
instrument (A).
If alarms and/or errors are detected and if all the local checks have been made, the failure is
due to external causes. If the local checks have not been executed, proceed according to the
instructions given in para. 6.5 on page 369.
5)
Repeat the checks on the other tributaries if necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE All the tributaries can be simultaneously tested by cascadeconnecting the tributaries of station
1, and by looping the tributaries in station 2.
For this operation use proper wiring.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
404 / 436

6.6 Check on the Link

TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
1
PATTERN
GENERATOR
2
1651SM
or
1661 SMC
ERROR
DETECTOR
LINE
1651SM
or
1661 SMC
MUX
DEMUX
TO
or
AU4
AGG. STM16
1651SM or 1661 SMC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 163. Multidemultiplexing tests on the link
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
405 / 436
The check must be executed on all the tributary streams involved in transit operations.
The example of the Figure 164. on page 407 is applicable (functionwise) to all tributaries.
This example shows the check of nth trib. streams connected between station (1) and (3) through the
station (2) transits.
To set up a real link wire as instructed below:
1)

The tributary is looped on the station distribution frame (3).
Instrument (A) is connected to the Tx side of the first tributary (Tx side) and to the Rx side of
the latter in station (1) through cables (M).
This link permits to check the equipment transits through station (2) connected to the other
stations through sides WEST and EAST.
2)
Check if the level of the connected tributary signals is compliant. If otherwise preset it.
3)
Adjust the rate and level of the (A) instrument according to the tributaries involved.
4)
Check that no optical alarm indications nor errors are read on instrument (A).
If alarms and/or errors are detected and if all the local checks have been made, the failure is
due to external causes, or to the erroneous passthrough operation.
If the local checks have not been executed, proceed as indicated in para.6.5 on page 369.
5)
Repeat the tests on all the other tributaries inside the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE All the tributaries can be simultaneously tested by cascadeconnecting the tributaries of station
1, and by looping the tributaries in station 3.
For this operation use proper wiring.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
406 / 436

6.6.2 Transit (passthrough) check on the link
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 164. Transits check on the link
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
407 / 436
ERROR
DETECTOR
PATTERN
GENERATOR
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
1651 SM
or
1661 SMC
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
1651 SM
or
1661 SMC
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
1651 SM
or
1661 SMC
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME

The example shown in Figure 165. on page 409 is applicable to all types of tributaries and to all types of
ringconnections.
Starting from station 1 connect the Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A) to tributary 1.
In accordance to the software configuration of the three stations, this tributary must be assigned
to station 2 and station 3 must be considered as spare.
(The tributary transits through station 3).
Loop tributary 1 onto station 2
Set instrument (A) according to the tributary involved.
Check that no optical alarm indications are present on the equipment, nor errors are read on
instrument (A).
Disconnect, from the relevant distribution frame, the optical fiber splice between stations
1 and 2.
After a transient period ascertain that no errors are read on instrument (A).
Repeat the tests on all the other tributaries.
6.6.4 Check on the EOW channel

This check must be executed on the real link after having performed all the checks previously described.
After having activated all the equipment of the link, proceed according to the instructions stated in
para.6.7.1 on page 411 . The procedure is set from one of the two stations involved.
Repeat the operations from the opposite direction of the link
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If a link cannot be set up, even though all the operations have been correctly executed, replace the
AUX/EOW unit.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
408 / 436

6.6.3 TU pathprotection check on a ring connection

A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
M
ERROR
DETECTOR
FRAME
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
1651SM
or
1661 SMC
E
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
LINE
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
1
2
1651SM
or
1661SMC
1651SM
or
1661SMC
LINE
N
W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TRIBUTARY
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
N
E
Figure 165. TU crossover check on a ringconnection
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
409 / 436
N.B.
To properly execute the test refer to Chapter 2 on page 65 which crossrefers to unit number
assignment (n).
When the equipment operates regularly, the green LEDs (1) are ON to indicate that the Power supply
units are working.
Green LED (7) on the AUX/EOW unit is also ON to indicate engineering orderwire operation.
The following conditions can occur:
Green LED (2) ON on the Aggregate unit or
140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit
Indicates unit inservice
Equipment Controller unit

Yellow LED (4) glowing
indicates abnormal condition (active loopbacks,

forging unit into service, Laser forced ON or OFF,
try to restart after ALS)
AUX/EOW unit
Yellow LED (6) ON
indicates busy line
Yellow LED (6) flashing
indicates reception of the selective call
Yellow LED (5) ON
indicates conference call
The lighting up of other LEDs indicates mulfunction conditions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By pressing pushbutton (11) on the Equipment Controller check that all the equipment LEDs lightup
(except (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW or (1) of POWER SUPPLY units) without causing alarm.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
410 / 436

6.7 Operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6.7.1 Engineering Order Wire channel

The following procedure permits to set up service speech connections between two equipment installed
in opposite stations.
Numerical reference concern the AUX/EOW unit.
ED
Insert the telephone handset with keypad into socket (2) on the calling equipment.
Check if green LED (7) is ON and yellow LEDs (6) and (5) OFF.
Hook off the telephone handset through the relative switch
The free tone must be received.
Press pushbutton J (4) which seizes the line
Ckeck if green LED (7) goes off and yellow LED (6) lights up.
In these conditions, a busy tone will be heard by the other parties when the telephone handset
is inserted and hooked off.
Select the number involved on the keypad of the calling telephone handset
The buzzer rings and the yellow LED (6) flashes in the station where the selected EOW channel
is present.
The called party must insert and hook off the telephone handset. In this condition, the buzzer
must stop ringing.
Both telephone handsets must be hooked on again and verify that the line has released, i.e.,
the green LED must be ON and the yellow LEDs must be off on both equipment.
Select conference call (number 00) on the keypad of the calling Telephone handset.
The buzzer ring and the yellow led (5) is ON in all the other stations.
In all the stations in which the operator insert and hook off the telephone handset, the buzzer
must stop ringing, yellow led (5) is OFF and yellow led (6) is ON.
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
411 / 436
The equipment allows to update the software version according to equipment evolution.
The download software is executed with the equipment working. The operation is executed locally through
the Craft Terminal containing the Equipment applicative to load or remotely by means Operation System.
SW download is executed both on the Equipment Controller and on the Card Controllers of the various
units.
All the relevant operations are fully detailed in the Operators Manual.
6.7.3 Craft terminalmanaged equipment

During the operating phase too, the Operator can utilize the application phases made available by the Craft
terminal and described in the relevant Operators Manual.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Specifically:
ED
Administrative application allows to setup new operator functions
Configuration applications allows to check and modify software settings.
The Alarms and Maintenance Memory application inform on the current and previous
equipment status.
Performance Monitoring application allows network surveillance checking the values of errors
parameters and obtaining data on the quality of the links on path and section.
Remote Inventory application informs on data of the unit inserted (identification, construction
data, serial number, etc).
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
412 / 436

6.7.2 Download of the equipment software release
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
413 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
414 / 436

7 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
4.1.3 on page 32
7.1 General safety rules

The Safety Rules stated in para.3.2 on page 23 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical

connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
48 V dc.
terminals.
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
415 / 436
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
ROUTINE
CORRECTIVE
7.3 Instruments And Accessories

There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the operators handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When TMN is implemented, an Operation System display alarms and manages all the Equipments
connected.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
416 / 436

7.2 Maintenance Aspects

7.4 Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links for SECTION and PATH on tributaries
and aggregates, by counting the errored events and obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operators Handbook, allows this function.
7.4.1 Routine Maintenance every year
SAFETY RULES
48 V dc.
terminals.
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
Check that the cable (N3 rack) is perfectly safety grounded (FASTON, see
5.3.1 on page 328).
Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with
screws, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the station
ground).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By pressing pushbutton (11), see in Chapter 2 the Figure 30. on page 89 , on the Equipment Controller
check that all the equipment LEDs lightup (except (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW or (1) of POWER SUPPLY
units) without causing alarm.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
417 / 436
The complete Troubleshooting description in given in the Maintenance Section of the Operators
Handbook.

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

245.701.833R).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
418 / 436

7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting)

7.6 Set of spare parts

7.6.1 Suggested Spare Parts
The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin
unit (see unit list in Chapter 2 on page 65).
7.6.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;
the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might demage them (e.g. gas);
if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make
sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the
replaced one. For the presettings procedures see para.6.3 on page 367.
7.6.3 Particular rules on spare parts management

Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different
versions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare
part stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into the
unit (program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit must
be used.
At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the
equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the
equipment it refers to.
7.7 Repair Form
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 166. on
page 420.
The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
419 / 436
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
CUSTOMER NAME
ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
STATION/RACK
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER

Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
SUBRACK
SLOT
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
REASON FOR REPAIR
PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION /
TURN ON
CLEAR FAULT
DROP IN PERFORMANCE
OPERATION
INTERMITTENT FAULT
UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING
EXTERNAL
MAINTENANCE
AIR COND.
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE
NAME OF SENDER
FAULT STILL PRESENT

AFTER REPAIR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND
FAULTS DETECTED
UPGRADE
SOLDERING /
WIRING
A
STANDARD REPAIRING
I
NOT REPAIRABLE
(REJECTED)
QUALITY ALERT
FL
MECHANICAL
M
BD
PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
V1
P
DIRT
V1
CORROSION
SUBSTITUTED
I
ADJUSTMENT
COMPONENT
C
V2
OTHER
SX
V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
Figure 166. Repair form
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
420 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
APPENDICES
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
421 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

No Appendices are enclosed in this Handbook
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
422 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
423 / 436

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
424 / 436

UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST

This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Table 26. on page 428 according to the ANV part number.
TABLE EXPLANATION:
UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS

Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
a dual Part No.:
Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)
NOTE
The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible
alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL34065AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between FACTORY P/N + CS and
ANV P/N + ICS
Table 25. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS
N.B.
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AA AA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AA AB
01
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AA AC
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the suffix + ICS if the ANV code is referred to.
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated
in para. 4.4 on page 34.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
425 / 436
CROSSREFERENCE
Id.
Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.
App.
It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the subunit belongs.
The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to a unit,
by considering the above cited crossreference, and by using the presetting documents indicated
in the table and presented in the following point.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
ANV P/NMSxxx
is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents may
be given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook).
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled.
Use of the document MSxxx:
MSxxx means document for hardware presetting options (the MSxxx documents Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CSICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSsICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that:
a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;
a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Table 26. on page 428, which
shows the ON (closed) position of microswitches.
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
426 / 436

EXAMPLE
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!

N.B.
Taking into account the same unit of Table 25. on page 425:
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
03
AC
01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
487.156.612
04
3AL 34422 AAAD
01
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
427 / 436
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is
the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is
not specified in this table.
NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Id
ED
App
PARTS No.
Document
for hardware
presettings
3AL 34065 AA
(411.100.120 B)
3AL 34066 AA
(411.100.129 G)
3 x 34 Mbit/s TRIB.
140/STM1 Switch Tributary
L4.2 STM4 Aggregate Port
3AL 34069 AA
(411.100.134 V )
L4.2 Aggregate Port SC
3AL 34069 AB
(411.100.406 F)
Full Matrix
3AL 34072 AA
(411.100.142 D)
21x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm TRIB
3AL 34075 AB
(411.100.331 A)
21x2 Mbit/s 120 ohm TRIB
3AL 34075 AC
(411.100.330 M)
L1.1 Trib. SC
3AL 34077 AA
(411.100.158 M)
3 x 45 Mbit/s TRIB.
3AL 34080AA
(411.100.162H)
S1.1 Trib. FC.
3AL 34277 AA
( 411.100.171 A)
S1.1 Trib.
DIN
3AL 34278 AA
( 411.100.172 B)
L1.1 Trib.
DIN
3AL 34279 AA
( 411.100.173 C)
L1.1 Trib. FC
3AL 34280 AA
(411.100.174 D)
L4.1 STM4 Aggregate Port
3AL 34291 AA
(411.100.153 G)
S4.1 STM4 Aggregate Port
3AL 34292 AA
(411.100.154 H)
S4.1 Aggregate Port DIN
3AL 34293 AA
(411.100.168 P)
L4.1 Aggregate Port DIN
3AL 34294 AA
(411.100.169 Q)
L4.2 Aggregate Port DIN
S1.1 Trib. 600
3AL 34295 AA
(411.100.170 M)
3AL 34296 AA
(411.100.185 Z)
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
428 / 436

Table 26. Hardware presetting documentation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Id
NAME
App
PARTS No.
Document
for hardware
presettings
S1.1 Trib. SC
3AL 34324 AA
(411.100.160 k)
L1.1 Trib. 600
3AL 34437 AA
(411.100.247 N)
AUX EOW UNIT
3AL 34453 AE
(411.100.483 U)
AUX EOW Extension
3AL 34453 AF
(411.100.484 V)
34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5x2 Mbit/s

Trib.
3AL 34474 AA
(411.100.236 B)
S4.1 Aggregate Port SC
3AL 34652 AA
(411.100.243 J)
L4.1 Aggregate Port SC
3AL 34653 AA
(411.100.244 K)
aa
SMEC 2A 8R+16F
3AL 34732 AA
(411.100.301M)
ab
L4.2JE STM4 Aggregate Port
3AL 34733 AA
(411.100.302 N)
ac
L4.2 JE Aggregate Port DIN
3AL 34733AB
(411.100.390J)
ad
L4.2 JE Aggregate Port SC
3AL 34733AC
(411.100.431 X)
ae
ENHANCED CRU 0.37 PPM
3AL 34787 AA
(411.100.306 J)
af
S1.1 Trib. 600 SC
3AL34804AA
(411.100.245 L )
ag
L1.1 Trib. 600 SC
3AL 34805 AA
(411.100.246 M)
ah
L1.2 TRIB FC
3AL 34918 AA
(411.100.325 C)
ai
L1.2 TRIB SC
3AL 34918 AC
(411.100.788 M)
aj
L1.2 TRIB 600
3AL 35714 AA
(411.100.358 V)
ak
ENHANCED CRU
3AL 35808 AA
(411.100.363J)
al
L16.1 HM1 Aggregate
3AL 35810 AA
(411.100.349U)
am
L16.1 HM1 Aggregate SC
3AL 35810AB
(411.100.459 K)
an
L16.2 HM1 Aggregate
3AL 35811 AA
(411.100.361Q)
ao
L16.2 HM1 Aggregate SC
3AL 35811AB
(411.100.460 Q)
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
429 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NAME
App
PARTS No.
ap
L16.1 HM1 Aggregate
3AL 35853 AA
(411.100.372K)
aq
S16.1 HM1 Aggregate SC
3AL 35853AB
(411.100.458 J)
ar
L16.2 JE1 HM1 Aggregate
3AL 35854 AA
(411.100.373L)
as
L16.2 JE1 HM1 Aggregate SC
3AL 35854AB
(411.100.461 D)
at
L16.2 JE2 HM1 Aggregate
3AL 35855 AA
(411.100.374M)
au
3AL 35855AB
(411.100.462 E)
av
21x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm RETIMING

TRIB
3AL 35905 AB
(411.100.656 Q)
aw
21x2 Mbit/s 120 ohm RETIMING

TRIB
3AL 35905 AC
(411.100.657 R)
ax
3X34/45 Prot. Access Module

1.0
3AL 36155AA
(487.156.448 G)
ay

1.6
3AL 36155AB
(487.156.444 U)
az

T43
3AL 36155AC
(487.156.449 H)
ba
140/STM1 Prot. Access Module

1.0
3AL 36156AA
(487.156.445 V)
bb

1.6
3AL 36156AB
(487.156.446 W)
bc

T43
3AL 36156AC
(487.156.447 X)
bd
L16.2 JE1.1 HM1 Aggregate

SC
3AL36516 AA
(411.100.507 C)
be
S16.1
3AL36516 AB
(411.100.513 Z)
bf
S16.1 Aggr. 61 FC ENHANC.
3AL36516 BA
(411.100.969 J)
bg
S16.1 Aggr. 61 SC ENHANC.
3AL36516 BB
(411.100.975 G)
bh
L16.1 ID Aggregate FC
3AL36517 AA
(411.100.508 M)
bi
L16.1
3AL36517 AB
(411.100.514 S)
bj
L16.1 Aggr. 61 FC ENHANC.
3AL36517 BA
(411.100.970 P)
bk
L16.1 Aggr. 61 SC ENHANC.
3AL36517 BB
(411.100.976 H)
ED
ID Aggregate SC
ID Aggregate SC

Id
Document
for hardware
presettings
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
430 / 436
PARTS No.
Document
for hardware
presettings
L16.2 ID Aggregate FC
3AL36518 AA
(411.100.509 N)
bm
L16.2
3AL36518 AB
(411.100.515 T)
bn
L16.2 Aggr. 61
FC
ENHANC.
3AL36518 BA
(411.100.971 C)
bo
L16.2 Aggr. 61
SC
ENHANC.
3AL36518 BB
(411.100.977 A)
bp
L16.2 JE1 ID Aggregate FC
3AL36519 AA
(411.100.510 A)
bq
L16.2 JE1 ID Aggregate SC
3AL36519 AB
(411.100.516 U)
br
L16.2 JE1 Aggr.61

ENHANCED FC
3AL36519 BA
(411.100.972 D)
bs
L16.2 JE1 Aggr.61

ENHANCED SC
3AL36519 BB
(411.100.978 K)
bt
3AL36520 AA
(411.100.511 X)
bu
3AL36520 AB
(411.100.517 V)
bv
L16.2 JE2 Aggr.61

ENHANCED FC
3AL36520 BA
(411.100.973 E)
bw
L16.2 JE2 Aggr.61

ENHANCED SC
3AL36520 BB
(411.100.979 L)
bx
3AL36521 AA
(411.100.512 Y)
by
3AL36521 AB
(411.100.518 E)
bz
L16.2 JE3 Aggr.61

ENHANCED FC
3AL36521 BA
(411.100.974 F)
ca
L16.2 JE3 Aggr.61

ENHANCED SC
3AL36521 BB
(411.100.980 A)
cb
3AL36561AA
(411.100.520C)
cc
L16.2 JE3 HM1 Aggregate FC
3AL36561AB
(411.100.643 K)
cd
DVB Tributary
3AL 37450AA
(411.100.641 R)
ce
L16 Agg. 192.3 SC 6400
3AL37615 AA
(411.100.710 J)
cf
L16 Agg. 192.5 SC 6400
3AL37615 AB
(411.100.711 F)
cg
L16 Agg. 192.7 SC 6400
3AL37615 AC
(411.100.712 G)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Id
bl
ED
NAME
ID Aggregate SC
App
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
431 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NAME
App
PARTS No.
ch
L16 Agg. 192.9 SC 6400
3AL37615 AD
(411.100.713 H)
ci
L16 Agg. 193.1 SC 6400
3AL37615 AE
(411.100.714 A)
cj
L16 Agg. 193.3 SC 6400
3AL37615 AF
(411.100.715 B)
ck
L16 Agg. 193.5 SC 6400
3AL37615 AG
(411.100.716 C)
cl
L16 Agg. 193.7 SC 6400
3AL37615 AH
(411.100.717 D)
cm
L16 Agg. 194.3 SC 6400
3AL37615 AL
(411.100.718 N)
cn
L16 Agg. 194.5 SC 6400
3AL37615 AM
(411.100.719 P)
co
L16 Agg. 194.7 SC 6400
3AL37615 AN
(411.100.720 L)
cp
L16 Agg. 194.9 SC 6400
3AL37615 AP
(411.100.721 H)
cq
L16 Agg. 195.1 SC 6400
3AL37615 AQ
(411.100.722 A)
cr
L16 Agg. 195.3 SC 6400
3AL37615 AR
(411.100.723 B)
cs
L16 Agg. 195.5 SC 6400
3AL37615 AS
(411.100.724 C)
ct
L16 Agg. 195.7 SC 6400
3AL37615 AT
(411.100.725 D)
cu
STM16 Agg.61 192.3/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BA
(411.100.981 X)
cv
STM16 Agg.61 192.5/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BB
(411.100.982 Y)
cw
STM16 Agg.61 192.7/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BC
(411.100.983 Z)
cx
STM16 Agg.61 192.9/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BD
(411.100.984 S)
cy
STM16 Agg.61 193.1/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BE
(411.100.985 T)
cz
STM16 Agg.61 193.3/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BF
(411.100.986 U)
da
STM16 Agg.61 193.5/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BG
(411.100.987 V)
db
STM16 Agg.61 193.7/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BH
(411.100.988 E)
dc
STM16 Agg.61 194.3/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BL
(411.100.989 F)
ED

Id
Document
for hardware
presettings
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
432 / 436

Id
NAME
App
dd
STM16 Agg.61 194.5/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BM
(411.100.990 C)
de
STM16 Agg.61 194.7/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BN
(411.100.991 Z)
df
STM16 Agg.61 194.9/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BP
(411.100.992 S)
dg
STM16 Agg.61 195.1/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BQ
(411.100.993 T)
dh
STM16 Agg.61 195.3/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BR
(411.100.994 U)
di
STM16 Agg.61 195.5/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BS
(411.100.995 V)
dj
STM16 Agg.61 195.7/6400

ENHANCED SC
3AL37615 BT
(411.100.996 W)
dk
3AL37718 AA
(411.100.871 G)
3AL 34020 AA
(487.155.306 H)
3AL 34020 AAAA

MSZZQ
3AL 34024 AA
(487.156.367E)
3AL 34024 AAAA

MSZZQ
3AL 34025 AA
(487.156.313 Y)
3AL 34025 AAAA

MSZZQ
Card Controller TRIB/2
xaf
ie
g aeak
vwavawcd
3AL 34055 AA
(483.100.046 H)
3AL 34055 AAAA

MSZZQ
Card Controller LAP 1/2
hklstafag
ubj
mahajai
3AL 34056 AA
(483.100.047 A)
3AL 34056 AAAA

MSZZQ
140/STM1 Tributary
3AL 34335 AA
(483.100.067 E)
3AL 34335 AAAA

MSZZQ
34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5x2 Mbit/s

Trib.
3AL 34477 AA
(483.100.081 V)
3AL 34477 AAAA

MSZZQ
Equipment Controller SMEC2
aa
3AL 34649AA
(487.156.720C)
3AL 34649 AAAA

MSZZQ
21x2 Mbit/s TRIB 120 ohm
3AL 34691 AA
(487.156.343 E)
3AL 34691 AAAA

MSZZQ
21x2 Mbit/s TRIB 75 ohm
3AL 34693 AA
(487.156.344 F)
3AL 34693 AAAA

MSZZQ
Enhanced CRU
ae
3AL 34788 AA
(487.156.617 Z)
3AL 34788 AAAA

MSZZQ
L1.2 Trib. FC
ah
3AL 34919 AA
(487.156.358 M)
3AL 34919 AAAA

MSZZQ
3x34 Mbit/s Trib.
DS Future Bus Termination
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3x45 Mbit/s TRIB
ED
PARTS No.
Document
for hardware
presettings
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
433 / 436
3AL 34963 AA
(478.120.804 L)
3AL 34963 AAAB

MSZZQ
aj
3AL 35715 AA
(487.156.366 D)
3AL 35715 AAAA

MSZZQ
alanap
aratcbaqam
aoasaucc
3AL 35798 AA
(487.156.371A)
3AL 35798 AAAA

MSZZQ
Enhanced CRU
ak
3AL 35809AA
(487.156.383X)
3AL 35809 AAAA

MSZZQ
21 x 2 Mbit/s Trib. 120 OHM Retiming
aw
Id
NAME
App
Power Supply
L1.2 Trib. Optic 600
STM16 HM1 Aggregate
PBA Optical Trib 600
PBA LAP_QE
STM 4 Aggregate
3AL 36009 AA
(487.156.398 E)
3AL 36009 AAAA

MSZZQ
bdbebfbgbh
bibjbkblbm
bnbobpbq
bsbrbtbubx
bvbybzca
cecfcgchci
cjckclcmcn
cocpcqcrcs
ctcucvcw
cxcyczdadb
dcdddedf
dgdhdidj
3AL 36110 AA
(483.100.134 W)
3AL 36110 AAAA

MSZZQ
3AL 36162 AA
(487.156.443 T)
3AL 36162 AAAA

MSZZQ
ayaxaz
3AL 36166 AA
(487.156.622 W)
3AL 36166 AAAA

MSZZQ
cdnopqr
yzabacad
3AL 36264 AA
(487.156.509 E)
3AL 36264 AAAA

MSZZQ
vw
3AL 36340 AA
(483.100.157 D)
3AL 36340 AAAA

MSZZQ
bdbebhbibl
bmbpbqbt
bubxbycecf
cgchcicjck
clcmcnco
cpcqcrcsct
3AL 36389 AA
(487.156.511 P)
3AL 36389 AAAA

MSZZQ
hjklmtah
3AL 37290 AA
(487.156.553 Z )
3AL 37290 AAAA

MSZZQ
3AL 37422AA
(483.100.180 H)
3AL 37422 AAAA

MSZZQ
AUX EOW unit
STM 16 ID Aggregate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical STM1 Trib

DVB Tributary
21 x 2 Mbit/s Trib. 75 OHM
Retiming
ED
3AL 35906 AAAA

MSZZQ
suafag
Alarm Interface Acc. Module

Switch Module 34 Mbit/s
3AL 35906 AA
(483.100.125 V)
cd
av
3AL 37472 AA
(483.100.186 T)
3AL 37472 AAAA

MSZZQ
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
434 / 436

PARTS No.
Document
for hardware
presettings
App
PARTS No.
Document
for hardware
presettings
babbbc
3AL 37474 AA
(487.156.652C)
3AL 37474 AAAA

MSZZQ
3AL 37480 AA
(487.156.563 T)
3AL 37480 AAAA

MSZZQ
PBA Colored Expansion
bdbebfbgbh
bibjbkblbm
bnbobpbq
brbsbtbubv
bwbxbybz
cacecfcgch
cicjckclcm
cncocpcq
crcsctcucv
cwcxcyczda
dbdcddde
dfdgdhdidj-
3AL 37486AA
(483.100.189 E)
3AL 37486 AAAA

MSZZQ
dk
3AL 37717AA
(487.156.487 Q)
3AL 37717 AAAA

MSZZQ
3AL 37747 0001

(962.000.022 F)
3AL 37747 0001

MSZZQ
3AL 37756 AA
(487.156.594 K)
3AL 37756 AAAA

MSZZQ

Id
NAME
CMI Switch Module (140 Mbit/s)

Power Access Module/2
Microswitches ON position
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM 16 ID Aggregate Enhanced
ED
bfbgbjbkbn
bobrbsbvbw
bzcacucv
cwcxcyczda
dbdcddde
dfdgdhdidj-
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
435 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
07
955.100.562 K
3AL 36668 AA AA
436
436 / 436

1651SM &amp; 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 &amp; R1.5.1

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

1651SM &amp; 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 &amp; R1.5.1

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 442

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

Vedere lista da pagina:

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

ALCATEL OPTICS GROUP

ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10

sistemazione toc e figlist

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

622 Mbit/s AddDrop Multiplexer

3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT

3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1651SM 2.5.1 & 1661SMC 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TURNON, TEST AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6 INITIAL TURNON, TESTS AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

5.2.3 Mechanical Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

7.2 Maintenance Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1651SM & 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 & R1.5.1

1651SM & 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 & R1.5.1